文档内容
新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 1 Happy Holiday
Section A How do people spend their holidays?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. ancien t /'eɪnʃənt/adj.古代的；古老的 2. camp /kamp/n. 度假营；营地v. 露营；宿营
3. l andscape /'lændskeɪp/n. 风景；景色 4. strang e /strerndʒ/adj. 奇怪的；陌生的
5 . vacation /və'keɪʃn/n. 假期；度假 6 . fantastic /fæn'tæstik/adj. 极好的；了不起的
7. tow n / taun/n.镇；商业区 8 .breath / breθ/n. 呼吸的空气； 一口气
10. especiall y /i'speʃəli/adv.尤其；特别 11. steame d /sti:md/chicken soup 汽锅鸡
12. anywher e /'eniwea(r)/adv.&pron. 在任何地方；随便什么地方
13. nothin g /'nʌθɪŋ/n.没有什么东西；没有事pron.没有任何东西；没有事
15 . scenery /'si:nəri/n. 风景；景色 16. sil k /silk/n.丝绸；(蚕)丝
17. scar f /ska:f/n.围巾；披巾 19. hote l /həu'tel/n.旅馆；旅社
20 . comfortable /'kʌmftabl/adj.使人舒服的；舒适的
21. read y /'redi/adj.准备好的；现成的 adv. 已做完； 已完成
23. somewher e /'sʌmweə(r)/adv. 在 某 处 ； 到 某 处pron.某处；某个地方
24. sk y /skar/n.天；天空 25. bore d /bɔ:d/adj.厌倦的；烦闷的
27. toward s /tə'wɔ:dz,two:dz/(toward)prep. 向；朝
28. rainbow /'reɪnbəu/n.虹；彩虹
29. squar e /skweə(r)/n.广场；正方形adj. 正方形的； 平方的
30 . during /'djuəriŋ/prep.在……期间 31. victor y /'viktəri/n.胜利；成功
32. Russia n /'rʌʃn/adj.俄罗斯的；俄罗斯人的n.俄 罗斯人；俄语
33. figh t /fart/n. 战斗；搏斗；斗争 v.(fought/f:t/)打 仗；打架
34. agains t /ə'genst/prep.反对；与……相反；紧靠
36. guid e /gaɪd/n.导游；指南；手册v.给某人领路； 指导
1新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
37. artwor k /'a:twə:k/n.艺术作品；插图 39. tea r /'tiə(r)/n.眼泪；泪水
二．重点词汇变形
1. cam p 露营(n./v.)→ camper(n.) 露营者
2. strang e 奇怪的(adj.)→ strangel y (adv.) 奇 怪 地 → strange r (n.)陌生人
3. breat h 呼吸 (n.)→ breathe (v.) 呼 吸 → breath less (adj.)
4. especiall y 尤其；特别地 (adv.)→ especia l (adj.) 特别的；特殊的；格外的
5. comfortabl e 舒服的(adj.)→comfortably (adv.) 舒 适 地 → comfort (v.) 安慰
6. bore d 无聊的（修饰人） (adj.)→ borin g (adj.)无聊的(修饰物)
7. victor y 胜利；成功(n.)→ victorie s (复数形式)
8. Russia n 俄国人；俄国的(n./adj.)→ Russi a (n.)俄罗斯
9. figh t 打架；奋斗(n./v.)→ fighte r (n.)战 士
10. artwor k 艺术品 (n.)→ artis t (n.) 艺 术 家 → ar t (n.) 艺术
11. peac e 和平(n.)→peaceful(adj.) 和平的；平静的 → peacefully (adv.) 安详地；平静地
12. easil y 容易地(adv.)→easy(adj.) 容易的；简单的→ uneasy (adj.) 不容易的
13. forg e t 忘记 t(v.)→forgettable(adj.) 容易忘记的；健忘的 →forgetful(adj.) 健忘的；好忘事的
→forgetfulness (n.) 健忘；遗忘
三．重点短语通关
1. take l essons 上课 2.ancient buildings 古建筑
3. go to the mountains 去爬山 4.go to a summer camp 去参加夏令营
5. go back to 返回 6.go to a strawberry festival 去参加草莓节
7. go on holiday/vacation 去度假 8. see the sunrise 看日出
9. stay in .. . 待在... 10.take sb's breath away 令人惊叹；令人叹绝
11 .take photos 拍照片 12. steamed chicken soup 汽锅鸡
13 .stay at home 待在家里 14.have a wonderful experience 一次美好的体验
15.nothing but 只有；只是 16. double rainbow 双彩虹
17. during World WarⅡ 在二战期间 18. walk through ... . 走过....
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
2新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Section A课文重现
Adam: Hi, Peter. How are you?
Peter: Hi, Adam. I'm fine, thanks.
Adam: How was your holiday?
Peter: It was fantastic.
Adam: Did you go anywhere interesting?
Peter: Yes, I went to Yunnan with my family.
Adam: Wow! That sounds great. Did you go to Lijiang ?
Peter: Yes, we stayed in the old town for a few days, and we enjoyed it
very much.
Adam: Did you visit Yulong Mountain? _Everyone says it's beautiful .
Peter: It is! It just took my breath away. We took a lot of great photos there.
Adam: Did you eat anything special?
Peter: Yes, we did! Everything tasted good, especially the steamed chicken soup. What about you?
_Someone said you went to Beijing.__
Adam: No, not this holiday. I did nothing special.I just stayed at home to read, play games, and relax, but it was still
fun.
【考点1.】Did you go anywhere interesting?你去了任何有趣的地方吗？
【用法详解】①这是一个一般疑问句，询问的是发生在过去的事情。由助动词提问，回答也用助动词did。一般过
去时的一般疑问句的句子结构是＂Did+ 主语+ 动词原形+其他?＂。其肯定回答是：Yes, 主格代词+did；否定回
答是：No, 主格代词+ didn’t.。
Eg:Did you visit YuLong Mountain?---Yes.I did./No I didn’t你去玉龙雪山了吗？--是的，去了。/不，没有去。
②anywhere意为“ 在任何地方 ; 随便哪个地方 ”，是复合不定代词。用于否定、疑问句和条件句中。
Eg:I can't find my keys anywhere.我到处都找不到钥匙。
I don’t want to go anywhere because of the bad weather .我不想去任何地方因为天气不好。
③anywhere在肯定句中表示“随便哪个地方”(强调“无限制选择”)。
Eg:You can sit anywhere you like.你可以随便坐。
You can explore anywhere unknown .你可以去探索任何未知的新境。
④anywhere interesting意为“有趣的地方”，当形容词修饰复合不定代词时，形容词需后置。
Eg:anywhere beautiful 美丽的地方 anywhere cool 凉快的地方 anywhere dangerous 危险的地方
⑤拓展：everywhere每个地方；到处，nowhere无处，somewhere 某个地方。
Eg: We can go somewhere quite to chant with each other .我们可以去一个安静的地方聊聊天。
There's nowhere to hide.无处可藏。
3新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
She looked everywhere but couldn’t find her missing earring .她到处看了也没有用找到她丢失的耳环。
牛
刀小试
( B ) 1.Did you go last summer holiday? -Yes. I went to Shanghai Disney,
A. somewhere special B. anywhere special
C. special somewhere D. special anywhere
( D )2. Have you seen my mobile phone, Sam? I can’t find it .
A.everywhere B.somewhere C.nowhere D.anywhere
( B )3.--Is there____ to buy coffee here? -Yes, the Cotti coffee shop is there .
A. somewhere B.anywhere C.nowhere D.everywhere
( B )4. —Did you last week?
.—Yes, I went to Dalian with my parents.
A.go somewhere interesting B. go anywhere interesting
C. go interesting anywhere D. go to anywhere interesting
【考点2】 we stayed in the old town for a few days.我们在古城待了几天。
【用法详解】辨析 little, a little, few, a few 巧记口诀：
few /a few little /a
①a few意为“ 有一些 ; 有几个 "，表示肯定的意义。修饰可数名 词。
little
短的可数，长的不可数；
Eg:Today I eat a few apples.今天我吃了几个苹果。
有a就有，没a就没有。
②few意为“没有，几乎没有"，表示否定的意义。修饰可数名 词。
Eg: I feel sad, because I have few chips.我感到很伤心，因为我没有薯片了。
③a little意为“有一点，有一些”，表示肯定的意义。修饰不可数名词。
Eg:There is a little milk in that bottle.瓶子里还有一点牛奶。
④little意为“几乎没有”，表示否定的概念。修饰 不可数名 词 。
Eg:There is little milk in the bottle.瓶子里几乎没有牛奶了。
牛
刀小试
用little, a little, few, a few填空。
1. I have a little water left. There's enough to share.
2. I have a few good friends. I'm not lonely,
3. He has little education. He can't read or write at all, and he can hardly count.
4. There are few people she really trusts. It's a bit sad.
5. We've got a little time at the weekend. Would you like to meet?
4新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6. Julie gave us a few apples from her garden. Shall we share them?
7. She has little self-confidence. She has a lot of trouble talking to new people.
8. There are few women politicians in the UK. Many people think there should be more.
9. It's a great pity, but the hospital has little medicine. They can't help many people.
10. I've got a few cakes to give away. Would you like one?
11. There's a little milk left in the fridge. It should be enough for our coffee.
12. Few children from this school go on to university, unfortunately.
13. Do you need information on English grammar? I have a few books on the topic if you would like to borrow them.
14.She's lucky. She has few problems.
15. London has little sunshine in the winter. That's why so many British people go on holiday to sunny places!
【考点3】It just took my breath away.它几乎要让我不能呼吸。
【用法详解】①breath在句中作名词，意为“呼吸”。其动词形式为breathe 意为“呼吸，吸气”。
相关搭配：hold one's breath 屏住呼吸:屏息静气out of breath 气喘吁吁take a deep breath 深呼吸
②took是take的过去式，其过去分词为taken 。
take away意为“带走；拿走；减去”。
相关用法： 1）take表示拿走某物。Eg:He took the umbrella.他带走了那把伞。
2）take表示接受某物或某事。Eg:I will take your advice.我会接受你的建议。
3）take表示乘坐某种交通工具。
Eg:He takes the bus to the work everyday.他每天都坐公交车去上班。
4）take表示花费时间或精力。Eg:It takes time to learn English.学习英语需要时间。
5）take表示上某个课程。Eg:I take an English class.我上英语课。
③take相关短语
take off 脱下衣服;飞机起飞 take away 拿走，带走 take afte r 像
take up 开始从事;占据;培养 take care 小心，当心 take care o f 照看，照顾 take place 发生
take the place of 代替 take out 拿出，取出 take pride i n 以...自豪/骄傲
take part in 参加 take down 写下，记下 take in 吸入;欺骗
take over 接管 take notes 记笔记 take photo s 拍照
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.-Many wild animals are in great danger. -Let's ___to save them.
A. take off B. take down C. take action D. take after
（ A ）2.-People should find ways to _the air pollution(污染).
5新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. cut down B. cut off C. take down D. take off
（ C ）3. There will be a brand new road through the small village, so we need to___those old buildings.
A. take up B. take after C. take down D. take in
（ B ）4. Please _____your English dictionary to look up (查找)this word.
A. take off B. take out C. take inD. take to
（ B ）5.I am going to__a hobby like swimming or dancing.
A. take off B. take up C. take down D. take after
（ B ）6. If you feel hot, you can __your coat.
A. take out B. take off C. put on D. put off
【考点4】We took a lot of great photos there.我们在那里拍了很多美好的照片。
【用法详解】①take photos意为＂拍照；照相＂，take a photo/photos of sb/sth意为＂给某人/某物拍照＂。
Eg: We took many photos on the Great Wall. 我们在长城上拍了很多照片。
②a lots of 意为“大量;许多”，相当于a lot of。它既可以修饰可数名词的复数形式，又可以修饰不可数名词。修
饰可数名词复数形式时，相当于many;修饰不可数名词时，相当于much。
Eg: There are lots of birds in the tree.树上有许多鸟。
Eg: There is a lot of bread on the plate.盘子里有许多小面包。
③相关拓展：a lot可用作名词性词组，意为“许多”。
Eg:I can learn a lot about Chinese history.
我可以学到很多有关中国历史方面的知识。
a lot也可作副词词组，在句中作状语，修饰动词，表示程度，意思是“十分，非常”，相当于very much。
Eg:I like Chinese action movies a lot.我非常喜欢中国的动作片。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1、There are _ ___ sweets in the basket.He often eats _ __ .
A. a lot of, a lot off B. a lot of, a lot
C. lots of, a lot of D. lots of, lots of
( C )2、- I'm afraid there's no time for breakfast.
- No hurry.There's still time before the first lesson begins.
A. a lot B. lot of C. lots of D.a lots
( A )3、Tom knows about China.He began to live in China in 2000.
A. a lot B.lots of C.a lot of D./
【考点5】Did you eat anything special?你吃了任何特别的东西吗？
6新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Everything tasted good, especially the steamed chicken soup所有事物尝起来都非常棒，尤其是汽锅鸡。
【用法详解】①anything不定代词，意为“某事；某件东西”，主要用于疑问句或否定句中。
Eg: Do you want anything from me? 你想从我这里要些什么吗？
I can’t want anything about it. 对此我没什么可说的。
注意：anything表示“任何事，任何东西”时，用于肯定句中。
Eg: You can ask me anything you want to know. 你可以问我你想知道的任何事情。
②taste为感官动词，在此处作系动词，后接形容词作表语，不用于进行时。感官动词+adj。
【拓展】“五个感官动 词”：
③.especially adv. 尤 其 ; 特别通常放在所强调的词
前或句尾，用于强调某事物在整体中更为重要或特殊。修饰形容词、副词或动词，加强程度。
Eg: I love all fruits, especially strawberries.我喜欢所有水果，尤其是草莓。
The exam was especially difficult this year.今年的考试特别难。
易混淆词: s pecia l 特别的 speciall y 专门地，强调目的性 especiall y 强调程度
Eg:This room was specially built for meetings.这个房间是专门为会议建造的。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.When our teacher heard of the new, he was too angry to say___________.
A. everything B. nothing C. something D. anything
（ A ）1.—How about the fruit salad?
—Yummy! It taste very . By the way, who made it?
A. good B. bad C. well D. badly
（ B ）3.I enjoy outdoor activities,______hiking.
A. specially B.especially C.generally
4. This movie is especiall y (特别) popular among teenagers.
【考点6】 I did nothing specia l 我没有做什么特别的事。
【用法详解】nothing为代词，意为“没有任何东西；没有事”,它可以在句子中作主语、宾语或表语。
7新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:Nothing is impossible if you put your heart into it.只要你用心去做，没有什么是不可能的。
It has nothing to do with you. 这与你无关。
相关拓展：辨析nothing、none 与 no one 的用法区别
①nothing只指事物，不指人；回答what引导的问句，表示“没有事；没有任何东西”;其 作主语时，谓语动词
用第三人称单数形式。
Eg:—What did you do on your summer vacation ? 你在暑假做了什么?
—Nothing special.I just stay at home .没什么特别的,我只是待在家里。
②none既可以指人，也可以指物。回答how many/much引导的询问数量的问句，表示 “没有一个；毫无”;
可单独使用，也可与of连用；none of后接 复数名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词用单复数形式均可。
Eg:I will take none of your advice.我将不采纳你的建议。
③no one 只能指人，不能指物；回答who引导的问句，表示“没人”;通常单独使用，不与of连用；其作主
语时，谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。
Eg:No one is perfect in the world. 世界上没有人是完美的。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Mom, can I have ____________ to eat? I’m hungry.
—Sorry, there’s ____________ in the fridge. But I think we can go out for dinner now.
A. nothing；nothing B. something；nothing C. anything；something D. something；something
2.There is nothin g interesting in the this movie，I don’t like it。
【考点7】Everyone was ready to find somewhere to go.每个人都准备好 找要去的地方。
【用法详解】ready 意为“准备好的；现成的” 。相关搭配：①be ready to do sth 准备好做某事；愿意做某事
②be ready for sth 为某事做好准备
Eg:He is ready to leave this city. 他准备好离开这座城市了。
Eg: He's ready to help.他准备好帮忙了。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.-Are you______the trip? -Yes, I've packed everything.
A. ready for B.ready to C.ready with
( B ) 2.They were ready somewhere to go.
A.find B.to find C.finding D.finds
【考点7】I was so bored that I decided to find somethin g to read.我是如此的无聊，以至于决定找东西读。
【用法详解】①bored形容词，意为“ 厌烦的 : 厌倦的 "，其主语为人。boring形容词，意为“令人感到无聊的;令人
感到厌烦的"，其主语多为物或做定语。
8新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:This boring book made him feel bored.这本无趣的书让他感觉无聊。
②so...that...意为“ 如此 . .. 以致于 ”。 so+ 形容词 / 副词 +that+ 结果状语从句 ，强调原因的程度导致某种结果，表示
因果关系。
Eg:He is so hard-working that he can win the first place.
他如此努力，以致于赢得了第一名。
Eg:She speaks so fast that I can't understand her.
她说得如此快，以致我听不懂。
③such...that...: 如此...以致... such +(a/an)+ 形容词 + 名 词 ( 强调名词 )
Eg:They are such kind people.他们是如此善良的人。
Eg:TShe is such a good singer that everyone applauds.她唱得那么好，每个人都为之鼓掌。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.The TV play ZangHaiZhuag acted by XiaoZhan was________wonderful_____I watched it many times.
A. so...that B.such...that C.too...to
（ A ）2. He made______many mistakes________he failed the exam.
A. so...that B.such...that C.enough...to
（ B ）3. It was _______ a cold night_______we lit a fire.
A. so...that B. such...that C.too...to
4.The cake was s o delicious tha t everyone asked for more.
（ A ）5.Don't be ,or they will probably stop talking and walk
away.
A.bored B.boring C.tiring D. angrily
四．单元重点语法讲练
1.复合不定代词语法概述
复合不定代词是由some, any, no, every加上-body, -one, -thing构成的不定代词。
2.复合不定代词的类别
9新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
3.
some-类 any-类 no-类 every-类 复
合
-body somebody 某人；有人 anybody 任何人 nobody 没有人 everybody 每人；所有人
不
定
-one someone 某人；有人 anyone 任何人 no one 没有人 everyone 每人；所有人
代
-thing something 某事；某物 anything 任何事物 nothing 没有什么 everything 每件事；一切 词
用
-where somewhere 某地 anywhere 任何地方 everywhere 每地
法
及
考点
①.复合不定代词的数
复合不定代词通常被看成是单数。当它们充当句子的主语时，其后的谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。
Eg:Everybody is a cute bystander. 每个人都是可爱的旁观者。
Eg:Everything is lovely.万物可爱。
②.some- 类和 any-类复合不定代词的用法区别
some- 类的复合不定代词常用于肯定句及以 would ， could 开头的一般疑问句中。
Eg:Someone wants to make friends with you. 有人想和你交朋友。
Eg:would you like something to eat?你想吃点东西吗？
any-类的复合不定代词常用于否定句、疑问句或条件句中。
Eg: He doesn't want to do anything except thumping him.
除了揍他一顿，他不想做任何事情。
③. 复合不定代词的定语
形容词修饰复合不定代词时，要位于其后。
Eg: Last weekend,I went somewhere beautiful and eat something delicious with my best friend Sean .
上周末我和我最好的朋友Sean一起去了一些美丽的地方吃了些美味的东西。
复合不定代词与动词不定式连用时，不定式作后置定语。
Eg:Could you buy me something to drink ?可以给我买些喝的吗？
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1．—What are you doing here?
—I don’t like this skirt. I’m trying to find ________ to wear.
A．else anything B．Everything C．something else D．new something
（ B ）2. I always believe that there isn't difficult if we set our mind to do it.
A.something B.anything C.everything D.nothing
10新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ A ）3．My purse is lost. I looked for it ________, but I couldn’t find it.
A．everywhere B．anywhere C．somewhere D．where
（ A ）4．—What's your dream job?—I want to work ________．
A．somewhere beautiful B．beautiful somewhere C．beautiful anywhere D．anywhere beautiful
（ A ）5．— Did you do ________ interesting last summer vacation?
— Yes, I ________ to Malaysia with my family.
A．anything；went B．something；went C．anything；go D．something；go
（ A ）6.—Helen, did you do last weekend?
—Yes, I visited my grandparents in the countryside.
A.anything special B.something special C.special anything D.special something
（ B ）7.—Is there else in the classroom?
—It’s empty（空的）. is listening to a speech in the school hall.
A.anyone; Anyone B.anyone; Everyone C.everyone; Anyone D.everyone; Everyone
（ A ）8.Could you stay a little longer? I have more to tell you about the plan for tomorrow.
A. something B. everything C. anything D. nothing
9. Did you see anyon e (someone) on the hill this morning?
10. The girl doesn’t like to play with anythin g (something). She only wants to read books.
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
（ B ）1．一What did your sister do last summer ?
一 She_______my aunt and stayed there for two weeks .
A．visit B．visited C．visits D．will visit
（ C ）2．—Would you like________anything?
—No，I don't feel like________anything.
A．eating，eating B．eating，to eat C．to eat，eating D．to eat，to eat
（ C ）3．This watch is _______, but I don’t have _______.
A．enough beautiful; money enough B．beautifully enough; money enough
C．beautiful enough; enough money D．enough beautiful; enough money
（ C ）4．—How did you feel about the trip?—______.
A．By train B．I'm very tired
C．It was great D．The weather was fine
11新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ C ）5．I'll buy ______ for my son，but ______ for myself.
A．nothing；nothing B．anything；nothing
C．something；nothing D．something；something
（ B ）6．_____ seems difficult________ who broke the window.
A．This;to find out B．It;to find out
C．That;finding out D．It;finding out
（ A ）7．He was waiting _______ the bus stop _________ about 2 hours.
A．for: for B．for: at C．at ; for D．for；in
（ C ）8．Mr. Black is a disabled man, so he can’t look after________well.
A．myself B．yourself C．himself D．herself
（ A ）9．There has never been such a beautiful village _________ in the world.
A．anywhere B．everywhere C．somewhere D．nowhere
（ D ）10．Fishing with Dad was so _______ for little Sam that he almost fell asleep.
A．excited B．exciting C．bored D．boring
二、完型填空
A Frenchman went to visit New York.He didn't know English.When he 11 New York，he 12 a bus to a
hotel.
It was Sunday.The Frenchman went out 13 a walk.When he went 14 the street，he suddenly 15 his
way back.On the wall near the corner of the street，he saw some English words.He 16 them down in his
notebook.“Now I know the name of this street，” he said to 17 ．“It'll be easy for me to 18 the hotel.” He
walked for a long time in the city.Then he felt tired and wanted to go back.He took the notebook out of his pocket and
19 the name of the street to a young man. 20 he did not know what the Frenchman wanted.He stopped an old
man，but the old man did not understand him， 21 ．
Then the Frenchman saw 22 young woman.The young woman knew 23 French.When she 24 the
words in his notebook，she 25 ，for in the Frenchman's notebook，there were only three words “One Way Street”．
（ B ）11．A．reached at B．got to C．arrived at D．got in
（ B ）12．A．Had B．took C．sat D．caught
（ B ）13．A．To B．for C．of D．with
（ A ）14．A．along B．away C．off D．over
（ A ）15．A．thought of B．think of C．thinks of D．is thinking of
（ C ）16．A．Writes B．write C．wrote D．written
12新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ D ）17．A．him B．her C．he D．himself
（ C ）18．A．Back B．come back C．come back to D．back to
（ B ）19．A．Read B．showed C．took D．gave
（ A ）20．A．But B．And C．Or D．Because
（ A ）21．A．either B．too C．also D．neither
（ A ）22．A．a B．an C．the D．/
（ D ）23．A．few B．a few C．many D．some
（ A ）24．A．Read B．see C．looked D．found
（ B ）25．A．cried B．laughed(笑) C．shouted D．said
三、阅读理解
A
A young boy was playing happily in front of his house when an old wise man turned up. The old man took him
to a large rock and asked the boy to push against it with all his strength.(力量)
Then the boy did this after the school day. But every night when the boy returned home, he was feeling down—
because he couldn’t move it a little though he was already sore and worn out.
A neighbor saw this and said to him, “You have been pushing against the rock for a long time,but it hasn’t moved.
So, the task is impossible and you are a failure.” These words cut like a knife into the boy’s heart.
Then the neighbor added, “why do you keep doing this? Just have a try and that is enough.”
The boy didn’t say anything, but went to find the old man.
“Sir,” the boy said, “I have tried hard, putting all my strength to do what you have asked. However, after all this
time, I haven’t even moved the rock a bit. What’s wrong with me? Why am I failing?” “ my boy, I told you to push
against the rock with all your strength. Never did I ask you to move it. Remember: your task was to push. Look at
yourself—your arms are strong; your back is shiny and brown; your hands are callused(使生茧)from constant
pressure. Your abilities now surpass what you used to have. It is true that you haven’t moved the rock. But your task
was to push and to exercise your faith. You have done a good job.”
（ D ）26．What did the old man ask the boy to do?
A．To do more exercise to build strength. B．To move the rock away.
C．To find out how strong he was. D．To try his best to push the rock.
（ C ）27．According to the neighbor’s words, we can know that______.
A．he thought the old man treated the boy badly.
B．he was touched by the boy and decided to help him.
13新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
C．he thought the boy was silly and he couldn’t finish his task.
D．he believed no one could move the rock.
（ A ）28．The word “surpass” probably means “________” in Chinese.
A．超过 B．低估 C．损失 D．消耗
（ D ）29．What can we infer from the passage?
A．The boy knew his task clearly and tried hard to do as told.
B．The boy never felt tired and upset though he failed many times.
C．All the neighbors thought the boy was totally a loser.
D．The old man expected to train a boy to be stronger.
（ B ）30．The best the title of the passage could be “_______” .
A．A Hard Push B．Don’t Lose Faith C．Just Do the task D．Why Am I Failing
B
The westerners have more vacation days than us. Some people like to stay at home during their vacation. They
work in the garden, visit their friends, read books or watch television. Many families take their lunch to a park or
somewhere far from the city. They like to eat under some trees or near a nice lake. If they live near the sea, they often
go to the seaside. There they can fish, swim or enjoy the sun.
The westerners like travelling. They think travelling and outdoor activities are the parts of their lives. They work
hard to save money, but their main purpose(目的) is to travel.
Most western students often make use of their vacation to camp. There are thousands of camp interesting
bases( 基 地 ) in western countries. They can swim, go fishing, attend lectures, and take part in many other
recreational(娱乐性的) activities there. It can help them wrest from the secrets of nature, train(训练) their viability(生
存能力), and teach them how to be self-reliant (自立).
（ C ）31．Some westerners like to ______ at home during their vacation.
A．clean their rooms B．cook their meals
C．work in the garden and watch TV D．go fishing
（ A ）32．Many families often take their lunch out and have it ______.
A．under some trees B．near the city
C．near the sea D．in the restaurants
（ B ）33．______ is very important for the westerners.
A．Working hard B．Travelling C．Saving money D．Going camping
（ A ）34．What does the underlined phrase “wrest from” mean here?
14新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．取得 B．保守 C．认识 D．探索
（ A ）35．The passage mainly tells us ______.
A．how the westerners spend their vacation
B．the westerners have more vacation days than us
C．different views on vacation between the westerners and the easterners
D．teach the western students how to be self-reliant
C
Eating in space is different from eating on the earth. The food that astronauts carry with them does not look like
the food you eat. Some food is carried in closed bags. It is cooked and frozen before the astronauts get it. All the water
is removed(分离开)from the food. In the spaceship，the astronaut puts the water back. He “ shoots ” hot or cold water
into the food bag with a special gun. He eats the food that come in bite sizes. The astronauts puts a whole piece in his
mouth at once. There can be no crumbs(碎屑). Crumbs would float around the spaceship and get in the way. Meat and
cake often come in bite sized pieces.
Astronauts cannot drink water from open cups. The water would float in drops in the air. The water is put in the
special gun. The astronaut shoots the water into his mouth.
（ C ）36．Astronauts put________ that they carry with them in close bag.
A．the clothes B．some flowers C．the food D．some stones
（ C ）37．The passage doesn't say this, but from what we have read, we can tell that_______.
A．astronauts cannot eat anything in spaceship
B．astronauts cannot drink water in spaceship
C．astronauts cannot drink water in the usual way in a spaceship
D．astronauts must learn many new and different things
（ C ）38．In the spaceship，astronauts put the water ______.
A．in a bottle B．in some bags C．back D．front
（ A ）39．—How do the astronauts drink the water? — ________.
A．They shoot the water into their mouth with a special gun
B．They drink the water with a usual cup
C．They drink the water from an open cup
D．They often drink the water with their hands
（ C ）40．The main idea of the passage is that _________.
A．astronauts eat less food in space than on the earth
15新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
B．astronauts get hungrier and thirstier in space than on the earth
C．eating and drinking in space is different from that on the earth
D．there is no enough food and water for astronauts
四、语法填空(10小题，每小题1分，共10分)
阅读下面短文，在空白处填入一个适当的词，或填入括号中所给单词的正确形式。
Students these days often have a lot of 41 ． worries (worry). Sometimes they have problems with their
schoolwork, and sometimes with their friends. What can they do about this? Some people believe the 42 worst ． (bad)
thing is to do nothing. Laura Mills, 43 a ． teenager from London, agrees. “Problems are normal in life，” says
Laura. “But I think talking to someone helps a lot. Unless we talk to someone, we'll certainly feel worse.”
Laura once lost her wallet and she 44 was ． (be) afraid to tell her parents about it. She worried for days and didn't
know 45 how ． to solve the problem. She even walked three miles to school each day because she didn't have 46 ．
any(some) money. She just kept thinking, “ 4 7 If ． I tell my parents, they'll be angry！” 48 ． Finally (final), she
talked to her parents and they were really 49 ． understanding (understand). They got her a new wallet and asked her to
be more careful. “I will always remember to share my problems in the future！” Laura says. Her dad said he
sometimes made careless mistakes 50 ． himself (him).
五、阅读回答问题(10小题，每小题1分，共10分)
My grandfather never watched TV. He thought that people spent too much time watching it. Some of his friends
often talked about sports shows, the movies and plays. My grandfather said to himself, “They never read any books or
go out in the evening.” So he didn’t buy a TV.
Two years ago my grandfather was 60 years old. He stopped working in the hospital. My father bought him a TV.
He began to watch all the news. He knows much more about the news. He knows much more about the world. And he
reads more books, too. Now, my grandfather will get very angry if you trouble him when he is watching TV. I can’t
understand that one can change his idea when he is 60.
根据短文内容，回答问题。
51．Did the writer’s grandfather watch TV before he stopped working?
No,he didn’ t
52．When did the writer’s grandfather stop working in the hospital?
Two years ago
53．How old is the writer’s grandfather now?
He is 62 now .
54．Who bought the writer’s grandfather a TV?
16新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
The writer’s father bought him a TV .
55．How will the writer’s grandfather feel if you trouble him when he is watching TV?
He will get very angr y .
Unit 1 Happy Holiday
Section B what can we learn from holiday experiences?
二．重点词汇梳理
1. remind /rɪ'maind/v. 提醒；使想起 2 . piece /pi:s/n. 和；太平
3 . easily /'i:zəli/adv. 容易地；轻易地 4. forget /fə'get/v.(forgot /fə'gɒt)忘记；遗忘
5.noon/nu:n/n. 正午；中午 6 . sick /sik/adj. 生病的；恶心的
7 . station /'steɪʃn/n. 火车站；公共汽车站 8 . palace /'pæləs/n. 王宫；宫殿
9 . accordion /ə'kɔ:diən/n. 手风琴 10. tower /'tauə(r)n.塔；塔楼
11. probably /'probəbli/adv.很可能；大概 12. might /maɪt/modal v. 可能；可以
13.budget /'bʌdʒit/n.预算 v. 把……编入预算；精 14.passport /'pa:spɔ:t/n.护照
15 . forgetful /fə'getfl/adj.健忘的；好忘事的 16 . faraway /'fa:rəweɪ,,fa:rə'wei/adj.远方的；遥远
17 .regular /'regjələ(r)/adj.平常的；有规律的 18 . countryside /'kʌntrisaɪd/n.乡村；农村
19.comfortable /'kʌmftəbl/adj.舒适的 20.comfortable /'kʌmftəbl/adj.舒适的
22. surprised /sə'praɪzd/adj.惊奇的；惊讶的 23 . deer / dɪə(r)/n.(pl.deer) 鹿
二．重点词汇变形
1. sick (adj.)生 病 的 → il l (adj.)生 病 的 ( 同 义 词 )
2. regular (adj.)有规律的→ regularl y (adv.)有规律地
3. surprised (adj.)令人惊喜的(修饰人) → surprisin g (adj.) 惊喜的；意外的(物作主语)
4. visit (v.)参观；拜访 → visito r ( 名词，游客；访问者)
5. amazing (adj.)惊奇的（修饰物） →amazed(adj.)感到惊奇的(修饰人)
6. interesting (adj.) 有趣的（修饰物）→interested(adj.感兴趣的(修饰人)
7. relaxing (adj.）放松的修 饰 物 →relaxed(adj.)感到放松的(修人)
17新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
8. heavily（adv.）大量地；沉重地→ heav y (adj.)重的
9. exactly (adv.)确切地→ exact (adj.)准确的
10. decide (v.)决 定 → de c isio n (n.)决定
11. different ( adj.) 不同的 → differenc e (n.)差别；差异
12 .excited（adj.）兴奋的 →exciting（adj.）令人兴奋的（修饰物） → excitement n.激动 →excite v.使激动
三．重点短语通关
1. walk through the halls 走过大厅 2.tell stories about 讲诉关于.….的故事
3. thousands of 成千上万的 4. fall down 摔倒，跌落
5.feel like 给.…的感觉；感受到；想要(后接动词 -ing 形式)
6.feel sick 感到恶心；感到不舒服 7.take out 拿出；取出
8.get together 聚会；相聚 9.summer holiday 暑假
10. win ter holiday 寒假 11.in the sun 在阳光下
12.go over budget 超过预算 13. in different ways 以不同的方式
14.see beautiful sights 看美丽的风景 15. rest your min d and body 让你的身心得到休息
16. go back to your regular life 回到你的日常生活 17.in the countryside 在乡下
18.make a noise 发出响声 19.turn around 转身
20. look for 寻找
21.learn from travel experiences 从旅行经历中学习
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
17 July
Today was our first day to visit Moscow. The weather was fine and everyone
felt excited to visit some famous places in Russia.
In the morning, we went to the Victory Museum. The Russian people built
this museum to remember their fight against the Nazis during World War II.
18新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
As we walked through the halls, the tour guide told us stories about the war.In one hall, I saw an artwork with
thousands of glass" tears"falling down. It reminds us that war is terrible and peace does not come easily. We should
not forget that.
At noon, we had lunch at a restaurant near the park. I liked the ice cream there, so I ate a lot of it. But, during dinner, I
didn't feel like eating because I felt sick. So now, I just want to get a good night's sleep.
18 July
It rained last night, so this morning the air was fresh and
cool. I felt much better today.
We took the Moscow Metro to travel around. The metro
stations are really beautiful. Sometimes I felt like I was
walking inside a palace. After that, we went to Red Square.
It was fantastic!
In the afternoon, we arrived at a school and met a group of
Russian students. We played games and soon became friends.Later, someone took out his accordion, and soon
everyone got together to sing and dance. We were so happy that we didn't notice the time. It was such a good
experience!
【考点1.】The weather was fine and everyone felt excited to visit some famous places in Russia.
天气很好，大家都很兴奋地参观一些俄罗斯的著名景点。
【用法详解】①excited意为“令人激动的，令人兴奋的”修饰人。修饰物则用exciting意为“兴奋的，激动的，
欢呼雀跃的”。
Eg:The movie made us so excited!这部电影太让我们兴奋了!
Eg:Did you hear that exciting news?你听说了那个令人激动的新闻了吗？
②be excited to do sth.对做某事感到激动
Eg:She was excited to meet her favorite super star.
她非常兴奋能见到自己最喜爱的明星。
相关拓展:be excited about sth.:对某事感到激动
Eg:They are excited about his coming concert.他们对他即将开启的演唱会充满期待。
牛
刀小试
1、He was too excite d (excite) to say anything when he saw her.
2、After she finished the exam, she wore an excitin g (excite) smile on her face.
19新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
3、It's excite d (excite) for us Chinese that the national football team won the game.
4、It's___exciting_____(excite) news that I have ever heard all my life.
6、-Why didn't you like the match?--It was the most exciting one that I have ever listened to.
【考点 2.】The Russian people built this museum to remember their fight against the Nazis during
World War Ⅱ .俄罗斯人建造这个博物馆是为了 纪念他们在二战期间与纳粹的斗争。
【用法详解】①fight在此处作名词，意为“斗争； 打架；战斗；斗志”等。
相关搭配: have a fight with sb.与某人打架/争吵 put up a fight 奋力抵抗
Eg:He had a fight with his brother. 他和弟弟打了一架。
Eg:He put up a good fight but lost. 他奋力拼搏但还是输了。
② fight作动词表示“打架；斗争；奋斗；争吵”等。
相关搭配: fight + 人 / 事物 与…斗争/打架 fight against/with + 人 / 事物 对抗…
fight for 为…而战 fight of f 击退
Eg:He fought the enemy bravely. 他们勇敢地与敌人战斗。
Eg: He fought against his illness for years. 他与疾病抗争多年。
Eg:The two boys fought with each other. 两个男孩打架了。
③against作介词，意为“(在比赛或战斗中)与……(某人或 某事物)竞争”,常与play和fight等词连用。
也可意为“反对；违背”,其反义词为for。against the war 反对 战争
表示位置，意为“靠着；倚着”。against the tree 靠着树
表示“碰；撞”。 against the wal l 撞到墙
表示“逆”。 against the wind 逆风
牛
刀小试
( C )1.The two brothers often ______ each other over small things, but they still love each other.
A.fight for B. fight against C. fight with D. fight off
( A )2. The two countries have been ______ each other for years.
A.fighting against B.fighting for C.fighting off D.fighting over
( C )3. She decided to ______ her fear and take the challenge.
A.fight back B.fight with C.fight against D.fight for
【考点3】In one hall,I saw an artwork with thousands of glass“tears”falling down. 在一个大厅里，
我看到了一个艺术作品，上面有成千上万的玻璃“泪 滴”落下。
【用法详解】thousand 作数词，意为“ 一千”。当thousand 前 有具体数字时，其后不加 -s , 也不与 of 连用 ；当表
20新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
示不确定的数目时（ 无具体数字时 ） ， thousand 后要加 -s , 并和 o f 连用。
Eg:There are many old things from two thousand years ago in our city museum.
在我们市博物馆里，有许多两千年前的古物。
Eg:Thousands of people were listening his concert.数以千计的人正听他的演唱会。
相关拓展：hundred（百）、million（百万）和 billion（十亿)的用法与 thousand 的用法一样。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. There are ______ people in the stadium, but I don’t know the exact number.
A.hundreds of B.two hundreds C.hundred D. a hundred of
（ B ）2. The company received three ______ applications for the job opening.
A.thousands of B.thousand C.five thousands D.a thousand of
（ C ）3. I’ve told you ______ times not to leave the door open!
A. hundreds B. a hundred of C. hundreds of D.hundred
【考点4】It reminds us that war is terrible and peace does not come easily.它提醒我们，战争是可怕的，和
平来之不易。
【用法详解】remind在此处用作及物动词，意为“提 醒；使想起”,后跟名词或代词作宾语，常与介词 about 或
of 连用。
相关搭配：①remind sb of sb/sth 使某人想起某人/某物
Eg:The picture reminds me of my childhood.这幅画让我想起了我的童年。
②remind sb to do sth 提醒某人做某事
Eg:Please remind me to buy some bread and milk. 请提醒我买些面包和牛奶。
③remind sb+that从句提醒某人……
Eg:He reminds me that I must wear the knee pads when I dance. 他提醒我跳舞的时候要带护膝。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.The old song ______ me ______ my childhood.
A.reminds; to B.reminds; of C.reminded; about D. reminded; for
( A )2.Before I left, my mom ______ me ______ turn off the lights.
A.reminded; to B.reminded; of C.reminded; for D. reminded; about
( C )3.She ______ me ______ we had a meeting at 3 PM.
A.reminded; of B.reminded; to C.reminded; that D.reminded; about
21新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )4.The smell of coffee reminded me ______ some on my way home.
A. buy B. to buy C. buying D.bought
【考点5】We should not forget that.我们不应该忘记那一点。
【用法详解】forget可以作不及物动词，也可以作及 物动词，意为“忘记；遗忘”,其后可直接 跟宾语，也可跟动
词不定式或动名词结构作宾语 。forget的反义词为remember。
相关搭配：① forget to do sth 忘记要做某事 ,表示事情还没做。
Eg:Don't forget to take out the rubbish. 别忘了倒垃圾。
② forget doing sth 忘记做过某事”,表示事情已经做过了。
Eg:I forget buying this book.我忘记买过这本书了。
相关拓展：①. Remember to do sth 记得要做某事
Eg:Remember to lock the door when you leave. 离开时记得锁门。
②. Remember doing sth 记得做过某事
Eg:I remember meeting him at a party last year. 我记得去年在一个派对上见过他。
牛
刀小试
1.Did you remember t o sen d (send) the email? I need to make sure it’s done.
2.I remember __seeing____ (see) this movie before, but I can’t recall the ending.
3. She forgot __to buy____ (buy) milk, so she had to go back to the store.
4. He will never forget travelin g (travel) to Japan for the first time.
5. Please remember t o clos e (close) the windows before you leave.
【考点6】But,during dinner,I didn't feel like eating because I felt sick.但是在晚饭期间，我不想吃任何东
西，因为我感觉身体不舒服。
【用法详解】①feel like + 名词/代词， 表示"感觉像..."或"想要..." 。
Eg: I feel like a cup of coffee. 我想要一杯咖啡。
② feel like doing sth 表示"想要做某事"= want to do sth 想要做某事。
Eg: I don't feel like going out tonight. 今晚我不想出去。
Eg: I just want to stay at home alone.我只想自己待在家里。
③feel like + 从句，表示"感觉好像..."
Eg:It feels like it's going to rain. 感觉要下雨了。
牛
刀小试
22新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ A ）1. I don't feel like ______ to the party tonight.
A. going B. to going C. to go D. go
2. I don't feel like talking right now.(想要)
3. Do you feel like having (have) some ice cream?
【考点7】We were so happy that we didn't notice the time.我们是如此的开心，以以致于没有注意到时间。
【用法详解】notice作为动词，意为“注意到”。作为名词意为“通知”。
相关搭配：
①notice sb. do sth.:注意到某人做某事(全过程)
Eg: I noticed him take the money. 我注意到他拿了钱。
②notice sb.doing sth.:注意到某人正在做某事(正在发生)
Eg:She noticed the boys coming in.她注意到那群男孩子正走进来。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.When I entered the room, I noticed the cat ______ quietly under the table.
A.sleep B.to sleep C.sleeping D.slept
（ C ）2.Did you notice anyone ______ the office yesterday afternoon?
A. leave B.to leave C. left D. leaving
【考点8】I turned around and was surprised to see a deer.我转身时惊讶地看到一只鹿。
【用法详解】surprised意为“惊奇的;惊讶的”，人做主语。若物做主语，则用surprising意为“令人惊讶的”。相
关搭配：①be surprised to do sth.:表示“对做某事感到惊讶”;
Eg:He was surprised to see a baby stand easily.他惊讶地发现这个宝宝轻易地站起来了。
②be surprised at sth.:表示“对某事感到惊讶”。
Eg:I was surprised at seeing him there.在那里看见他，我感到很惊讶。
相关拓展： in surprise 惊讶地 to one's surprise 让某人惊讶的是
牛
刀小试
( A )1.They are not at the news.
A. surprised surprising B. surprising surprised C. surprised surprised D. surprising
surprising
23新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )2.They were all at the change.
A. surprising B. surprised C. surprises D. surprise
( A )3.How about a picnic tomorrow?
A. having B.to have C. has D.had
（ D ）4.The story _________ me. I mean that I’m _________ at the _________ story.
A.surprise; surprising; surprised B.surprises; surprised; surprised
C.surprise; surprised; surprising D.surprises; surprised; surprising
【考点9】what a wonderful experience I had !多么精彩的一次经历啊。
【用法详解】what+a/an+形容词+名词+主语+谓语，是一句感叹句句型，表示赞美、惊叹、喜悦等感情。
1.what引导的感叹句
(1) What+a/an+ 形容词 + 可数名词单数 (+主语+谓语+其他)!
Eg:What a beautiful girl she is!一个多漂亮的女孩呀!
Eg:What an excellent idea it is!一个多棒的主意呀!
(2) What+ 形容词 + 可数名词复数 / 不可数名词 (+主语+谓语+其他)!
Eg:What interesting stories they are!它们是多么有趣的故事呀!
Eg:What exciting news it is!多么让人兴奋的新闻啊！
2.how引导的感叹句
(1) How+ 形容词 / 副词 (+主语+谓语+其他)!
Eg:How beautiful the girl is!这个女孩多漂亮呀!
Eg:How smart ZangHai is ! 藏海好聪明啊!
做题方法:
一去:(去主谓)去掉主语和谓语部分
二看:(是否是名词)看主语前是名词还是形容词、副词。若是名词，用What;若是
形容词或副词，用How。
牛
刀小试
用What /How /What a / What an填空
1. How nice the skirt is! 2. How hot it is today!
2. wha t big horses they are! 4. wha t a n interesting book it is!
5. wha t a clever boy he is! 6. How clever the boy is!
7. How hard Jack works! 8. How fast Peter runs!
24新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
9 wha t a fine day it is! 10. wha t nice pictures they are!
11 How time flies! 12. wha t a cute dog it is!
13. How interesting the story is! 14. How bad the weather in England is!
15. wha t a n honest boy Tom is!
16 wha t a long way from my home to your city it is!
17. wha t good time we had in the park yesterday! 18. wha t exciting news!
19. How cool your new car is! 20 How salty the soup is!
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( D )1. ---Do you enjoy traveling by air? --- No, it’s expensive.
A. too much B. more much C. much D. much too
( D )2. There four teachers and a student in he office.
A. have B. has C. is D. are
( B )3. After dinner, he stayed at home and played violin.
A. the, /, the B. /, /, the C. /, the, / D. a, the, the
( A )4. — _______ did you do last night? — I went shopping.
A. What B. How C. Why D. Where
( C )5. Kate ____ her uncle last week. She did her homework.
A. doesn’t visit B. don’t visit C. didn’t visit D. visited
( D )6. There are fifty students in our class. 30% of them are girls. _____ of them are boys.
A. Few B. A few C. Any D. Most
( C )7. There is ______ with my bike. Can you help me mend it?
A. nothing wrong B. anything wrong
C. something wrong D.wrong something
( A )8. Anna is _____ to work out the problems.
A. careful enough B. enough careful
C. carefully enough D.enough carefully
( B )9. ---______? ---She is a nurse.
A. Where does your mother do? B. What does your mother do?
C. What is your mother doing? D. Who is your mother?
( C )10. My house is ______ the post office and the bank.
A. on B. in C. between D. over
25新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )11. After supper Mary’s mother often makes her ________along the river.
A. take a walk B. takes walk C. taking a walk D. takes a walk
( C )12. We have worked for three hours. Now let’s stop a rest.
A. had B. have C. to have D. having
( C )13. The book is _____. I feel _______.
A. boring; boring B. bored; boring C. boring; bored D. bored; bored
( B )14. Near here is a beautiful park ______ a big lake in it.
A. of B. with C. on D. from
( C )15. Tom studied hard and tried _____ the exam.
A. pass B. passes C. to pass D. passing
( C )16. When I swim in the river, I _____ I’m a fish.
A. look like B. sound like C. feel like D. am like
( A )17. --- I could look after ______ when I was five. ---Really? I can’t believe it.
A. myself B. herself C. himself D. yourself
( B )18. ---The coat looks good on you. Where ____ you ____ it? --- In a supermarket.
A. do; buy B. did; buy C. will; buy D. does; buy
( B )19. One of his friends ________ from the United Kingdom.
A. come B. comes C. coming D. to come
( C )20. ---____? ---Because they are very cute.
A. What is it? B .Where are they from?
C. Why do you like pandas? D. How do you like pandas?
二、完形填空
It was sunny and hot in the morning. We went to a 21 beach. We had great fun 22 in the water. In the afternoon,
it rained. 23 we went to a museum. It was boring and crowded. So I 24 back. At night, the 5 was cool, the rain
26 . So we decided to play chess. We played 27 6:30 p.m. to 9:50 p.m. It was 28 fun. And we 29 fried chicken
and French fries, they were 30 .
( A )21. A. beautiful B. delicious C. crowded D. expensive
( B )22. A. eating B. playing C. making D. walking
( D )23. A. Because B. First C. But D. So
( A )24. A. went B. got C. had D. were
( A )25. A. weather B. day C. museum D. rain
( B )26. A. played B. stopped C. had D. started
( B )27. A. to B. from C. under D. with
26新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( C )28. A. awful B. boring C. really D. too
( A )29. A. ate B. were C. walked D. have
( D )30. A. relaxing B. interesting C. boring D. good
三、阅读理解
A
Visit Swansea Zoo
Come and see the Indian elephants and the new tigers from America.
The bears are waiting to meet you, and the monkeys from China are waiting to throw things at you.
The lovely dogs from Australia are waiting to laugh at you, and the giraffes from Zambia are waiting to
look down on you.
Tickets Opening time
Grown-ups: $2.00 9:00 a.m.— 4:00 p.m.
Children: Over 12 $1.00 except(除了)Friday
Under 12:Free 10:00 a.m.—3:00 p.m.
Keep the zoo clean!
Do not touch, give food or go near the animals.
( C )31. How many kinds of animals are talked about in the passage?
A. Four. B. Five. C. Six. D. Seven.
( C )32. Now Mr. Smith is in the zoo with his two sons, one aged 14 and the other 10, how much are the tickets
together?
A. $ 4.00. B. $ 2.00. C. $ 3.00. D. $ 1.00.
( C )33. Which of the following is the visiting time?
A. 8:30 a.m. Monday. B. 9:30a.m. Friday.
C. 3:00 p.m. Sunday. D. 5.00 p.m. Tuesday.
( D )34. From the passage we can guess the animal “giraffe” must be very _________.
A. fat B. long C. strong D. tall
( D )35. Which of the following can we do in the zoo?
A. To give some food to the fish. B. To touch the monkey on the head.
C. To throw things everywhere. D. To take a few nice photos.
B
Nobody likes staying at home on vacation—when the weather is fine. Last August we decided to spend the day in
the countryside. The problem was that millions of (数百万)other people had the same idea. We moved out of the city
slowly behind a long line of cars, but in the end we came to a quiet country road. After some time, we stopped at a
farm near the town. We had carried enough food with us and we got it out of the car. Now everything was ready so we
sat down near a path(路) at the foot of the hill(小山). It was very quiet in the cool grass until(直到) we heard bells
27新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
ringing at the top of the hill. What we saw made us pick up(捡起) our things and ran back to the car. There were about
two hundred sheep coming towards(朝) us along the path.
( B )36. From the passage we know the writer likes ______ on vacation.
A. staying at home B. spending a holiday in the open air
C. watching sheep D. likes playing with friends
( B )37. They went there ________.
A. by bus B. by car C. by train D. on foot
( A )38. Which of the following is not true?
A. Few people wanted to spend the vacation in the countryside that day.
B. They spent their vacation in the countryside.
C. They had much food to eat. D. They had their food on the grass.
( B )39. We can infer(推断) from the passage that ______.
A. the weather was very fine that day. B. the traffic (交通) was very busy.
C. they found a quiet place.
D. They picked up their food and ran away.
( D )40. What happened when the sheep were coming towards them?
A. They stayed there. B. They called for the farmers.
C. They left the food there D. they picked up their food and ran
C
根据短文内容，判断下列句子的正误，正确的用“T” ，错误的用“F”。
Kim went to a beautiful beach on Monday with his friends. It was sunny and hot. So they had great fun playing in
the water. In the afternoon, they went shopping. But the shops were crowded, they didn’t really enjoy it.
The next day, it was rainy, so they went to a museum. It was boring. Kim found a small boy crying in the corner.
The boy was lost. He helped the boy find his father. Kim was very happy. But he had no money for a taxi. So he had to
walk back to the hotel. That made him very tired.
On Wednesday, the weather was very cool. So they played tennis. They played all morning. It was really fun.
( F )41. On Monday, Kim had fun going shopping.
( F )42. It was very hot on Wednesday.
( T )43. They went to a museum on Tuesday.
( F )44. Kim helped a boy find his father and went back to the hotel by taxi.
( T )45. They played tennis on a cool day.
四、情景交际
第一节：选项补全对话，从所给选择中选择恰当的一项完成对话
28新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
从方框中选择最佳选项补全对话，其中有两项多余
A. Was it exciting
B. How was your vacation
A: 46 B ?
C. How was the movie
D. Frank helped me study it
B: It was great. I enjoyed it.
E. Where did you go on vacation
A: 47 E ? F. What did you do last night
G. Did you go to the movies last night
B: My family went to the Great Wall. We visited my
uncle in Beijing.
A: 48 G ?
B: No, I stayed at home and studied for the math exam,
49 D . Did you go?
A: Yes, I did. I saw the Rush Hour last night.
B: 50 C ?
A: It was really exciting.
第二节：从下面方框中选适当的词完成对话
go， winter， swimming， in， do， day， weather， too， hot， friendly
Tom: The weather is nice today. It’s the first 51 day of the summer. Jenny，do you like summer?
Jenny: Yes，I 52 do .I like 53 swimming very much. But I don’t like
Summer 54 in Beijing.
Tom: How’s the 55 weather there?
Jenny: It’s too cold in 56 winter and 57 too 58 hot in summer.
Tom: What do you do in summer?
Jenny: I don’t like to go out. Sometimes I 59 go swimming with my friends.
Tom: How are your friends?
Jenny: They are very 60 friendly .
Tom: That’s great.
五、词汇知识
第一节：根据句意和首字母提示完成下列句子
61. ---How was the movie? --- It was w wonderfu l . I want to see it again.
62. I think nothing (没有什么) is impossible if you work hard.
63. There are lots of h hens on the farm and I can see many eggs.
64. I can’t find my ruler an y where (在任何地方).
65. He wonder (想知道) where you were last night.
66. I like singing very much, but I d dislike to sing with them today.
67. I often take some photos with the c camer a .
29新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
68. He is a policeman and thieve s are afraid of him. (小偷)
69.Tim is on duty（值日）today. Look! He is ______ cleaning ____ （ 把...打扫干净）the classroom..
70. The w __ weather _________ i s sunny. Let’s go swimming.
第二节:用括号中所给词的适当形式填空
71. There is no difference (different) between the two books.
72. Let’s do some a ctivities (activity) today.
73. This is an old building (build).
74. They went (go) to Mountain Tai last Sunday.
75. I bought (buy) a new coat for sister last weekend.
76. Tom didn’t buy anything for himself (he) last night.
77. Everyone in my family likes (like) watching TV.
78. Do you keep a diary (diary)?
79. We took (take) three photos in our school yesterday.
80. Tom read (read) an interesting book just now.
六、句型转换
81. They were in London last week. (改为一般疑问句)
Wer e the y in London last week.
82. The child read a book two days ago. (改为否定句)
The child didn't rea d a book two days ago.
83. I cleaned my room last weekend.(对画线部分提问)
What di d you do last weekend?
84. The food in the restaurant was very delicious. (对画线部分提问)
How wa s the food in the restaurant?
85. They stopped working at 7: 00 yesterday. (改为否定句)
They __didn't stop . working at 7: 00 yesterday.
七、根据汉语意思补全句子
86. 你们假期去了哪里？
Where di d you go on vacation?
87. 上星期天气怎么样？又闷又热。
--- How wa s the weather last week? ---It was hot and humid.
88. 他们去年参观了博物馆．
They visited museum last year.
89 你决定去哪里度假？
Where do you decid e to spen d your holidays?
30新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
90 我帮迷路的小孩找到了他的父亲．
I helpe d the losin g child find his father.
八、书面表达
根据图片所提供的信息，写一篇旅行日记，不少于80字。
Saturday , July 2nd
We went to a summer camp today. The weather was great The mountains were really beautiful We had great fun
singing and dancing there. We had a lot of food and drinks with us. So we had a big lunch, I ate two hamburgers and
some orange juice. My friends all enjoyed their lunch vary much. It was so nice eating in the open air. In the evening: I
was really tired. We wanted to go back tomorrow afternoon.
31新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 2 Home sweet home
Section A what can you do for your home?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. pack /pæk/v. 打包；收拾 2. bathroom /'ba:θru:m/n. 浴室；洗手间
3. sor t /sɔ:t/v. 把……分类；整理 n. 种类 4. bedroom /'bedru:m/n. 卧 室
5. balcon y /'bælkəni/n. 阳台 6. invit e /n'vaɪt/v. 邀请
7.arrival /a'raɪvl/n.到达 8. ye t /jet/adv.(用于否定句和疑问句)还 conj.但是
9. add /æd/v.添加；加 10. biscui t /'biskit/n.饼干
11. borrow /'bɒrəu/v. 借 12 . plan /plæn/n. 策划；打算v.计划；方案
13 . treasure /'treʒə(r)/n.宝物；财富v. 珍视 14. hun t /hʌnt/v.搜寻；寻找v.搜寻；打猎
15 . lift / lift/n. 搭便车；电梯v.举起；抬起
16. unti l /ən'til/prep. 到 . … … 时；直到 … … 为
17. movi e /'mu:vi/n. 电影 18. dea d /ded/adj.不运行的；死的
19 . note /nəut/n. 笔记；记录；便条v. 注意；指出
20. communit y /kə'mju:nəti/n.社区；社团
21 . rubbish /'rʌbiʃ/n. 垃圾 22. almos t /'ɔ:lməust/adv.差不多；几乎
二．重点词汇变形
1. pack v.打包→ packe d (过去式)→ packing (现在分词)→ package n.包裹 → packer n.包装工
2.bathroom 浴室；洗手间n.→bathrooms (复数)→bath n.浴缸→bathe v.洗澡
3. sort v.整理；分类 → sorte d (过去式)→ sorting (现在分词)
4. bedroom n.卧室 → bedrooms (复数)→bed n.床
5. balcony n. 阳台→ balconies(复数)
6. invite v.邀请→ invite d (过去式)→ inviting (现在分词)→ invitation n.邀请函
7. arrival n.到达→ arriv e (v.到达)→ arrived (过去式)→arriving (现在分词)
8. add v. 添加→ adde d (过去式)→adding(现在分词)→addition(n.添加)→additional (adj.额外的)
9. borrow v.借→ borrowe d (过去式)→borrowing (现在分词)
10. plan n./v.计划→planned (过去式)→planning (现在分词)→planner n.计划者→plans 复数
11. treasure n./v.财富；宝物→ treasure d(过去式)→treasuring (现在分词)→treasures(复数)
12. hunt n./v.搜寻；打猎→ hunte d (过去式)→ hunting (现在分词)→hunter n.猎人
32新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
13. lift n./v搭便车；举起.→lifted (过去式)→lifting (现在分词)→lifter n.举重者 →lifts 复数
14.dead adj.死的；不运行的→ die v.死亡 → death n.死亡 →deadly adj.致命的
15. note n./v.笔记；注意→ note d (过去式)→ noting(现在分词)→notes(复数)
16.community n.社区；社团 → communities(复数)
三．重点短语通关
1 . pack up things 收拾东西 2. sweep the floor 扫地
3. clean the bathroom 打扫浴室 4. feed the fish 喂鱼
5 . hang up photos 挂照片 6. water plants 给植物浇水
7 . hang out with friends 和朋友闲逛 8 . sort .. . into ... . 把........分类到....
9.grow flowers 种花 10.invite...to...邀请…到…
11 . clean up 打扫 12. good job 做得不错；干得漂亮
13. can ' t wait to do sth . 等不及做某事 14.help sb.do sth. 帮助某人做某事
15. buy sth . for sb . 为某人买某物 16 . make sb . feel at home 让人感到宾至如归
17. add sth.to sth .把….加入. 18. go shopping 去购物
19. make biscuits 制作饼干 20. cook a meal 做饭
21.treasure hunt 寻宝 22. give sb.a lif/ride 开车顺便送某人
23. work from home all day 整天在家工作 24. at once 立即，马上
25. stay out 不回家，待得很晚 26. go to the toilet 上洗手间
27 . be careful with 注意；当心 28. take notes 做笔记
29 . rubbish bags 垃圾袋
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks.
Dad:Guess what! Grandpa and Grandma are visiting us this
weekend!
Jim: Oh, great!
Peter: I can't wait to show them our new house!
33新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Mum: Yes, but now we need to ge t ready for their
arrival. Can you help me clean up their room?
Peter: But their room is already clean!
Mum: Well, it's not“grandma clean" yet!
Peter: Oh, OK.
Dad: Jim, can you help me pu t th e new clock on the wall? I bought it for Grandpa to see the time.
Jim:sure, Dad.
Dad: Helen, can you mov e thi s chai r to their room? Grandpa likes reading books in front of the window.
Helen: No problem, Dad.Can I pu t som e flower s by the window?
Dad:Yes, good idea! Grandma loves flowers.
Helen: Mum, could you take me to the flowe r shop later?
Mum:No problem. Let's go after lunch.
【考点1】Mum,can I invite my friends to our new house? 妈妈，我能邀请我的朋 友们到我们的新房子里
来吗?
【用法详解】Invite作动词意为“邀请”。其名词形式是invitation 意为“邀请函；邀
请”
相关搭配：① invite sb . to do sth .邀请某人做某事
Eg:He invited me to his birthday party.他邀请我去他的生日派对。
②invite sb. to + 地点/事件 邀请某人去某地/参加某活动
Eg: Mr Cao invited ZangHai to join their team. 曹公公邀请藏海加入他们的战
队。
牛
刀小试
1. She invited me t o atten d the meeting. （attend）
2.They invited him t o giv e a speech. (give)
3.Would you like t o invit e your friends to the party? (invite)
4. They sent out the invitation s yesterday. (invite)
5.His invitatio n made me very happy. (invite)
【考点2】I can't wait to show them our new house！我迫不及待要给他们展示我们的新房子！
【用法详解】can't wait to do sth.迫不及待做某事。
Eg:I can't wait to see the new movie!我迫不及待想看那部新电影!
拓展：can’t help doing sth .忍不住/情不自禁做某事。
34新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:He can’t help following the cute rabbit .他情不自禁地跟着那只可爱的小兔子。
牛
刀小试
翻译句子。
1.We can't wait to set out for the journey.我们迫不及待地想出发去旅行。
2.The children can't wait to open the present.孩子们迫不及待地打开礼物。-
3. His joke is too funny,We can't help laughing .他的笑话太有趣了，我们禁不住笑了起来
4. I couldn't help thinking about the past .我禁不住想起过去。
5. I couldn 't hel p smilin g whe n I hear d he r singing .当我听到她的歌声时，我忍不住笑了。
【考点3】Grandpa likes reading books in front of the window.爷爷喜欢在窗前读书。
【用法详解】in front of 和 in the front of 的区别
①in front of 表示“在……的前面”（外部的前面，即两者是分开 的）。
Eg;He is standing in front of the car.他站在车的前面。
②in the front of 表示“在……的前部”
（内部的前面，即属于同一空间的一部分） 。
Eg;He is sitting in the front of the car.他坐在车的前面（排）。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1. The teacher stood ______ the classroom and wrote on the blackboard.
A. in front of B. in the front of C. at front of D. on the front of
（ B ）2. There is a beautiful garden ______ our school.
A. in the front of B. in front of C. at the front of D. on front of
【考点4】add things to their room.在他们的房间里添加东西。
【用法详解】① add sth to sth:将某物添加到某处
Eg;She added sugar to her coffee.她往咖啡里加了糖。
②add that...: 补充说......
Eg;He added that the math problem was really difficult .他补充说那道数学题真的真的很难。
③add up to 总数是；结果是
Eg;As we all know these numbers add up to 1823. 众琑周知，这些数字的总和为1823。
35新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
1. Please ad d t o (添加) your name to the list.
( B ) 2.The bad weather added difficulty.
A.up B. to C. on D.in
【考点4】plan a treasure hunt.策划一次寻宝游戏。
【用法详解】plan作动词意为“策划；打算 ”，作名词意为“计划；方案”。
相关搭配：①plan to do sth:计划做某事
Eg;We plan to learn the new words this holiday . 我们计划这个假期学新单词。
②make a plan:制定计划
Eg;Let's make a plan for the trip.让我们为这次旅行制定一个计划。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.They plan _____a party for Saturday.
A. to have B. having C. has D.have
（ B ）2.I will make good plan improve my study.
A.the;to B. a;to C. an;in D./;to
【考点5】Dad,could you please give me a lift to the shop this afternoon? 爸爸，今天下午你能开车顺便送
我去商店吗?
【用法详解】lift作名词意为“搭便车;电梯” ，作动词意为“举起;抬起”。
相关搭配：① give sb a lif t 让某人搭便车。
Eg;Can you give me a lift to the station?你能载我去车站吗?
②take the lift 乘电梯 。
Eg;He took the lift to the 23rd floor.他乘电梯到了23楼。
③lift sth up 举起某物
Eg;He lifted the box up easily.他轻松地把箱子举了起来。
【考点6】Helen,can I borrow your chess set?海伦，我能借你的国际象棋吗?
【用法详解】 borrow 意为“借”,是非延续性动词，不能和表示一段时间的状语连用。强调从别人那里或某处把
东西借来。相关搭配及拓展：① borrow sth from sb/somewher e 从.....借........
Eg;Can I borrow a pen from you?我能向你借支笔吗?
36新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
②lend意为“借给；借出”,为非延续性动词，不能和表示一段时间的状语连用。强调把东西借给别人。
lend sb sth 或 lend sth to sb 借.....给.....
③keep意为“保存；保留”,为延续性动词，能和表示一段时间的状语及how long连用。通常表 keep
示持有某物多长时间。keep sth for+一段时间
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. — Can I ______ your pen for a moment? Mine is out of ink.
— Sure, but please return it soon.
A. borrow B. lend C. keep D. take
（ B ）2. — Could you ______ me your bike tomorrow? I need to go to the train station.
— Sorry, I’m using it myself.
A. borrow B. lend C. keep D. return
（ C ）3. — How long can I ______ this book from the library?
— For two weeks. After that, you must renew it.
A. borrow B. lend C. keep D. take
【考点7】Can I stay out until eleven?我能在外面待到11点吗?
【用法详解】until作介词，意为“到.....时;直到......为止”。
①介词:表示动作/状态持续到某一时间点。 not...unti l 直到....才....
Eg;He didn't leave until midnight.他直到午夜才离开。
②连词:后接从句，表示主句动作持续到从句动作发生。
Eg;Stay here until I come back.待在这里直到我回来。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.The baby didn't stop crying_______her mother came.
A.until B.by C.when
（ B ）1. — When did you finish your homework last night?
— I hardly ever finish it __ ____ 11 p.m. It was too difficult.
A. when B. until C. since D. while
（ A ）3.She never eats her mother comes back .
A.until B.when C.after
五．单元重点语法讲练
could和can都情态动词，表示说话人的主观看法或语气。它没有人称和数的变化，也不能单独在句子中做谓语，
37新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
但它可以与其后的不带to的动词不定式一起构成复合谓语。
1.can表示能力，常被译成“能，会”。过去式could，表示过去的能力。否定形式 couldn't。
Eg;I can sing English songs.我会唱英语歌曲。
Eg; I could look after myself when I was six.我六岁就能自己照顾自己了。
2.表示请求或许可，常被用来请求对方的许可，或表示说话人自己的许可。
Eg;Can I help you？我能帮你忙吗？
Eg;Can you go to the picnic with us tomorrow？明天你能和我们一起去野餐吗？
3.情态动词 could 构成的问句用于委婉地向对方提出请求或征求对方的许可，语气比 can 委婉，但不表示过去，
答语没有固定形式，符合语境即可。
①.委婉地请求他人可用“Could you do..?"“Could you please do.…?” 提问 ， 若 同 意 请 求 可 以 说
“Certainly./Of course./With pleasure./No problem./Yes./Sure.”;若不同意请求可以说 “ Sorry,I can 't.”。
②.委婉地请求别人允许自己做某事可用“Could I do…?”提问，被提问方若同意， 可以说“Yes,you
can./Certainly./Sure.”;若不同 意，可以说" No,you can't./Sorry,I'′m afraid you can't.” 。 注意回答中用can, 而不是
could。
Eg—Could I take a photo for you？我能给你拍张照吗？
—Of course,you can.当然了，你可以 。
Eg;could I take a photo with you ?我可以跟你一起合影吗？
---- No,you can’t.不，不可以。
3. 情态动词的基本句式：
陈述句 ： 主语 + 情态动词 + 动词原形 + 其他 。
Eg;He can ride a motorcycle.他会骑大摩托。
否定句： 主语 + 情态动词 +no t + 动词原形 + 其他 。
Eg;I can't ride a bike.我不会骑自行车。
一般疑问句： 情态动词 + 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他？
肯定回答： Yes , 主语 + 情态动词 . 否定回答： No , 主语 + 情态动词 +no t .
Eg;Can he dance?他会跳舞吗？
Yes, he can. /No, he can’t.
牛
刀小试
( A )1.- I borrow your dictionary, Jason? --Yes, of course. Here you are.
A.Can B.Must C.Need D. Should
( A )2. This old computer be Mr. Green's. His computer is new.
A. can't B. needn't C. mustn't D. won't
38新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( D )3.-Look at the sign. " swimming!"-So it be dangerous(危险的) to swim here.
A. Don't; must B. Not; may C. Not be; can D. No; must
( D )4. - Must we sing a song at the party? -No, you _ _ ,
A. mustn't B. haven't to C. not have to D. don't have to
( B )5.-Mom, can I go swimming?--No. You_ _do your homework.
A. has to B. have to C. can D. could
( B )6.The little boy swim. He wants someone to help him.
A. isn't B. can't C. don't D. needn't
( D )7.-When we are in the zoo, we _feed(喂)the animals.
A. needn't B. may not C. couldn't D. can't
( A )8.-Hi, Bill! What is an important rule in the library?-We be quiet.
A. have to B. can C. may D. mustn't
( C )9.-Do you _clean the classroom every day?-Yes. We usually clean it after class.
A. must B. has to C. have to D.can
( C )10Could you come with us this afternoon?--Sorry, I _,I go to the library.
A. can't; may B. couldn't; have to C.can't; have to D. couldn't; may
从方框中选择合适的单词填空
can, can't, mustn't, needn't, should
1. If we can find a better way, we' ll finish the job faster.
2. Earthquakes can be very dangerous. We shoul d learn to protect ourselves.
3.— Would you like to visit Tianjin University tomorrow?
— Sorry,I'm afraid I ca n ’ t . I' ll work as a volunteer in my community.
4. — You need n ’ t take the subway to the airport, for I can drive you there directly.
— That's very kind of you.
5. According to the traffic rules, people mustn ’ t ride e-bikes without wearing helmets.
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
（ A ）1. —Could you please ______ the floor? —Sure. I'll do it right away.
A. Sweep B. sweeping C. swept D. to sweep
（ B ）2. —Can I ______ your bike? Mine is broken. —Sure. Here you are.
39新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. lend B. borrow C. keep D. buy
（ A ）3. —What are you going to do this weekend? —I'm going to help my parents ______ the house.
A. clean up B. look up C. put up D. set up
（ B ）4. My mother asked me to ______ my clothes before going to bed.
A. hang out B. hang up C. take out D. take up
（ A ）5. —______ I stay out until eleven? —No, you can't. You have to get up early tomorrow.
A. Can B. Could C. Must D. Need
（ B ）6. —______ does your family usually go on a trip? —Once a year.
A. How long B. How often C. How far D. How much
（ A ）7. We should ______ our community clean and beautiful.
A. keep B. let C. make D. have
（ A ）8. My grandparents live in a small village. They always ______ us to visit them.
A. Invite B. ask C. tell D. want
（ A ）9. The old man nodded his head. Here "nodded" means ______.
A. moved his head up and down B. moved his head from side to side
C. shook his head D. touched his head
（ A ）10. My home is a place ______ love.
A. of B. with C. for D. in
（ A ）11. —______ you help me with my English? —Sure. I'd be glad to.
A. Can B. May C. Must D. Need
（ B ）12. When we got home, my mother was busy ______ dinner.
A. cook B. cooking C. to cook D. cooked
（ A ）13. My sister often helps me ______ my homework.
A. do B. doing C. does D. did
（ B ）14. —______ is your new house like? —It's very big and beautiful.
A. How B. What C. Which D. Where
（ B ）15. My father is going to ______ a long trip next month.
A. go B. take C. make D. have
二、完型填空
Maria is my friend.She had bad 1 two years ago.For example，she got up late and had 2 for
breakfast.She disliked 3 school activities.After 4 home from school，she usually played computer games and
40新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
5 she watched TV.She 6 drank milk，and she ate junk food three 7 five times a week.
Then one day，she got sick.She had to be in hospital 8 ．It made her 9 that she must look after herself well.
Now Maria has 10 habits.She gets up early and 11 every morning.She usually runs for about an hour.Then
she has a 12 breakfast.At school she plays all kinds of sports.She hardly ever plays computer games 13 watches
TV.She drinks a cup of milk 14 going to bed.These good habits 15 her keep healthy and study well.
（ D ）1．A．games B．friends C．programs D．habits
（ A ）2．A．nothing B．anything C．something D．everything
（ B ）3．A．to do B．doing C．do D．did
（ A ）4．A．getting B．to get C．got D．gets
（ B ）5．A．always B．sometimes C．never D．hardly
（ C ）6．A．always B．often C．hardly ever D．sometimes
（ D ）7．A．from B．on C．too D．to
（ C ）8．A．once a week B．two weeks ago C．for three weeks D．twice a week
（ B ）9．A．feeling B．feel C．felt D．feels
（ D ）10．A．bad B．well C．bored D．good
（ B ）11．A．sleeps B．exercises C．eats D．plays
（ C ）12．A．easy B．hungry C．healthy D．free
（ C ）13．A．and B．but C．or D．though
（ D ）14．A．after B．when C．during D．before
（ B ）15．A．tell B．help C．want D．Take
三、词汇运用
1. Could you please swee p (sweep) the floor? It's dirty.
2. My mother asked me to _ fold ___ (fold) the clothes.
3. We should keep _ cleaning ___ up our classroom everyday. (打扫).
4. My father often helps my mother do the dishe s (dish) after dinner.
5. I want to invite (invitation) my friends to my birthday party.
6. The old man is looking for his lost keys. (寻找)
7. We need to prepar e (准备) for the coming exam.
8. My sister is good at making paper cutting (剪纸).
9. Please han g u p the photos on the wall. They are very beautiful. （悬挂）
10. We should help our parents do some chore s (chore) at home.
41新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
四、阅读理解
A
Teenagers believe anything is possible if they study hard. But they often forget to think about healthy diets,
enough sleep time and exercise. In fact, these things are really important for them to keep fit.
It is important for teenagers to get enough energy. Teenage girls need about 2,200 calories a day while boys need
a bit more—doctors suggest 2,800 for teenage boys.50% of their calories should come from healthy food—rice,
vegetables and fruit. People often say an apple a day keeps the doctor away. Teenagers also need to drink a lot of
water,6 to 8 glasses a day. Drinking enough water will improve their skin.
Teenagers usually need eight to ten hours’ sleep at night, but many Chinese teenagers do not get enough sleep. A
report shows that without a good night’s sleep, teenagers seem to be weaker than they should be. Too much homework
is not the only reason why teenagers stay up late. Some watch TV or play computer games late into the night.
Teenagers should develop good study habits.So some clever students never study late, but they are able to work well in
class.
Exercise is something that can help them. Experts suggest that teenagers should spend at least 30 minutes
exercising a day, five times a week. They will feel relaxed when they exercise. It can even help them sleep better at
night.
（ B ）1 ．How many things are important for teenagers to keep fit?
A．2. B．3. C．4. D．5.
（ A ） 2．Half of their calories should come from.
A．rice,vegetables and fruit B．rice,vegetables and meat
C．rice,vegetables and water D．milk and meat
（ C ） 3．The last paragraph(段) mainly talks about.
A．sleeping better B．basic energy
C．necessary exercise D．more exercise
（ A ） 4．Which of the following is NOT true?
A．Boys need much more calories than girls.B．Teenagers need to drink 6 to 8 glasses of water a day.
C．Some clever students never study late. D．They will feel relaxed when they exercise.
（ C ） 5．The passage tells teenagers how to .
A．eat and drink well B．study hard C．keep fitD．drink well
B
It was a sunny day. Tom's family decided to clean up their house. Tom's mother asked him to sweep the floor.
42新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
His father asked him to take out the rubbish. Tom didn't want to do these chores. He thought they were boring. But
Tom's parents told him that doing chores was good for him. It could teach him responsibility (责任) and make him
more independent (独立的). Tom thought for a while and then he started to do the chores.
After finishing the chores, Tom felt very proud. He saw that the house was clean and tidy. He also knew that he
could help his parents. From then on, Tom often did chores at home.
（ C ）6. What did Tom's mother ask him to do?
A. Take out the rubbish. B. Clean the bathroom. C. Sweep the floor. D. Do the dishes.
（ B ）7. Why didn't Tom want to do the chores at first?
A. Because he was busy. B. Because he thought they were boring.
C. Because he didn't know how to do them. D. Because he didn't like his parents.
（ C ）8. What did Tom's parents tell him?
A.Doing chores was easy. B. Doing chores was boring.
C. Doing chores was good for him. D. Doing chores was a waste of time.
（ C ）9. How did Tom feel after finishing the chores?
A. Tired. B. Sad. C. Proud. D. Angry.
（C ）10. What can we learn from the passage?
A. Tom never did chores at home. B. Tom's parents didn't do chores.
C. Doing chores can make us more independent. D. We should do chores only on sunny days.
C
Not all the people like to work but everyone likes to play. People often call their friends together to play
games. All over the world, men and women, boys and girls enjoy sports.
Sports can help people to live happily. They can also help people to keep healthy. When people are playing
games, they always move a lot. It is good for their health. Having fun with their friends often makes them happy.
Many people enjoy sports by watching others playing. It can also make them happy and excited. Many people
buy tickets to watch all kinds of games, but more people like to watch sports games on TV.
What’s your favorite sport? When the weather is hot, do you like swimming? In China, there are beautiful
beaches, rivers and lakes across the country. The weather is always so good for swimming. Enjoy your sports to keep
healthy, my friends!
（ A ）11．Everyone likes to ______, but not all the people like to ______.
A．play; work B．work; play C．swim; work D．sleep; play
（ C ）12．Sports help people to live ______ and keep ______.
43新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．happy; health B．happily; health C．happily; healthy D．happily; healthily
（ C ）13．When people are playing games, they _______. It is good for their health.
A．are always tired B．are always excited
C．always move a lot D．always feel bored
（ B ）14．Why do many people enjoy sports by watching others playing?
A．Because it is tiring to play games.
B．Because it can also make them happy and excited.
C．Because they don’t like playing sports.
D．Because they don’t need to move.
（ A ）15．What’s the main idea of this passage (短文)?
A．Enjoying sports can keep people healthy.
B．The weather in China is good for swimming.
C．All the people like to play games.
D．Not all people like sports.
五、任务型阅读
When you eat well and get some exercise，you will be healthy. If you're healthy，you will work well，feel good
and can do many things. Well，do you know how to keep healthy？
Have different foods and right drinks
(A) Although you may have your favorite food ， you need to try some different foods . Some food，such as fruit
and vegetables，can make you have a good body and a smart mind. So，you need to eat some fruit and vegetables
every day. When you want something to drink，water is the best. And milk can help you build good bones. It is good
for children to drink two or three cups of milk a day.
Exercise more and have fun
(B)足够的锻炼对你的身体和头脑也有好处。Maybe you dislike playing basketball.(C)But you may be
interested in riding a bicycle. So try to find out your favorite sports and then exercise and have fun every day.
56．任务一 把(A)处画线句子翻译成中文。
尽管你可能有自己最喜欢的食物，但你需要去尝试一些不同种类的食物。
57．任务二 判断句子正(A)误(B)。When you want something to drink，juice is the best. B
58．任务三 把(B)处画线句子翻译成英文。
_Enough exercise is good for your body and mind ， too .
59．任务四 写出(C)处画线句子的同义句。
44新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
But __ maybe______ you __ are ______ interested in riding a bicycle.
60．任务五 回答问题。
How many cups of milk is it good for children to drink a day？
__Two or three cups of milk a day.
六、语法填空
阅读下面短文，按照句子结构的语法性和上下文连贯的要求，在空白处填入一个适当的词或使用括号中词语的
正确形式填空。
Joy loves instant noodles(方便面)．She eats them at least 1 . once (one)a week.She has a way to make them more
delicious.She 2 ． writes (write)，“Although I know it is not good 3 ． fo r me to eat a lot，I still love instant noodles—I
think they are cheap and delicious.When I cook 4 ． them (they)，I often add(加)something to make them more
delicious.”
“I discard(丢弃)their flavorings(调味品)．I make the ‘flavoring’ by 5 ． myself (my)．When I cook the noodles，I
always put 6 . a n egg in them.I love eggs.They are one of my 7 ． favorites (favorite)．Sometimes I put some
pieces of meat.I 8 ． also put some vegetables，sometimes cabbages and sometimes broccoli.Yesterday I tried
tomatoes.They 9 ． tasted (taste)great！Next time I'd like to try some beans. 10 ． After I enjoy instant noodles，I often go
for a walk in the park.I feel great.”
Unit 2 Home sweet home
Section B How do you feel at home?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. almos t /'ɔ:lməust/adv.差不多；几乎 2. journe y /'dʒ3:ni/n. 旅 行v. 旅行
3. p ul l /pul/v. 拉；拖；拔 4. l uggage /'lʌggɪdʒ/n. 行李
5. familia r /fə'mɪliə(r)/adj. 熟悉的 6. jok e /dʒəuk/n. 笑话v. 开玩笑
7. severa l /'sevrəl/pron. 几个； 一些adj. 各自的 8. no d /nod/v.&n 点 ( 头 )
9. writ e r /'raɪtə(r)/n.作者 10. tex t /tekst/n. 正文；文本v. (用手机给某人)发 短信
11. describ e /di'skraɪb/v .描述；形容 12. whereve r /'weərevə(r)/adv.&conj.无论去哪；
13 . perhaps /pə'haæps,praps/adv. 也许；可能 14. plat e /pleɪt/n. 盘子；碟子
15. freshly /'freʃli/adv.刚刚 16. smel l /smel/v. 发臭；闻到n. 气味；臭味
17. jo y /dʒɔɪ/n. 喜悦；乐趣 18. apartmen t /ə'pa:tmənt/n. 房间；公寓套房
45新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
19. bloc k /blok/n. 大楼；街区；大块 20. decorat e /'dekəreɪt/v.装饰；装潢
21. cove r /'kʌvə(r)/v. 遮盖；包括 n. 遮盖物；封皮22. p oste r /'pəustə(r)/n. 海报
23. scissors /'sizəz/n. 剪刀24. glu e /glu:/n.胶水 v. 粘贴
二．重点词汇变形
1.journey n.旅行；旅程/v.→ journeys (复数)
2. pull v.拉；拖；拔→ pulled (过去式)→ pulling (现在分词)
3.joke n./v.笑话；开玩笑→jokes (复数)→joked(过去式)→joking (现在分词)
4.nod v./n.点头→ nodde d (过去式)→ nodding (现在分词)→nods(复数)
5.writer n.作者→ writers (复数)→ write v.写→ written(过去分词)
6.text n./v.文本；发短信→texts(复数)→texted(过去式)→texting (现在分词)→textbook n.教科书
7. describe v.描述；形容 → describe d (过去式)→ describing (现在分词)→ description n.描述
8. matter v./n.要紧；问题→mattered (过去式)→mattering(现在分词)→ → material (adj./n.物质/材料)
9.freshly adv.新鲜地→fresh adj.新鲜的
10.smell v./n闻；气味.→ smelled/smelt (过去式)→ smelling (现在分词)→ smells 复数
11.joy n.喜悦；乐趣→joys(复数)→joyful adj.快乐的→joyfully adv.快乐地
12.decorate v.装饰→ decorated(过去式)→ decorating (现在分词)→ decoration n.装饰→ decorative adj.装饰好的
13. cover v./n.遮盖→ covere d (过去式)→covering (现在分词)→ covers(复数)
14. poster n.海报→ posters (复数)→ post v.张贴
15. glue n./v.胶水；粘贴→glues(复数)→glued(过去式)
16. paper cutting n.剪纸→ paper cuttings(复数)
二．重点短语通关
1. the Spring Festival 春节 2.get up 起 床 3 .catch the train 赶火车
4. more than 超过 5. at the end of 在…. 6. be busy doing sth . 忙于做某事
7. be happy to.do sth . 很高兴做某事 8. share...with sb . 和某人分享....
9. set the table 摆放餐具 10. the familiar taste of ... . 熟悉的.....味道
11. tell jokes 讲笑话 12. hold one ' s hands 握住某人的手 13. bring out 把…拿出来
46新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
14. a plate of freshly - made biscuits 一盘刚烤好的饼干
15. bring sth . to sb . 把某物带给某人 16. would like to do sth . 想要做某事
17. on the first floor of .... . 在.......1楼 18. give a hand 帮忙
19. right now 现在 20 . paint the walls light green 把墙漆成浅绿色
21. buy some flowers 买花 22. make a poster 制作海报
23. a pair of scissors 一把剪刀 24. make paper cuttings 制作剪纸
25. take out the rubbish 倒垃圾 26. do the laundry 洗衣服
27. do the dishes 洗碗 28.fold the clothes 叠衣服
29. walk the dog 遛狗 30. make the bed 整理床铺
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
Going Home for the Spring Festival
“ it's almost the Spring Festival. Can we go to Hainan for the holiday, Dad?”
“Not this time,” Dad answered with a smile, “We' re going to your
mum's hometown!”
Soon the day of our family trip came. We got up very early in the
morning to catch the train, The train journey took more than seven
hours. and then we changed to a bus to get to my grandparents' village
in the evening. At the end of the road,I saw Grandpa and my little
cousin standing in the cold wind waiting for us. We walked quickly to
greet them.Grandpa helped us pull the heavy luggage into the house.
" Ah, home again!" said Mum with a smile on her face. Grandma,my aunt, and my uncle were busy cooking
dinner in the kitchen.They were very happy to see us. After a little
while, my parents went to the kitchen to help.
“Could you bring Wen wen her favourite snacks?” Grandma
asked Grandpa.
I shared the snacks with my cousin and told Grandpa about
47新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
school. He was happy to hear I was doing well at school. When dinner was ready, I asked, " Can I help?"
" You can set the table, " Dad said.
We then enjoyed all the delicious food.
" Mm, the familiar taste of home!" said Mum.
During the dinner, my uncle told us some jokes and we had a good laugh.
Several days later when we were leaving, Grandma held my hands and asked us, " Will you come home more
often?"
Mum nodded, with tears in her eyes.
【考点1.】The train journey took more than five hours,and then we changed to a bus to get to my
grandparents' village in the afternoon.
火车旅程花了五个多小时，然后我们在下午换乘公共汽车到达我外祖父母所在的村庄。
【用法详解】journey 作名词，意为“旅行；旅程”多指较远的旅行。
相关搭配:①a long journey 长途旅行②make a journey to 到 … … 旅行
Eg:We are going to make a long journey to Xinjiang.我们打算长途旅行到新疆去。
③ on a / the journey 在旅途中
Eg:They met many interesting things on the journey. 他们在旅途中遇见了许多有意思的事情。
牛
刀小试
( C )1.They journeyed the mountains.
A. in B.with C.to D.on
2. It was a long journey,but we finally arrived .旅程很长，但我们最后还是到达了。(翻译)
【考点2】At the end of the road,I saw Grandpa and my little cousin standing in the cold wind waiting for us.在
路的尽头，我看见我的外公和我的表弟正站在冷风里等我们。
【用法详解】1.at the end of...在…末，在…尽头。可以表示时间也可以表示地点。
Eg:You can find the garden at the end of this road.你能在这条路尽头找到那座花园。
Eg:At the end of last year, his family moved to their new house.去年底，他们家搬到了新房。
相关拓展：①. by the end of...在……前;到….为止。只能表示时间。
Eg:By the end of next year, we'll have finished the building.到明年年底，我们将完成修建。
Eg ;We had learned 8 units of the book by the end of last year.到去年年底，我们已经学习
了这本书中的8个单元。
②. in the end 与 at last相同，意为“终于、最后”用于叙述过去发生的事情的结果。
48新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:In the end I could not bear it any more.=At last I could not bear it any more.到最后，我再也受不了了!
③.to the end 到……的终点为止.必须是一个延续性动作.
Eg:Go down the street to the end and you will see YiBo’s poster.沿着这条街走到头，你会看到一博的海报。
2.wait for sb/sth:等待.../wait for sb to do 等待某人做某事
Eg:She is waiting for him to finish his work.她在等他做完手里的工作。
相关拓展：can’t wait to do sth 迫不及待做某事。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1. We’ll find the school _the road.
A. in the end B. at the end ofC. by the end of D. at the end
（ C ）2. The boys went home by bus ___the end of the day.
A. on B. in C.at D. by
（ B ）3. ___ the party, we sang a song together.
A. In the end B. At the end of C. By the end of D. At the end
（ A ）4.___ _ Sean achieved his dream.
A. In the end B. At the end C.By the end D. In the end of
（ A ）5. _______ the end of the holiday I had spent all my money.
A. By B.On C. In D.At
【考点3】Grandma,my aunt,and my uncle were busy cooking dinner in the kitchen.我的外婆，姨妈和舅舅
正忙着在厨房里做饭。
【用法详解】busy作形容词，意为“忙碌的;无暇的”，在句中常置于系动词之后作表语或名词之前作定语。
Eg;Sorry, the subscriber you dialed is busy now. Please redial later!
对不起，您所拨打的电话正在通话中。请稍后再拨!
相关搭配;①be busy with sth.忙于某事
Eg;My uncle is busy with his work.我叔叔正忙于他的工作。
②be busy doing sth.忙于做某事
Eg;I am busy doing my homework.我正忙着做作业。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.-Why were you angry with your daughter?
-She was busy and taking selfies(自拍)when I was talking to her.
49新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. texting B. to text C. text D. texted
( B )2.She is busy for the exam
A. prepare B. preparing C.to prepare D.prepared
( C )3.He is busy his concert.
A. in B. to C. with D. for
【考点4】I shared the snacks with my cousin and told Grandpa about school。我跟我的表弟分享零食，跟
我的外公聊我的学校生活。
【用法详解】①share sth with sb把......与.....分享。
Eg:He shared his lunch with me.他把午餐分给我。
拓展：② bike - sharin g = shared bik e 共享单车
shared E-bike 共享电动车 sharing economy 共享经济
牛
刀小试
1. Would you shar e you r note s (分享你的笔记) with me?
( B )2. He refused to_______his secrets _________anyone.
A. share; to B.share;with C.share; for
【考点5】Mm,the familiar taste of home!” said Mum.“嗯，熟悉的家的味道!”妈妈说。
【用法详解】familiar作形容词，意为“熟悉的”,定语或表语。
相关搭配： b e familia r with sb/sth 意为“对某人/ 某物熟悉”。
Eg:He is familiar with the new teacher. 他对这位新老师很熟悉。
【考点6】During the dinner,my uncle told us some jokes and we had a good laugh.吃饭时，我舅舅给我们
讲了一 些笑话，我们笑得很开心。
【用法详解】1.joke 作不及物动词，意为“说笑话；开玩 笑”;joke 也可作名词，意为“笑话；玩 笑”。
Eg:He likes joking,but he doesn't do well in telling jokes.他喜欢开玩笑，但是他不擅长讲笑话。
相关搭配：①play a joke on sb 开某人的玩笑
Eg: Everyone may play a joke on others on April Fool's Day.在愚人节所有人都可能开别人的玩笑。
②make a joke(out)of sth 拿某事开玩笑
Eg:It's an important question.Don't make a joke of it.
这是一个重要的问题。不要拿它开玩笑。
③.tell a joke 讲笑话
Eg:He told a funny joke.他讲了个有趣的笑话。
50新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
2.laugh n嘲笑; v嘲笑
相关搭配：① laugh at sb 嘲笑某人 Eg:Don't laugh at others.不要嘲笑他人。
② have a good laugh 开怀大笑 Eg:We had a good laugh.我们笑得很开心。
牛
刀小试
1.Don't joke about his mistakes.别拿他的错误开玩笑。(翻译)
（ B ）2.She loves_______jokes to make people laugh.
A.saying B.telling C.speaking
（ A ）3.His joke made everyone_____.
A.laugh B.to laugh C.laughing
4.It's rude to laugh a t (嘲笑) people's mistakes.
【考点6】In the text,what words are used to describe people's feelings?在文章里面哪些词被用来描述人的
情感？
【用法详解】1. be used to do sth 被用来做某事。
Eg.This machine is used to cut paper.这台机器被用来剪纸。
相关拓展：① used to do sth 过去常常做某事
Eg.She used to play the piano every day.她过去每天都会弹钢琴。
② be/get used to doing 现在习惯于做某事
Eg. He is getting used to waking up early.他现在习惯早起。
2.describe 作动词，意为“描述:形容”其名词形式为description。
①d escribe sth/sb to sb 向某人描述某物/某人
Eg. Can you describe the OOTD of yourself today?你能描述一下你今天的
穿搭吗?
② describe sb/sth as:.. .将.....描述为.....
Eg.He described the boy as a cool guy.他将那个男孩描述为酷盖。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.There a lot of red-crowned cranes(丹顶鹤) in this area.
A.was used to B.was used to be C.used to D.used to be
（ A ）2. She used to with her parents, but now she is used to at school.
51新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. live; living B.live; live C.living; living D.living; live
（ A ）3. He used to in a small village, but now he has been used to in the big city.
A.live; living B.live; live C.living;living D.living;live
4. My cousin is used to studyin g (study) with his new friends in Australia.
5. My mother is used to gettin g (get) up early to cook breakfast for us.
6. These rules is used to protec t (protect) the students.
【考点7】1.No matter how long I'm away,home is always glad to see me again.无论我离开多久，再次见到我家人
还是一样会很开心。
2.wherever l go,Finally 1 go, To my home, sweet home.无论我去到哪里，最后都会回到我温暖的家。
【用法详解】no matter+疑问词和疑问词+ever都可以意为“无论...不管.....”引导让步状语从句时，二者可以互换，
其句意搭配如下：
①no matter what = whatever 无论什么
Eg.No matter what he wants, his parents will buy it for him .无论他想要什么，他的父母都会给他买。
②no matter who =whoever 无论谁
Eg.No matter who you are, you must obey the rules.无论你是谁，都应该遵守规则。
③no matter when = whenever 无论何时
Eg.No matter when you come you are welcomed.无论你们什么时候来，都受欢迎。
④no matter where = wherever 无论哪里
Eg.No matter where you go, I will go with you .无论你去哪里，我都会和你一起去。
⑤no matter how = however 无论怎样式
Eg. No matter how bad you feel, keep trying.不管你感觉多么糟糕，继续努力。
牛
刀小试
1.No matter how hard it is, I'll try.无论多么艰难，我都会尝试。（翻译）
2.No matter what happens, stay calm.无论发生什么，保持冷静。
3.No matter where you go, I'll find you.无论你走到哪里，我都会找到你。
（ A ）4..______difficult the task is, don't give up.
A.No matter how B.No matter what C.No matter where
【考点8】could you help choose some photos to hang on the walls?你可以帮忙选一些照片挂着在墙上吗？
【用法详解】choose作动词，意为“选择；抉择”。
相关搭配：①choose to do sth 选择做某事
52新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg.More and more people choose to go to work on foot. 越来越多的人选择步行去上班。②choose sth for sb 给某
人挑选某物
Eg.Let's choose a special present for him.咱们给他选一件特别的礼物吧。
相关拓展:
①choose的名词形式是choice 表示“选择;抉择”，过去式chose,过去分词chosen.
②make a choice 做选择;
③have no choice but to do 除了做.....别无选择。
（ C ）-I'm afraid we have no______but to take a taxi.
A.decision B.reason C.choice D.chance
（ B ）2.He chose a car his brother’s Birthday .
A.to B.for C.with D.into
( B )3.He chose basketball with his classmates instead of doing homework.
A.play B.to play C.playing D.plays
课
堂测试
一、单选题
( D )1．If you want to be in good ________, you should eat ________ food.
A．healthy; healthy B．health; health C．healthy; health D．health; healthy
( A )2．_______ of the children likes the movie because it’s too boring.
A．None B．Each C．All D．Some
( C )3．—What's your hobby, Diana?
—Well, I have many hobbies, ________ dancing, singing and playing water sports.
A．used to B．because of C．such as D．instead of
( A )4．My English teacher wants us __________ a diary in English every day.
A．to keep B．keeping C．kept D．keep
( A )5．It’s dangerous________ with the wild animal.
A．for us to play B．of us playing
C．for us playing D．of us to play
( B )6．They were all tired, but ______________ of them stopped working.
A．any B．none C．neither D．no
53新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )7．You can eat ________ you like. Help yourself.
A．whatever B．whenever C．however D．wherever
( C )8．I could ________ hear what you said just now. Could you please say that again?
A．sometimes B．always C．hardly D．clearly
( B )9．—How many hours do they relax every day?
—_____.
A．Twice a day B．Two C．Second D．Twice
( A )10．—_____ does your brother use the Internet?—Once a week.
A．How often B．Why C．Where D．How long
( B )11.Tony is a ___________boy, but he speaks in such a low voice in class that we can ___________hear him.
A．weak; almost B．strong; hardly C．weak; hardly D．strong; almost
( B )12．_____ riding shared bikes is an environmentally friendly ways to travel, many of the bikes are thrown
everywhere.
A．As B．Although C．Because
( A )13.Parents are always there for you ________ difficulties you meet.
A．whatever B．whenever C．however
( C )14.______ he is ill, ______ he still goes to school.
A．Although；but B．/；/ C．Although; / D．But；although
二、完型填空
David Smith，12，usually gets up at about 7：40 am. He goes to bed 11 and only gets about seven hours of
sleep each night. 12 waking up in the morning isn't easy for him.“I often feel 13 in class，” David says.
Children from 5 to 12 years old 14 at least ten hours of sleep each night.But scientists say that a lot of children
don't get 15 sleep.Even some of them sleep 16 than eight hours every day.
What is keeping children 17 at night？We made a survey in David's school.We collected the answers of all the
students 18 this question.The answers show that the big stealer(偷窃者)is the 19 .68% of the students in this
school said they went online before 20 ．Most boys and girls said they used the 21 to chat(交谈)with friends.
Scientists say if a person has a good sleep，he or she will 22 well next day.If students sleep well at night，
23 will do better in math and writing tests.
It's 24 too late to change your sleeping habits.Go to bed early and keep doing that for a week.Then see 25
you feel.You will find you become different.
54新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( D )11．A．early B．soon C．again D．late
( C )12．A．Because B．If C．So D．When
( D )13．A．excited B．happy C．lucky D．tired
( C )14．A．do B．decide C．need D．seem
( D )15．A．popular B．healthy C．wonderful D．enough
( B )16．A．more B．less C．best D．good
( D )17．A．getting up B．cutting up C．waking up D．staying up
( C )18．A．of B．with C．to D．by
( A )19．A．computer B．dictionary C．magazine D．television
( D )20．A．going home B．going to schoolC．going shopping D．going to bed
( D )21．A．email B．telephone C．bicycle D．Internet
( B )22．A．dance B．learn C．sing D．jump
( D )23．A．we B．he C．she D．they
( B )24．A．always B．never C．often D．ever
( C )25．A．what B．when C．how D．where
三、阅读单选
Overweight(超重) is one of the biggest health problems now. Being overweight affects more than how you
look. Too much fat can kill you. What’s worse, overweight children turn into overweight adults(成人). If you’re obese
now, you probably will grow into an obese adult. But here’s good news. You can fight overweight.
Change your eating habits
You are what you eat. Kids like snacks. Did you list any healthy snacks? One study of eating habits showed that
soft drinks are the first in the snack list. Next, kids choose salty snacks, like chips. What’s more, the list is full of junk
food from No. 3 to No. 11. Finally, No. 12, kids picked a healthy snack — fruit. So, think about your snack choice
again.
Get outside to exercise
Jim, a player on his school football team. had a weight problem not long time ago. He could never get anyone to
play with him. So his father and he started playing football for a few minutes every night. Ten minutes turned into an
hour or more. In just a few years, the heavy kid became athletic, fit and healthy.
More TV means more fat
Nearly every American kid watches TV for 2 hours and 56 minutes every day that adds up to 44 days a year of
sitting. More TV(or more Internet surfing, or more computer games) means more fat.
55新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eat an apple a day, walk around the house, play with your family … Do it today, and do it more tomorrow. It will
help you a lot.
( C )26．According to the passage, kids put ________ at the end of the snack list in one study of eating habits.
A．chips B．ice cream C．fruit D．soft drinks
( B )27．What does the underlined word “obese” mean in Chinese?
A．苗条的 B．虚胖的 C．健康的 D．聪明的
( A )28．What can we do to fight overweight according to the passage?
①Try to get up early.
②Try to take more exercise.
③Try not to sit in front of TV or computer for too long.
④Try to eat more healthy food.
A．②③④ B．①②③ C．①③④ D．①②④
四、阅读判断
Dick is seven years old and begins to go to school this autumn. He studies and listens to his teachers. He is polite （有
礼貌） and has a few friends. They all like him.
It’s Saturday today. Dick, his sister Kate and his mother stay at home. His mother is doing some housework and he’s
watching TV and the girl is doing her homework. At ten his father comes back with a bag of apples. The boy likes
them very much, and wants to eat some. His mother gives him four apples and says, “Go to wash them in the kitchen
（厨房）”
Dick washes the apples and gives them to his mother. The woman says, “Which apple do you want, Dick?”
“The biggest one, Mummy.”
“What?” says Dick’s mother, “You should be polite and pick the little one.”
“Should I tell a lie（撒谎）just to be polite, Mummy?”
根据短文内容判断判断下列句子的正(T)误(F).
（ F ）41. Dick is in Grade Two.
（ F ）42. His mother is not at home today.
（ T ）43. His father gets home with a bag of apples.
（ F ）44. Kate washes the apples.
（ T ）45. Dick wants the biggest apple.
五、情景交际
第一节：选项补全对话，从所给选择中选择恰当的一项完成对话
56新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A: Hello, Jim. 46 E .
B: Oh, yes, I like it very much.
A: Well. 47 B .
A. Yes, I would,
B: Twice a week.
B. How often do you play basketball?
A: Who do you play basketball with? C. Yes, I’d like to,
D. How long do you play basketball every time?
B: I play it with my friends.
E. Do you like playing basketball?
A: 48 D .
F. No, I wouldn’t,
B: For about an hour.
G. When do you usually play basketball?
A: 49 G .
B: On Tuesday and Friday afternoon.
A: Do you like watching basketball match?
B: Yes, very much.
A: Tomorrow is Sunday. Would you like to go and watch a basketball match with me?
B: 50 C , but I have to do my homework on Sunday.
六、用括号中所给词的适当形式填空
68. He brushes his teeth twice (two) a day.
69. My eating （eat）habits are pretty good.
70. There are many _____ differences _____ （different）between the two books.
71. My mom wants me ___ to drink ________ （drink）milk every day.
72. What about playing (play) football now?
73. This movie is very interesting （interest）
74. I hardly (hard) ever see him now.
75. _ Having ___ _ (Have) breakfast helps you keep fit.
七、句型转换
81. Can you take care of my little dog? (改为同义句)
Can you look after my little dog?
82. They often play basketball on Saturdays and Sundays. (改为同义句)
They often play basketball on weekends .
83. Mary often has a cup of tea after dinner.（否定句）
Mary never has a cup of tea after dinner.
84. I will have classes tomorrow morning. (否定句)
I won't have classes tomorrow morning.
57新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
85. Jenny is in Class 2. Brian is in Class 2, too. (改为同义句)
Jenny and Brian are in t he same class.
86. May I have another question? (改为同义句)
May I have one more question?
87. We should sleep for over nine hours every day. (对划线部分提问)
How long should you sleep?
88. My father often reads newspapers after supper. (对划线部分提问)
What does your father often do after supper?
89. He watches TV three times a week. (对划线部分提问)
How often does he watch TV?
90. Hu Wen usually eats fruit and vegetables for breakfast. (对划线部分提问)
Wha t does Hu Wen usually have for breakfast?
八、书面表达
寒假就要到了，你打算如何过一个有意义的长假呢？ 第一中学的学生李明打算参加英语冬令营，在开营
仪式上他要向大家介绍自己。假设你是李明，请根据表格内容，用英语写一篇发言稿介绍自己。
Family 一家三口。总是帮父母做家务，认为很有必要。
(1)喜欢交友。好朋友Robert比我外向，学习更加努力。我们
无话不谈并且互相分享。
Hobby
(2)喜欢旅行。每年都出去一次，去年秋天和家人一起去了
丽江。
Future plan ……
1. 发言稿必须包括表格所提供的全部信息，可适当增加细节；2. 文中不能出现真实姓名、校名等相关信息；
3. 词数：80－100；4. 首句仅供选择使用，不计入总词数。
Hello, I'm Li Ming from No.1 Middle School. There are three people in my family. I always sweep the floor
when I'm free. I think it's necessary to help parents with the housework. I love making friends. My best friend is
Robert. He is more outgoing and studies harder than me. We can talk about and share everything. Also, I really enjoy
traveling. I go out once a year. Last autumn, I went to Lijiang with my family. It was really wonderful. I'm going to
learn English well. I hope I can go and visit foreign countries in the future.
58新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 3 Same or Different
Section A How are we different from each other ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. compare /kəm'peə(r)/v. 比较；对比 2. shy /ʃaɪ/adj. 害羞的
3. lazy /'leɪzi/adj. 懒惰的；懒洋洋的 4. loud /laud/adv. 响亮地 adj. 大声的
5.outgoing/"aotgəuɪŋ/adj. 外向的 6. Hard -working /ha:d'w3:kiŋ/adj. 勤奋的
7. perform /pə'fɔ:m/v.表演；执行 8 . solve /sɒlv/v. 解决；解答
59新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
9. flute /flu:t/n. 长笛 10 . congratulation /kən,grætʃu'leʃn/n. 祝贺；恭喜
11.Congratulations(on..! (对 … … )表示祝贺! 12. prize /praɪz/n.奖；奖励
13.attend /a'tend/v.参加；出席 14.as..as...像……一样……
15.besides /bi'saidz/prep.除 … … 之外(还)adv.而且
16 . spare /speə(r)/adj. 空闲的；备用的 v. 抽出；拨 出
18.pleasure /'pleʒə(r)/n. 乐事；愉快；荣幸 19.appearance /a'pɪərəns/n. 外表；露面
20.personality/,p3:sə'næləti/n.性格；个性 21.serious /'siəriəs/adj. 严肃的；严重的
22.strength /streŋθ/n.优势；力量 23.fact/fækt/n. 事实；现实
24 . slim / slɪm/adj. 苗条的；薄的 25.population/pɒpju'leɪʃn/n.人口
26.km (= kilometre /'kiləmi:tə(r); ki'lomrta(r))kilometer 千米；公里
27.average/'ævərɪdʒ/adj. 平均的；平常的 28.rainfall/'reɪnfɔ:1/n.降雨量
29. per /pə(r)/prep.每 30.mm(=millimetre /'mɪlimi:tə(r))millimeter毫 米
31.pleasant/'pleznt/adj. 宜人的；友好的
二．重点词汇变形
1. compare v.比较→→comparative adj.比较的→ comparison n.比较compared(过去式)→comparing (现在分词)
2. lazy adj.懒惰的→lazily adv.懒惰地→lazier (比较级)→laziest(最高级)
3. loud adj./adv.大声的；大声地→loudly adv.大声地→louder (比较级)→loudest(最高级)
4. outgoing adj.外向的→more outgoing (比较级)→most outgoing(最高级)
5. hard-working adj.勤奋的→more hard-working (比较级)→ most hard-working(最高级)
6. perform v.表演→ performance(n.表演)→ performer (n.表演者)→performed (过去式)→ performing (现在分词)
7. solve v.解决→ solution n.解决办法→solved (过去式)→solving (现在分词)
8. congratulation n.祝贺；恭喜→ congratulate v.祝贺→congratulations (复数)
9. attend v.参加→attendance(n.出席)→attended (过去式)→attending (现在分词)
10. pleasure n.高兴；愉快→pleasures 复数→ please v.使愉快→ pleasant adj.令人愉快的
11. appearance n.外表；露面→appear v.出现→disappear(反义词，消失)→appearances(复数)
12.personality n.性格；品质→personal adj.个人的→personalities (复数)
13. serious adj.严肃的→ seriously adv.严重地→more serious(比较级)→;most serious(最高级)
60新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
14. strength n.优势；力量→strengthen v.加强→ strong adj.强壮的→strengths(复数)
15. fact n.事实→factual adj.事实的→facts(复数)
16. slim adj.苗条的；薄的→slimmer (比较级)→slimmest(最高级)
17. pleasant adj.宜人的；友好的→pleasanter(比较级)→pleasantest(最高级)→unpleasant(反义词，不高兴的)
三．重点短语通关
1.be different from the past 和过去不同 2. encourage sb to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事
3.perform at the music festival 在音乐节表演 4.be afraid of 害怕
5.play the Chinese flute better 更好地吹中国长笛 6.win the first prize 赢得一等奖
7.take part in the school music festival 参加学校音 8.congratulations on 祝贺
9.as..as.. 和.….一样 10.spare time 业余时间
11.thanks for doing sth.感谢做某事 12.have...in common 有...共同之处
13.get up early 早起 14.work hard 学习努力
15.learn from each other 互相学习 16.have a pleasant temperature 有宜人的温度
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Han Lin:Congratulations on winning the prize at the school music festival!
The twins: Thank you!
Han Lin:You attended the festival last year and this year. How is this year
different?
Ella:There are more students and more activities this year. I think it is more
colourful than last year.
Han Lin: As twins, you look very similar. How are you different?
Emma:I'm a little quieter than Ella. And she is funnier than me.
Ella:Emma always gets up earlier than me. Many people say I'm lazier than Emma, but that's not true! I work as hard
as her!
Han Lin: That's really interesting. Besides singing, how do you both spend your spare time?
Ella:I love playing sports more than anything.
Emma:I like reading. You see, we're different in many ways, but together, we make agreat team!
Han Lin: Thanks for talking with me.
The twins: Our pleasure!
【考点1.】How do we compare with each other? 我们如何互相比较?
【用法详解】compare作动词，意为“比较;对比”。
61新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
相关搭配：① compare with.. .与……相比较。常用作状语。
Eg: Compared with his car,mine is much cheaper.与他的车相比，我的便宜很多。
② compare .. . with.. .将……和……相比。常表示同类之间 进行比较。
Eg:My mother never compares me with other children.我妈妈从不将我和别的孩子相比。
②compare...to...把....比作.....to后用名词或代词作为比作的对象，常含有比喻之意。
Eg:A teacher is often compared to a candle.教师常被比作蜡烛。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.She____her new phone____her old one.
A. compares; to B.compares; with C.compared; to
（ A ）2. ____ other students, Tom is more hard-working.
A. Compare with B.Comparing to C.Compared to
（ B ）3.The poet____life____a journey in his poem.
A. compared; with B.compared; to C.comparing; to
【考点2】Congratulations on winning the prize at the school music festival! 恭喜你们在学校音乐节获奖！
【用法详解】1.congratulation作名词，常用复数形式congratulations表示“祝贺；恭喜”，可单独使用或后接介
词on sth./doing sth..
相关搭配：congratulations on (doing) sth.为某事祝贺
Eg:Congratulations on getting the chance to enter QingHua university.恭喜你考上清华大学！
2.prize n.奖;奖励作名词，指竞赛、比赛或抽奖中的“奖品、奖金”，也可指“珍视的事物”。
Eg:He won the first prize in the dancing competition.他赢得了舞蹈比赛第一名。
相关搭配 ： win/get a priz e 获奖 first/second priz e 一/二等奖 prize mone y 奖金
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.We sent her a card to express our___
A. Congratulations B. thanks C. sorry
（ B ）2.--I passed the driving test!-____! That's great news!
A. Goodbye B.Congratulations C.Sorry
（ B ）3.She won the first_____in the singing competition.
A.game B.prize C.class
（ C ）2.The______for the best student is a new laptop.
A.problem B.price C.prize
62新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【考点3】You attended the festival last year and this year.你们去年和今年都参加了音乐节。
【用法详解】①attend 作动词，意为“参加；出席”,是正式用语，常表示参加会议、婚礼、典礼或听报告、讲座
等”，后直接接宾语。名词形式为attendance意为“出席(率)”。
相关搭配：attend a meeting/class 参加会议/课程 attend a party/weddin g 参加聚会/婚礼
attend to sth.处理某事;照料某人
Eg:He attended to patients last week.上周他在照料病人。
②辨析:join、join in 、take part in
join指加入某个党派、团体、组织等，并成为其中的一员，如"参军、入团、入党"等
Eg:She joined the Young Pioneers.她加入了少先队。
join in意为“参加；加入(活动)”,多指参加 竞赛、活动、游戏等。
Eg;Let’s join in the basketball game with them.让我们加入他们的篮球比赛吧。
take part in指参加群众性活动等，并在其中发挥积极作用。
Eg:We'll take part in social practice during the summer vacation.暑假期间我们将参加社会实践。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.I can't______the meeting tomorrow. Can you go instead?
A.join B.attend C.take part in
（ A ）3.She stayed at home to_______to her sick mother.
A. Attend B.look C.care
3. One of my students took part i n this project .我的一个学生参加了这个项目。（翻译）
4.This is an important meeting. You should attend on time.这是一次重要的会议，你应该按时参加。
【考点4】There are more students and more activities this year. I think it is more colourful than last year.今年
有更多的学生更多的活动。我认为比去年更精彩。
【用法详解】①more表示数量，意为“更多”是many和much的比较级形式，后加可数名词或不可数名词。
Eg;I have more water.我有更多的水。Eg;I have more books.我有更多的书。
②more表示程度，帮助多音节形容词或副词构成“比较级”，其含义随形容词或副词。
Eg;beautiful美丽 mor e beautifu l 更美丽
Eg;I think WangYiBo is more excellent than last year.我认为王一博比去年更优秀了。
③比较级的具体知识点在语法部分细讲。
【考点5】As twins,you look very similar.作为双胞胎，你们看上去非常相似。
I work as hard as her!我和她一样努力！
【用法详解】1.as的用法
63新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
①作介词表示“作为，当作”。Eg;I work as a teacher.我担任教师工作。
②表示“像，如同”。Eg;He dressed as a clown.他打扮得像个小丑。
③作连词引导时间状语从句:意为“当……时候，随着”。
Eg;As I walked down the street, I saw a beautiful flower.当我沿着街道走的时候，
我看到了一朵美丽的花。
④引导原因状语从句:意为“因为，由于”。
Eg;As it was raining, we stayed at home.因为下雨，我们待在家里。
⑤引导方式状语从句:意为“像……一样，按照”。
Eg;She is making a cake as her mother does.她正学着妈妈的样子做蛋糕。
2.as...as...意为 “和 . .. 一样 ”。用于比较两者的程度，中间用形容词或副词原级。
相关搭配：
①肯定句: A+be/ 动词 +as+ 形容词 / 副词原级 +as+B A和B一样.....
Eg;He is as tall as his father.他和父亲一样高。
②否定句: A+be not/ 助动词 not+as+ 形容词 / 副词原级 +as+B
= A+be not/ 助动词 not+ so + 形容词 / 副词原级 +as+B A和不如B那样.....
Eg;This book is not as interesting as that one.这本书不如那本有趣。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.This bag is____heavy _____that one.
A.as;as B.so;as C.too; to
( B )2.She doesn't run as as her brother.
A.faster B.fast C.more fast D.fastest
( B )3.Please come back_____soon_______possible.
A. so;so B.as;as C.very; very
【考点6】.Besides __ singing _____ ，how do you both spend your spare time?除了唱歌以外，你们都如何度过空闲
时间呢？
【用法详解】besides作介词，表示“ 除了 ... .. 之外，还有 ”(包含在内)。相当于“in addition to"。
Eg;Besides English, she also learns French.除了英语，她还学法语。
Eg;Besides Tom, we all went.除了汤姆，我们也去了。
相关拓展except作介词，表示“ 除了 ... .. 之外，还有 ”（排除在外）。
Eg;Except Tom, we all went.除了汤姆，我们都去了。
64新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg;I don’t want to talk with anybody,except you .我不想跟任何人说话，除了你。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.______math, I like history and physics.
A.Except B.Without C.Besides
（ B ）2.He is clever.______， he works very hard.
A.But B.Besides C.However
（ B ）3.the dress doesn't suit me_______it’s color.
A.Besides B.Except C.Because
【考点7】Our pleasure!我们的荣幸！
【用法详解】pleasure 作名词，意为“乐事;愉快;荣幸”。其形容词是pleasant意为“令人愉快的”。
相关搭配：①It's a pleasure to do sth.做某事是荣幸
Eg;It's a pleasure to help you with your project.很高兴能帮助你完成你的项目。
②take pleasure in...以...为乐
Eg;He takes pleasure in reading books in his free time.他喜欢在业余时间读书。
③ With pleasure.乐意效劳
Eg;Thank you for giving me a hand! 谢谢你帮助我!
---With pleasure ！乐意为你效劳！
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.-Thank you for helping me! -______!
A.With pleasure B.My pleasure C.A pleasure
（ C ）2. She takes great_______in painting.
A. pleasant B.pleased C.pleasure
【考点8】The population of Chicago was __ larger ___ that of Guangzhou in2022.在2022年芝加哥的人口比广州
的更多。
【用法详解】population作名词,指某一地区的人口总数，强调整体时用单数。
指“人口数量”时可用“ the population of + 地点 ”结构。
Eg;The population of china is more than 1.4 billion .中国的人口超过14亿。
注意:①提问人口数量用What is the population of...?，不能用how many/much。
Eg;What is the population of LuoYang? 洛阳有多少人口？
②形容人口多少用lager.
65新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg;How large the population of ChongQing is !重庆的人口好多啊！
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.______the population of your country?
A. How many is B. How much is C.What is
（A ）2.China____a large population.
A.has B. have C.is
（ A ）3.The city's_____ is becoming younger due to more young people moving in.
A. population B.people C.person
四．单元重点语法讲练
形容词和副词的比较级
一、语法概述
大多数形容词和副词有三个等级： 原级 、 比较级 和 最高级 .比
较级表示“更……”，用于两者之间的比较，后面用连词 than 连接另一个所比较的人或事物，说明“前
者比后者更……”。
二、比较级的构成
1.规则变化
单音节和部分双音 一般在词尾加-er smart→smarter high→higher
节词
以字母e结尾的词加-r fine→finer wide→wider
重读闭音节词词尾只有一个辅音字母 口诀：“大 红 胖 瘦 适合 湿 热”
时（辅元辅），先双写该辅音字母，再加-
er （bigger,redder,fatter,thinner,fitter,wetter,hotter）
以“辅音字母+y”结尾的双音节词，变 early→earlier happy→happier
y为i再加-er
多音节和部分双音节词在其前面加more
beautiful→more beautiful
【注意】dry（干燥的）→ drier（比较级） shy（害羞的）→ shyer（比较级）
2.不规则变化
good/well（好的）→__ _ better ___（更好的） bad/badly/ill（糟糕的）→ ___ worse ___ （更糟糕的）
many/much（多的）→ mor e （更多的） little（少的）→ les s （更少的）
old（老的）→ olde r / elde r （更老的） far（远的）→ farthe r / furthe r （更远的）
牛
刀小试
66新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
写出下列单词的比较级形式
1. tall → talle r 2. smart → smarte r 3. hard → harde r
4.lazy → __ lazier ___ 5. funny → __ funnier ___ 6. early → __ earlier ___
7. nice → ___ nicer __ 8. large → __ larger ____ 9. fine → ___ finer ____
1. serious → more serious 11. clearly → mor e clearl y 12. outgoing → mor e outgoin g
13. good/well → bette r 14. many/much → mor e 15. bad/badly → wors e
三、比较级的相关考点
1. A+be+ 形容词比较级 +than+B / A + 实义动词 + 副词比较级 +than+B A比B更……
Eg. Tom runs faster than I. 汤姆跑得比我快。 Tom is taller than I. 汤姆比我高。
2.“ 比较级 +and+ 比较级 ”或“ more and more + 形容词 / 副词原级 ”，表示“越来
越……”
Eg.After the New Year, the day is becoming warmer and warmer.
新年过后，天气变得越来越暖和。
Eg. Chinese is becoming more and more popular. 汉语变得越来越受欢迎了。
3.“ The + 比较级， the + 比较级 ”，表示“越……，就越……”
Eg.The more you read, the faster you will be.你读得越多，你的速度就会越快。
4.“ A.. . + 倍数 + 比较级 + than + B ” ，表示“A是B的多少倍”
Eg.Our school is twice bigger than yours. 我们学校比你们学校大两倍。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.Which do you think tastes ___ ____, the chicken or fish?
A.well B.better C.good D.best
( C )2.My room is ___ ____ than ________.
A.bigger, her B.bigger, her C.bigger, hers D.biger, hers
( B )3.Farmers are becoming in our hometown.
A.more and more rich B.richer and richer C.more rich and more rich D.rich and
rich
( B )4.This picture is ____ ______ than that one.
A. beautiful B. more beautiful C. most beautiful D. the most beautiful
( B )5.Don’t worry. Your mother will get .
A. well and well B. better and better C. well and better D. good and well
67新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )6.─Who is ____ ____, Tom or Mike?
─Tom is.
A.thin B.thinner C.very thin D.more thin
四、可修饰比较级的词
当表示一方超过另一方的“程度”时，可以用 much , a lot , a little , a bit , even , far 等来修饰形容词比较
级。注意：比较级不能用very, so, too等修饰。
Eg.He is much more serious than his brother. 他比他弟弟稳重多了。
This book is even more useful than that one. 这本书甚至比那本更有用。
Can you come to school a little earlier tomorrow morning? 明天早上你能早点来学校吗？
【记忆口诀】两多（much, a lot）两少（a little, a bit）一甚至（even），还有一个远（far）去了。
【即学即用】
( B )1.In the talent show, I performed well and Ann did even___ ____.
A.well B.better C.more D.worse
( D )2.Li Wei is a ____ _____ student, but his brother is even __________ than him.
A.best；better B.better；better C.good；best D.good；better
( C )3. I think it is ___ _______ older than yesterday.
A. very B. much too C. much D. quite
( B )4.These flowers are _____ _____ than those ones.
A. much beautiful B. much more beautiful C. very beautiful D. as beautiful
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( D )1.—Dad, how can I get on well with my classmates?
—Try to be friendly to them.That will make it much____ __ .
A.easily B.more easily C.easy D.easier
( B )2.I didn’t do very well in this exam. Unluckily, he did it____ ___.
A.badly B.worse C.better D.worst
( D )3. Alice is___ ____ than her brother and sister. She never stops talking.
A.quiet B.quieter C.outgoing D.more outgoing
( A )4.Shenzhen is a modern city and it’s as __ ____ as Hong Kong.
68新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. busy B. busier C. the busiest D. the busier
( C )5.Though Betty and Lily are twins, Betty isn’t so ___ ___ as Lily.
A.more outgoing B.most outgoing C.outgoing D.less outgoing
( A )6.This film is ___ ____interesting than that one.
A. more B. much C. very D. the most
( D )7.—If there are___ ____ people driving, there will be _________air pollution.（空气污染）
—Yes, and the air will be fresher.
A.less; less B.less; fewer C.fewer; fewer D.fewer; less
( D )8.To make rivers___ __ than before, everybody is supposed to protect them.
A.dirty B.dirtier C.clean D.cleaner
( B )9.WeChat Wallet is making our life __ ____ more convenient than before.
A.many B.much C.very D.so
( A )10. ____ ____our country gets, _________the people will be, which is well known.
A.The stronger; the happier B.The more strong; the more happy
C.The stronger; the happy D.The strong; the happier
( B )11.A mobile phone with 5G can send videos much____ ____ than the one with 4G.
A.fast B.faster C.fastest D.the fastest
( C )12.—Which coat do you like___ ___, the red one or the blue one?
—The red one.
A.good B.well C.better D.the better
( D )13.E-mail is much____ ____ than long-distance calling.
A.cheap B.the cheaper C.more cheap D.cheaper
( A )14.Your bag is smaller than___ ___.
A.his B.him C.her D.she
( A )15.The earlier we take action to protect our environment, the__ __ ____ it will be for our future.
A.better B.best C.worse D.worst
二、用所给词的适当形式填空
1. The weather is hotte r (hot) in summer in Beijing than that in Dalian.
2. Which country is large r (large), China or Japan?
3. My son is heavie r (heavy) than your son, because he eats too much.
4. Cindy is growing fast. She is even talle r (tall) than her mother.
5. I have mor e (many) storybooks than my sister.
69新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6. Do you think you are mor e outgoin g (outgoing) than your father?
7. It was cold yesterday, but it is much colde r (cold) today.
8. The little girl becomes much ___ healthier ___ （healthy）than before.
9. The more you try to improve yourself, the happie r you will feel. (happy)
10. They should have a farthe r (far) discussion if they want to solve the problem completely.
三、完形填空
Friends are very important in people’s lives. Some friends have _ 1 _ views and interests, and 2 like the
same things. Should friends be different 3 same? In my opinion, I don’t care. I have two best friends, Wang Lei
and Lin Ying. Wang Lei 4 like me. I am 5 than most of the students in my class, and Wang Lei is also quiet.
And we both enjoy 6 . On weekends, we often go to the library to do some reading. But the other friend of mine,
Lin Ying, is 7 different from me. She is much more outgoing, and she likes _ _ 8 _ _ and often makes me laugh.
She also likes 9 , so she is more athletic（健壮的）. I don’t think differences are important in a 10 . What’s your
opinion?
（ B ）1. A.same B.different C.active D.free
（ A ）2. A.others B.another C.other D.the other
（ C ）3. A.and B.but C.or D.then
（ D ）4. A.isn’t B.doesn’t C.does D.is
（ B ）5. A.quiet B.quieter C.outgoing D.more outgoing
（ A ）6. A.reading books B.playing games C.watching TV D.going to the movies
（ C ）7. A.not B.more C.quite D.lots of
（ B ）8. A.doing sports B.telling joke C.going to parties D.going shopping
（ A ）9. A.sports B.books C.movies D.subjects
（ D ）10. A.match B.concert C.family D.friendship
四、阅读单选
A
There are four people in my family. They’re my grandfather, my parents and me. My grandfather exercises every day.
He never uses the Internet. He eats vegetables three times a day, but he hardly ever drinks milk. And he watches TV
every night. My father is a taxi driver. He’s very busy. He never exercises, but he sometimes surf the Internet. He
watches TV on Saturday and Sunday evening. He often eats vegetables and drinks milk. My mother is a housewife(家
庭主妇). She watches TV twice a day. She never surf the Internet. She sometimes eats vegetables, but she drinks milk
three times a week. Exercise? Of course she does. She exercises every day by doing housework. I’m a middle school
70新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
student. I go to school from Monday to Friday. I often exercise. But on Saturday and Sunday, I don’t exercise because
I have too much homework to do. I watch TV only on Sunday evening. But I surf the Internet twice a week. I drink
milk every day, but I don’t like vegetables. My mother often says to me, “Why do you eat so much meat, Mike? It’s
not good for your health.” But I like it very much.
（ A ）26．_____ sometimes surf the Internet in his family.
A．Mike and his father B．Mike and his mother C．Mike’s parents D．Mike’s father and grandfather
（ B ）27．_____ watch TV every day in his family.
A．Mike and his grandfather B．Mike’s mother and grandfather
C．Mike’s parents D．Mike’s father and grandfather
（ D ）28．What does Mike’s father do?
A．He often eats vegetable. B．He sometimes surf the Internet.
C．He is very busy. D．He is a taxi driver.
（ C ）29．Why don’t Mike exercise on Saturday and Sunday?
A．Because he wants to surf the Internet. B．Because he wants to watch TV.
C．Because he has too much homework to do. D．Because he has to go to school.
（ A ）30．Mike likes eating _____ very much.
A．meat B．vegetables C．fruit D．milk
B
Lily Chan, Taiwan
Kay is the most confident girl that I have ever met. Although she looks tough, she is really kind. It may surprise some
people to find out Kay and I are best friends, because we have different personalities. I'm not confident and I am very
shy, which is the opposite to Kay, but I think this is why we are such good friends.
Alan Cordoba, Mexico
My best friend is Lucy. I can always depend on her. We always take care of each other. The first week we met, I got
sick with flu and she came to my house to take care of me every day. She is also very intelligent (有智慧的) and
interesting, although sometimes she gets angry. She shouts at me for always being late.
Isabel Famosa, Cuba
My best friend is Anna Hernandez. She is honest, kind and sensitive(敏感的)．We were born in the same city in Cuba.
We spent a lot of time together until we were 12. Then, I moved to America with my family and thought that I would
never see Anna again. When I went to college in New York, Anna had a room in the same building. She now lives near
me in New Jersey and we see each other all the time.
71新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Ken Ichigawa, Japan
I love to spend time with Daisuke because he makes me laugh so much. He's very funny. We share the same sense of
humor(幽默感), and know how to make each other cry with laughter. We enjoy talking the funny things we did when
we were children, and tell the stupid jokes over and over again.
（ C ）31．Kay is________ than Lily.
A．tougher B．shyer C．more confident D．kinder
（ D ）32．In Paragraph 3, which of the following is NOT true?
A．The two girls were born in the same city. B．The two girls departed(分开)when they were 12.
C．The two girls met and lived away from Cuba. D．The two girls met because they kept looking for each other.
（ B ）33．In Paragraph 4, they become good friends________．
A．because of the funny things they did together B．because of the same interest and sense of humor
C．because they love stupid jokes D．because they grew up together
（ B ）34．What is mentioned in Ken's description?
A．Moving to the USA with parents. B．Enjoying talking about funny things.
C．Studying in the same school. D．Getting sick with flu.
（ D ）35．What's the best title of this passage?
A．Friends Are Always Different B．Opinions about a Good Friend
C．Everyone Should Have Friends D．What I Like Most about My Best Friend
五、阅读还原
根据短文内容,从方框中选出五个句子填入文中空缺处, 使短文内容完整正确。
Find and keep your friendship
Every one of us, rich or poor, should at least have one or two good friends. Your friends will listen to you when you
speak, will take care of you when you are sick, and will be together with you in your journey through life. Everyone
needs friends. Friendship can make us happier.
41． D Here is some advice.
★Make friends with a person who is easy to get along with.
★4 2 ． A If you have something in common with your friend, you will be interested in talking with him or her.
★Give your friend a hand when he or she is in trouble. 43 ． E
★Believe in each other. This is the most important thing in a friendship.
★Even the best friends may have quarrel (争吵) sometimes. If this happens, don’t let your quarrel last too long. 44 ． B
Friendship is a kind of treasure in our life. 45 ． C , the longer it is kept, the better it will be.
72新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．You should make friends with a person who has something in common with you.
B．Try to make up with (和好) your friends soon..
C．It is like a bottle of wine(酒).
D．How can we find a good friend and get on well with each other?
E.Friends should always be ready to help each other
F.It is like a bottle of water.
六、短文选词填空
real learn make why think help easy try much problem
Being at the middle school is a great time in your life. You are learning many interesting things and 51 ． thinking
in new ways. Teachers can help you solve your 52 ． p roblems at school. You know that they are always ready 53 ． to
help
you. That's 54 ． w hy they wanted to be teachers!
It's good to get on well with your teachers, because it 55 ． m akes the school time more pleasant. Kids who get on
better with their teachers can 56 ． l earn more. They also feel 57 ． m ore comfortable to ask or answer questions, This
makes it much 58 ． e asier for them to do their best on tests.
Some kids are always good students, but most kids are sensitive(敏感的) to the way they get on with the teachers.
However, even if you don't 59 ． r eally like your teachers, you should 60 ． t ry to know them better.
七、语法填空。
Do you know the sleepover? At a sleepover, a group of children (child) stay at a friend’s home for a night. Last
Saturday, Kate and I spent an interesting but scary night at Sarah’s home.
That night we brought our tent and camped (camp) in Sarah’s yard(院子) for the sleepover. When it was time to
sleep, we turned off all the lights(灯). We imagined(想象) we were (be) in a forest by the lake. It was so dark.
We couldn’t see the moon or the stars because of the tall trees. We told stories to each other. Suddenly(突然), Kate
jumped up and shouted out, “There is a snake outside my (I) tent!” Sarah and I were too scared (scare) to speak.
But some minutes later. we heard a “Miaow.” “Oh, don’t worry (worry),” Sarah said. “It’s not a snake. It is my
lovely (love) cat.
八、任务型阅读
A lot of teens(青少年)think that the most important people in their life are their friends. When they are in
trouble, they always ask their friends(A)advice, but not their parents.(B)They find that their parents don’t know them
as well as their friends do. Some teens don’t tell their problems to their parents,(C)they don’t want their parents to be
too worried about them.(D)Children usually spend most of their free time with friends. They like to do things together
73新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
with their friends. They like to talk with them. When they feel sad, their friends will comfort(安慰)them. When they
laugh, their friends will laugh together with them.(E)Friends make their life colorfuler.
Having one or more friends is very important. However, choosing(选择)friends is more important. If your friends
have bad habits, you may get into bad habits easily. So be careful when you make friends.
根据短文内容完成下列各题。
56．在文中的(A)处和(C)处分别填写一个适当的单词。
(A) fo r (C) becaus e
57．写出文中(B)处画线部分的同义句。
They find that their friends know them _________better than____________ their parents do.
58．将(D)处画线句子翻译成汉语。
孩子们通常和朋友们一起度过他们大部分的空闲时间 。
59．文中(E)处画线句子有一处错误，请找出来并改正。
colorfuler 改为 more colorfu l
60．Why should you be careful when you choose friends?
_ Because I may get into bad habits easily if my friends have bad habits.
Unit 3 Same or Different
Section B How do we understand differences ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. alike /ə'laɪk/adj.相像的adv.相似地 2. mirror /'mirə(r)/n. 镜子
3.interest/'intrest/n.业余爱好；兴趣 4. novel /'nɒvl/n. 小说
5.difference/'dɪfrəns/n.差异 6.sense /sens/n.理 解
7.humour 'hju:mə(r)/(=humor)n. 幽默
8 . less /les/adj.较少的；更少的 adv.较少地；更少 地 pron. 较少；更少
9.straightforward /strert'fɒ:wəd/adj. 坦率的；简单的 10.opinion/ə'pinjən/n.看法；意见
11.honest/'pnɪst/adj.坦诚的；诚实的 12. direct /də'rekt,dar'rekt/adj. 率直的；直接的
13.similarity /,sɪmə'lærəti/n.相似之处 14 . friendship /'frendʃip/n.友谊；友情
15.metre/'mi:tə(r)(=meter)n. 米 16.prince/prins/n. 王子
17.character /'kærəktə(r)/n.人物；个性 18.pauper/'pɔ:pe(r)/n.贫民；乞丐
74新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
19.exchange/iks'tʃeɪndʒ/v.&n.交换 20.accident/'æksɪdənt/n. 意外；(交通)事故
21.expect/ɪk'spekt/v.预料；期待 22.silver/'sɪlvə(r)/adj.银色的 n. 银
23.situation/,sɪtʃu'eɪʃn/n. 情况；状况 24.reach /ri:tʃ/v.伸手；达到
25. to u ch /tʌtʃ/v.触摸；碰触
二．重点词汇变形
1. interest n./v.兴趣；对...感兴趣→interested (adj.感兴趣的)→interesting (adj.有趣的)
2novel n.小说→novels(复数)→novelist (n.小说家)
3. difference n.不同点→differences(复数)→ different (adj.)不同的
4. sense n.理解力；感觉→senses(复数)→sensible (adj.明智的)
5. humour/humor n.幽默；幽默感→humorous(adj.幽默的)
6. straightforward adj.坦率的；简单的→more straightforward(比较级)→most straightforward(最高级)
7. honest adj.诚实的→more honest (比较级)→most honest(最高级)→honesty (n.诚实);→dishonest (反义词)
8. direct adj.直接的→director(n.导演/主管)→directly (adv.)→indirect(反义词，简接的)
9. similarity n.相似之处→similarities(复数)→similar (adj.)→similarly (adv.相似地)
10. friendship n.友谊→friendships (复数)→ friend(n.朋友)→ friendly (adj.友好的)
11. exchange v./n.交换→exchanged (过去式)→ exchanging (现在分词)→exchanges(复数)
12. accident n.意外→accidents (复数)→accidentally (adv.偶然地)
1 3. expect v.预料；期待 → expectatio n(n.期待)→unexpected (反义词，想不到的)
三．重点短语通关
1.respect each other's differences 尊重彼此的不同 2.kind of 有点，稍微
3.have a great sense of humor 有很强的幽默感 4.thanks to 归功于；由于；因为
5.make a mistake 犯错误 6.be different from the past 和过去不同
7.encourage sb to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事 8.be afraid of 害怕
9.play the Chinese flute 吹中国长笛 10.win the first prize 赢得一等奖
11.be glad to do sth. 很高兴做某事 12.be glad to do sth. 很高兴做某事
13.from my house to school 从我家里到学校 14.by accident 意外地；偶然
15.learn to do sth. 学习做某事 16.try to do sth. 尽力做某事；努力做某事
17.be similar to 和…相似 18.silver lining 一线光明
75新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
19.reach for 伸手触碰 20.be ready to do sth.乐于做某事；准备好做某
事
21.lend a hand 搭把手；帮助某人 和兴趣 22.make comparisons 作比较
23.because of 因为 24.benefit from 从….受益
25. get better 变得更好
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
Tom 5 hours ago
Some people think that friends should be alike, but some other people think that friends should be different. What do
you think?Should friends be similar or different?
Matt 4 hours ago
I think a good friend is like a mirror. You can understand people by knowing
their friends. My friend, Stephen, is a great example. We often hang out
together because we have similar hobbies and interests. For example, we both
love sports. He plays badminton better than I do, so he always wins our matches. Because of that,I try harder when I
practise, and now I'm getting better at badminton. Stephen and l are similar in other ways. He is as serious as me.
When we aren't playing sports, we enjoy reading together. I read more history books than he does, and he reads a lot
of novels.We often share interesting books with each other.
Diana 3 hours ago
I don't agree. For me, friends who are different make me better. I think
we should respect each other's differences and learn from each other.
For example, I am kind of shy, but my best friend, Yuan Lei, is
outgoing. She has a great sense of humour too. Thanks to her,I am
becoming more outgoing. Now I think meeting new people is really
fun!
I have another friend, Zhang Yong. He is not afraid to give his opinion, especially when he thinks I am making a
mistake. I am less straightforward than he is, but I am glad to have an honest friend.
【考点1.】We often hang out together because we have similar hobbies and interests.我们经常一起出去闲
逛，因为我们有相似的爱好和兴趣。
【用法详解】①interest作名词，意为“兴趣、爱好”。
相关搭配: have an interest in.. . = be interested in 对...... 感兴趣 los e interes t 失去兴趣。
76新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg.She shows great interest in music .她对音乐很感兴趣。
②interest作动词，意为“使感兴趣”，主语通常为事物。
相关搭配: interes t sb .使某人感兴趣。
Eg.The story interests children.这个故事让孩子们感兴趣。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.His main __ __ are reading and playing chess.
A.interested B.interesting C.interests
（ B ）2.The new movie didn't_____me at all.
A. interesting B.interest C.interested
（ A ）3.Are you_____in learning a new language?
A. interested B.interesting C.interest
【考点2.】For example, we both love sports.比如，我们都喜欢运动。
【用法详解】①both作形容词，置于被修饰的名词前。
Eg.Look at the trees on both sides of the streets. 看街道两边的树。
②both作代词，可单独使用，也可用于both...of...结构。用作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式。
Eg.—Which one do you want? 你想要哪一个?—I’ll take both. 我两个都要。
Eg.Both of them are super stars.他们两个都是明星。
相关拓展：不定代词both,neither,all,none与either的用法
不定代词 含义 固定搭配 例句
both 两者都 both...and... Both Tom and Mary are teachers.
…和…都 汤姆和玛丽都是老师
neither 两者都不 neither...nor... Neither you nor I am good at math.
既不…也不… 我们俩都不擅长数学。
all 三者或三者以上都 无 All of us are from China.
我们都来自中国。
none 三者或三者以上都 无 I like none of the books.
不 这些书我都不喜欢。
either 两者之一 either...or... Either you or he is right.
要么…要么… 不是你对，就是他对。
牛
刀小试
77新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ D ）1.—What would you like, ice-cream or apple juice?
— .One for my sister and the other for myself.
A.Neither B. All C. None D. Both
（ D ）2. my father ________ my mother look after me. I love them so much.
A.Either;or B.Both;with C.Not only;but also D.Both;and
（ A ）3.Tara and her sister _ _ quiet and they_____ sports.
A.are both , both like B.are both, like both
C.both are , both like D.both are, like both
【考点3.】Stephen and l are similar in other ways.史蒂芬和我在另一种程度上来说是相似的。
【用法详解】1.other表示泛指，意为“其余的；另外的”，常与可数名词复数连用。
Eg.Some students are reading and other students are writing. 一些学生在阅读，另一些学生在写字。
相关拓展：other, the other, others, the others与another的用法区别：
①the other 表示特指，指两者中的另一个
Eg.I have two handbags. One is LV, and the other is LV too.我有两个包，一个是LV,另一个还是LV。
②the others 表示特指，指一定范围内除去某些后剩下的全部，相当于“the
other+可数名词复数”
Eg.Some students in my class are reading and others are writing. 我们班里一些学生在阅
读，另一些学生在写字。
③others表示泛指，意为“其他的；其他人”，指除去某些后剩下的一部分，相当于
“other+可数名词复数”
Eg.Some students are reading and others are writing. 一些学生在阅读，另一些学生在写字。
④another表示泛指，指三者或三者以上中的“另一个”，其后可以接可数名词单数；也可用作代词
Eg.This glass is broken. Please give me another one. 这个玻璃杯破了,请再给我一个。
2.way 作名词，意为“道路；方法”。in other ways 意为“从另一些程度上”。
相关搭配：
①in the way 挡道,妨碍
Eg.Tell the boy not to stand in the way.叫那个男孩别挡道碍事。
②on the way /on the one's way 在...路上
Eg.Yesterday,I met Tom on the way to school.昨天,我在去学校的路上遇到了汤姆。
③by the way 顺便说,顺便问一下
Eg.By the way,do you know where the post office is?顺便问一下，你知道邮局在哪儿吗?
78新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
④in this way 用这种方法;这样:因此
Eg.Only in this way can we win the game.只有这样我们才能获胜.
⑤in a way 从某种程度上看,从某种意义上来说
Eg.I like Tom in a way, but he is very proud.在一定程度上,我喜欢汤姆,可是他很骄傲.
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.—I can’t find my shoes. Where are they, Mom?
—Oh, one is under the bed, ________ is behind the door.
A.the other B.others C.another D.other
（ A ）2.—How many can I have?
—You can have two, ________ are for your sister.
A. the others B. others C. the other D. another
【考点4.】I think we should respect each other's differences and learn from each other.我认为我们应该尊
重彼此的差异和意见，并向对方学习。
【用法详解】differences作名词，指人或事物之间的“不同、差异”，可作可数或不
可数名词。
① make a difference 有影响、起作用
Eg.Her determination really makes a difference in her grades.她努力学习确实对
她的成绩产生了影响。
②difference between A and B:A与B的差异
Eg.There is a significant difference between a big city and a small town.在大城
市工作和小城镇之间有显著的差异。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Can you tell the____between these two pictures?
A.same B.difference C.similar
（ A ）2.Eating healthily can____to your life.
A. make a difference B.make sense C.make sure
（ A ）3.There are many_____in customs between countries.
A. differences B.difficulties C. problems
79新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【考点5.】She has a great sense of humour too.她也有非常强烈的幽默感。
【用法详解】①sense作名词，意为“感觉”，多指(生理或心理感知)、感官功能(视觉、听觉等) 。
Eg;Dogs have a strong sense of smell.狗崽崽有敏锐的嗅觉。
②sense作名词，意为“理解力;判断力”。 sense of humor/direction 幽默感/方向感
Eg;She has a great sense of humor.她很有幽默感。
③sense作名词，意为“意义；道理”。
mak e sens e 有意义;讲得通
Eg;His explanation doesn't make sense.他的解释说不通。
there's no sense in doing sth 做某事没有意义
Eg;There's no sense in arguing with him.和他争论没有意义。
牛
刀小试
1.He felt deep sens e o f satisfactio n (满足感) and when he helped the old.
( A )2. She has a good of fashion.
A.sense B.feeling C.idea
【考点6.】Thanks to her,I am becoming more outgoing.多亏了她，我变得更外向了。
【用法详解】thanks to意为“归功于;由于;因为”后接名词或短语，表示原因。
Eg;Thanks to your help, we succeeded.多亏了你的帮助，我们成功了。
相关拓展：thank you for doing sth=thanks for doing sth 感谢某人做某事
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. the heavy rain, the game was canceled.
A.Thanks to B.Because C.Thanks for D.but
（ A ）2. __ __ your advice, I avoided a big mistake.
A.Thanks to B.Because C.Although
【考点7.】he also realized that people' s lives were much harder than he expected.他也意识到，人们的生活比他
预期的更好了。
【用法详解】expect 作动词，表示“预料某事会发生”或“期待某人做某事”。
相关搭配：① expect to do sth . 期待做某事
Eg;I expect to make a progress in my math.我期待我的数学能取得进步。
②expect sb. to do sth.:期望某人做某事
Eg;My parents expect me to study hard.我的父母期望我努力学习。
80新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.I expect the work by Friday.
A. finish B.finishing C. to finish D.finishes
（ A ）2.Don't expect him immediately. He needs time.
A. to agree B.agreeing C. agrees D.agree
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
（ C ）1.—Our team___ ___the match. We've got the first place!
—Well done! Congratulations!
A.hit B.beat C.won D.watched
（ B ）2.—Which subject do you like better, math or English?
—____ _____. I think math is as interesting as English.
A.Neither B.Both C.All D.None
（ B ）3.My sister never eats junk food, ?
A.is she B.does she C.isn’t she D.doesn’t she
（ B ）4.My sister Jenny is ___ _ ____ outgoing girl. She loves to make friends.
A.a B.an C.the D./
（ D ）5.—I am worrying about our final exam these days.
—There is nothing to worry about you work hard.
A.until B.so that C.as far as D.as long as
（ C ）6.—Can I help you?
—Please give me about the trains to Daqing.
A.a few information B. a little informations C.a little information D. a few informations
（ C ）7.My way to work out the problem is the same Jack’s but different Mary’s.
A.as; as B.from; from C.as; from D.from; as
（ D ）8.She is famous musician and she is talented music.
A.for B. with C.of D.in
（ A ）9.—When will Mr.Green Beijing?
—In a week.
81新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.reach B.get C.arrive at D. come
（ A ）10.Jim is good at telling stories. He always makes us __ ____ when he tells us stories.
A.laugh B.to laugh C.laughs D.laughing
（ C ）11.No one in our class can run as as Tim.
A.more quickly B.quicklier C.quickly D.most quickly
（ A ）12.—Are you relaxing yourself here?
—Yes. It is ___ ___ to walk slowly along the river.
A.fantastic B.boring C.bad D.terrible
（ A ）13.—It’s Father’s Day, __ ____?
—Yes. Let’s buy a gift for Dad. He works very hard for us.
A.isn’t it B.doesn’t it C.isn’t he D.doesn’t he
（ C ）14.—Do you know about his new idea?
—Yes, I do. It's similar mine.
A.with B.from C.to D.of
（ A ）15.The movie,one and only(《热烈》) is inspiring . Sean _____I want to watch it.
A. Both; and B. Either; or C. Neither; nor D. Either; and
二、用所给词的适当形式填空
1. Colors can change our moods(情绪) and make us feel (feel) happy or sad.
2. It's necessary for us to save (save) our environment.
3. The Shanghai Jing’an team __won__ (win) the men’s U18 soccer gold medal in the first National Youth Games on
August 26, 2015.
4. I think Sally did as ___well___(better) as Lucy in the math competition.
5. Kate’s schoolbag is newer than ___ mine _ (my).
6. My best friend Jimmy enjoys listening (listen) to music.
7. Lang Lang is a great pianist and he is talented (talent) in music.
8. Can you tell us some __information___ (information) about the vacation plan?
9. Work hard, and you can get good ___grades___ (grade) in the exams.
10. Speak clearly (clear) so that others can understand you well.
三、汉译英：单词/短语/句子
1.莉莉和我姐姐都会弹钢琴。
Both Lily and my sister can play the piano.
2.只要你能取得好成绩，我就会高兴。
82新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A s lon g a s you can get good grades, I'll be happy.
3.我喜欢我的英语老师，因为他帮助我展现最好的自我。
I like my English teacher, because he helps to__bring___ ___out___the best in me.
4.事实上，我应该是一名好的听众。
___In_____ ___fact___, I should be a good listener.
5.我不关心价格，只要车的状况好就行了。
I don't___care___ __about___the price, as long as the car is in good condition.
6.徐磊跟我很像。我们都很结实，并且我们都喜欢足球。
Xu Lei____is____ __similar__ ____to____me. We are both strong and we both like soccer.
7.那便是我喜欢英语而且在课上学习更加努力的原因。
That's___why____I like English and I study__harder___in class
8.我并不十分在乎我的朋友跟我一样或与我不同。
I don't really care about if my friends are____the___ ___same__as me or different.
9.我认为朋友应该彼此不同。
I think friends should ____be____ __different___ ___from___ each other.
10.我的好朋友总是能取得比我好的成绩。
My best friend always ___gets____ __better___ ___grades___ than I do.
四、阅读理解
A
We know health is important in everyone's life.Here are some ways to make them easy to get.
★Eat a balanced diet．Eat a lot of fruit and vegetables，some grains(谷物) and a little meat.
★Exercise twice or three times a week.
★Get enough sleep.It is best to get eight hours' sleep a day.
★Keep yourself busy.This is good because it stops you from having bad habits.To keep yourself busy，you can walk
around the house，spend time with your pet，do sports，or have a hobby.
★Go out and make friends.Spend time and have fun with them.Talk with them，but try not to talk about anything
bad.You should stay with the people who are healthy.
（ D ）1.How often should you exercise if you want to get health?
A.Every day. B.Twice a day. C.Three times a month. D.Twice or three times a week.
（ B ）2. How many hours do you need to sleep every day?
A. Seven. B. Eight. C. Nine. D.Ten.
（ C ）3. The underlined word “it” refers to(指的是) ________.
83新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.eating a balanced diet B.exercising more C. keeping yourself busy D. making friends
（ A ）4. Which of the following is NOT true?
A.We can eat a lot of meat to keep healthy. B.We need to exercise.
C. It's good to make some friends. D.We can spend our free time doing sports.
（ D ）5. What's the best title for this passage?
A. Eating habit B. Playing sports C. Making friends D. How to get health
B
Uncle Sam
Do your children enjoy interesting stories, funny games and exciting dances? Uncle Sam will be read to
teach children of all ages all these things at the City. Theatre on Saturday morning at 10:00. Free.
Walking Tour
Forget your worries on Saturday morning. Take a beautiful walk and learn about local history. Meet at
the front entrance of City Hall at 9:30. Wear comfortable shoes!
Movie Time
Two films will be shown on Saturday afternoon at the Museum Theatre. See March of the Penguins at
1:30. Kung Fu Panda will be at 3:45. For further information, call 4987898.
International Picnic
Are you tired of eating the same food every day? Come to Central Park on Saturday and enjoy food from
all over the world. Delicious and not expensive. Noon to 5:00 p.m.
Take Me Out to the Ballgame
It's October, and this Saturday night is your last chance to see the Redbirds this year. Get your tickets at
the gate. It might be cold. Don't forget sweaters and jackets.
Do You Want to Hear The Zoo?
The Zoo, a popular rock group from Australia, will give their first US concert this Saturday night at 8:00
at Rose Hall, City College.
( B )1．You probably eat Chinese, Italian and Indian food at _______.
A．City Hall B．Central Park C．the City Theatre
( C )2．We can see movies at _______.
A．10:00 a.m. B．9:30 a.m. C．3:45 p.m.
( A )3．The Zoo here is a ________.
A．Music group B．US concert C．Popular park
84新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( C )4．From the passage, we can know_________.
A．if you are 8 years old, you have to pay to learn exciting dances
B．you can learn local history on a walking tour on Sunday morning
C．The Redbirds' last match this year will be held outside
( B )5．The passage is mainly about_________.
A．city news B．weekend activities C．music week
C
Mrs. White was very fat. She weighed(体重) 100 kilos, so she went to see a doctor. The doctor said, “You need a
diet (节食),Mrs. White, and I have a good way here.” He gave Mrs. White a small book and said, “Read this carefully
and eat the things on page(页) 11 every day. Then come back and see me in two weeks.”
Mrs. White came again two weeks later, but she wasn’t thinner. She was fatter than before. The doctor was surprised
and asked, “Are you eating the things on page 11 of the small book?” “Yes, doctor.” she answered.
The next day the doctor visited Mrs. White during her dinner. He was very surprised at what he saw. “Mrs. White，”
he said, “why are you eating potatoes and bread? They aren’t in your diet. ”“Doctor，”Mrs. White answered, “I
follow(遵从) my diet at lunchtime. But this is my dinner.”
( D )1．Mrs. White went to see a doctor because ______________.
A．she had a bad cold
B．she felt terrible
C．the doctor was her friend
D．she wanted to be thinner
( B )2．The doctor asked her to ______________.
A．eat more food B．eat less food C．eat nothing D．eat healthy food
( A )3．Two weeks later，Mrs. White became ______________.
A．fatter B．thinner C．healthier D．stronger
( C )4．The doctor was surprised when he visited Mrs. White during her dinner. Because______________.
A．she eat nothing. B．she was eating meat.
C．she was eating potatoes and bread. D．she wasn’t in.
( D )5．“I follow my diet at lunchtime. But this is my dinner.” means ______________.
A．She always followed the diet.
B．She didn’t follow the diet.
C．She didn’t like the diet
85新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
D．She only followed the diet at lunchtime, and she didn’t follow the diet at dinner.
D
A boy who was cleaning shoes in the street said to a young man passing by(路过的), “Let me clean your shoes.”
The young man said, “No, thank you.” “You may pay me only a pound(英镑), sir.” said the boy. But the young man
refused(拒绝)again. Then the boy told him that he would clean his shoes for nothing. The young man agreed(同意) to
this, and soon one of his shoes was shining brightly(闪闪发亮). The man put the other shoe on the boy, but the boy
refused to clean it unless he was paid(被付给)two pounds for his work. The young man refused to pay anything and
went away. But the dirty one looked so bad that he couldn’t walk away. He had to turn back (转身)and gave the boy
two pounds. In a very short time his shoes shone brightly.
( A )1．The boy was a shoes ____.
A．cleaner B．makerC．repairer D．seller
( C )2．At first the young man refused to clean his shoes, because ____.
A．he couldn’t pay B．he had not enough money
C．he didn't think it necessaryD．he had just cleaned his shoes
( C )3．Then the young man agreed to clean his shoes, because the boy asked for ____.
A．two poundsB．one pound C．nothing D．few money
( D )4．The boy refused to clean the second shoe, because ____.
A．it was very dirtyB．the young man paid only one pound
C．it was difficult to clean D．he asked to be paid two pounds
( C )5．The boy said he would clean the young man’s shoes for nothing just in order to(为了)_____
A．show his kindness B．help the young man
C．get more money from himD．let everyone see
五、阅读填表
阅读短文，根据短文内容，在表格中填入相应信息. (每空不超过三个单词，共5小题，每小题2分)
What are you going to be when you grow up? I have a few friends .They have different answers about this question.
My partner, Mary, is good at writing. She keeps writing every day .She wants to write for TV or newspapers. My
friend ,Tom, admires Michael Jordan very much . He practices playing basketball every day. He wants to be another
Michael Jordan. Mike wants to be an actor, he can’t afford so much money to take acting lessons, he has to learn
acting lessons by himself. Robert can sing very well, and he is taking the piano lessons at school. He hopes to teach
students music. Alice wants to be a computer programmer. She’s going to study computer science.
Name What does he / she want to be How is he / she going to do that
86新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Mary 56．writer keep writing
Tom basketball player 57．practice playing basketball
Mike 58．actor learn acting lessons
59．Robert teacher take piano lessons
Alice computer programmer 60．study computer science
六、补全对话7选5情景交际。
A: Hello, Mr. Wang
B: Hello, Mr Wilson
A: 61． B
B:Yes. Our lives are getting better and better , Mr Wilson , 62． E
A: Three days.
B: 63． A
A: Very good .It's beautiful and quiet .
B: It seems that you know our city . Have you ever been here before ?
A: Yes, 64． C
B: Then this time you are here for?
A: Just for a holiday
B: I'm very glad you like our city. 65． F
A: Thank you.
A．How do you like our city?
B．Your city has changed a lot these years, hasn't it?
C．I came here to give a report on food safety two years ago.
D．That will make you more relaxed.
E.How long have you been here?
F.Have a good time.
G.Talking of my spare time.
七、书面表达
假设你是Susan，你有一个好朋友叫Linda，请根据要点写一篇文章。要点如下：
87新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
1、你们俩都很高，都喜欢中国文化，每周去一次图书馆。
2、上周Linda 去爬了长城，她认为是世界上最伟大的奇迹之一。
3、Linda比你更外向，更擅长运动。但你们在学习上一们地努力， 并相互帮助。
4、你们能够谈论和分享一切。
5、你看过功夫电影《长城》。谈谈你的感受。
注意：
1、文中不得透露个人姓名和学校名称；
2、词数：60-80；
3、内容连贯，不要逐条翻译；
4、短文的开头已给出，不计入总词数。
参考词汇：culture 文化； climb 爬； wonder奇迹
My name is Susan, I have a good friend, Linda.
My names is Susan, I have a good friend, Linda. We are both tall, and we both like Chinese culture. We go to the
library once a week. She is more outgoing than me, and she is better at sports. But we are both—working and often
help each other. We can talk about and share everything . Last week Linda went to climb the Great Wall. She thinks it
is one of the greatest wonders in the world. I also saw an action movie named The Great Wall. I like it because it is
very exciting.
Unit 4 Amazing Plants and Animals
Section A what can plants and animals do?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. moss /mɒs/n.苔藓 2. redwood /redwʊd/n.红杉;红木
2. cheetah /tʃi:tə/n.猎豹 4 .folding /'fəʊldɪŋ/ adj.折叠式的;可折叠的
5. bamboo /bæm'bu:/n.竹;竹子 6. popular /pɒpjələ(r)/ adj.广受欢迎的;流行的
6. goodness /'gʊdnəs/n.美德;营养 8. tool /tu:l/n.工具;手段
9 . actually /'æktʃuəli/ adv.实际上;居然 10. shoot /ʃu:t/n.幼苗;嫩芽;v.(shot /∫ɒt/)开(枪);射击
11. appear /ə'pɪə(r)/v.出现;呈现 12 . land /land/n.陆地;土地;v.降落;着陆
12. African /æfrɪkən/ adj.非洲的;非洲人的;n.非洲人 14. rose /rəʊz/n.玫瑰;蔷薇
15. peony /'pi:əni/n.牡丹;芍药 16. lotus /ləʊtəs/n.莲花
88新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
16. butterfly /bʌtəflaɪ/n.蝴蝶 18. wing /wɪŋ/n.翅膀;翼
19. frog /frɒg/n.青蛙 21. province /prɒvɪns/n.省份
二．重点词汇变形
1.folding折叠式的；可折叠的(adj.)→fold(v.) 折叠 → 反： unfold 展 开 (v.)
2.popular(adj.)流行的；受欢迎的→ 反： unpopula r 不受欢迎的 → popularity(n.) 流行，受欢迎
3.goodness(n.)美德；营养 →good(adj.)好的 →goods(n.) 商品
4.actually(adv.)实际上；事实上→actual (adj.) 实际的
5.appear (v.)出现→反 ：disappear 消 失 → appearance(n.)出现；外貌 →apparent (adj.) 明显的；表面上的
→apparently(adv.)显然地
6.African(adj.&n.)非洲的；非洲人→Africa(n.)非洲
7.peony(n.)牡丹；芍药→复数形式： peo nies
8.lotus(n.)莲花→复数形式： l otuses
9.butterfly(n.)蝴蝶→复数形式 ： butterflie s→butter(n.)黄油
10.weigh(v.)称重→ weigh t (n.)体重
11.ginkgo(n.)银杏→复数形式： g inkgoes
三．重点短语通关
1.between...and...在…和.….之间 2.a folding fan 折叠扇
3.a painting of bamboo 一幅竹子画 4. one of the most popular subjects 最受欢迎的题材之 一
5.Chinese painting 中国画 6. Chinese culture 中国文化
7.learn lots of interesting things 学到许多有趣的事情
8 . one of the fastest - growing plants 长得最快的植物之一
9. in the world 在世界上 10. use sth.to do sth . 用…做.…
11.bamboo shoots 竹笋 12.be interested in 对..…感兴趣
89新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
13 . share sth . with sb . 和某人分享某事 14.feel free to do sth. 可以随便做某事
15 . weigh up to 重达；体重接近于 16.ginkgo trees 银杏树
17. over 200 million years ago 两百多万年前 18.a symbol of hope and long life 希望和长寿的象
19.thousands of tourists 成千上万的游客 20. in mid - October 在10月中旬
21. take a walk 散步 22. bring joy to their heart 给他们带来欢乐
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Ella:Oh, what's that, Chen Jie? It's so beautiful!
Chen Jie: Thanks. It's a folding fan. I bought it last year.
Ella:Oh! It has a painting of bamboo on it.
Chen Jie: Yeah.Bamboo is one of the most popular subjects in Chinese
paintings. It's a symbol of goodness in Chinese culture.
Ella:I didn't know that before. So, where did you get that fan?
Chen Jie: At the Bamboo Sea in Sichuan, the largest and oldest bamboo
forest in China. I learnt lots of interesting things when I was there.
Ella: Really? Like what?
Chen Jie: Well, bamboo is one of the fastest-growing plants. Some bamboo can grow almost one metre in
one day. Also, it's one of the most useful plants in the world. People can use it to build houses and make
tools and instruments.
Ella:Oh, that's interesting. I remember pandas love to eat bamboo too,
right?
Chen Jie: Exactly! Actually we eat bamboo shoots too. They're really
delicious.
【考点1.】Bamboo is one of the most popular subjects in Chinese paintings.竹子是中国画中最受欢迎的题材之
一。
【用法详解】1.popular作形容词，意为“流行的；广受欢迎的”。the most popular 是popular的最高级形式。
相关搭配 ： be popular in . ..在……受欢迎be popular for...因……受欢迎be popular with.….受……欢迎
2. one of...意为“其中之一”。
①作主语时主语为one，谓语动词用单数。
90新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg: One of best friends is Sean.肖恩是我最好的朋友之一。
② one of +the+形容词的最高级+复数名词，表示“最...之一”
Eg:WangYiBo is one of the most excellent actor in China .
王一博是中国最优秀的男演员之一。
③ one of+复数名词
Eg:one of my classmates teaches me Korean.我的一个同学教我韩语。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.She is in our class.
A. one of the tallest girlsB. one of the tallest girl C. one of tallest girls D. one of the taller girls
( A )2.This is I have ever read.
A. one of the most interesting books B. one of the most interesting book
C. one of the interesting books D. one of interesting books
( C )3.one of the biggest buildings set up last year.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
4.This is on e o f th e mos t beautifu l (最美丽的城市之一) in the world.
【考点2.】Actually we eat bamboo shoots too.They're really delicious.事实上，我们也吃竹笋。它们真的是太
美味了。
【用法详解】actually作副词，意为“.实际上;居然”强调事实或纠正误解，可置于句中或句首。
Eg:He looks young, but actually he is 33.他看起来很年轻，但实际33 岁了。
Eg:Actually, I disagree with you.实际上，我不同意你。
相关拓展：in fact事实上
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.I thought she was French, but_____she's from Canada.
A. Actually B. popular C. appear
【考点3.】Among all animals,I love pandas the best.在所有的动物中，我最喜欢熊猫。
【用法详解】among意为“在...之间”，用于三者或以上群体之间。
Eg:She sat among her friends.她坐在朋友中间。
相关拓展：between意为“在...之间”，用于两者之间。
Between...and....在...和....之间
Eg:Mom stands between the two kids.妈妈站在两个孩子中间。
91新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.The secret was shared______the three of us.
A. Between B.among C.through
2.There is a building between the school and the hospital。
3. Butterflies are flying among the flowers。
4.There is a river between the two cities.
【考点4.】please feel free to ask me any questions you have .请尽情地问我你们想问的问题。
【用法详解】feel free to do sth.意为“随意做某事”，feel free是英语口语中一个常用表达。表示无须拘束，只管
按照自己的意愿去做某事。
Eg:Can I use your bathroom?我可以用一下你的卫生间吗?
一Yes, feel free.可以，请随意。
Eg:Feel free to ask questions if you don't understand.你要是不懂，可以随便提问。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.I made a lot of sweets, so feel free whatever you like.
A. eat B.ate C. eating D. to eat
( B )2.I feel like my homework tomorrow.
A. do B.doing C. to do D. does
【考点5.】①Ginkgo trees first appeared over 200 million years old.银杏树第一次出现是在两千万年前。
② Thousands of tourists come to see it each year,especially in mid-October, as it is the best time to
see it .每年都有成千上万的游客来看它，尤其是十月中旬，是最好的观赏时间。
【用法详解】million作概数词，意为“百万”。thousand作概数词，意为“千”。除此之外还有hundred 意为
“百”，“billion”意为“十亿”。
①.表达确切的数量
Hundred,thousand,million,billion等前有具体的数字修饰时，表示确指的数量，这些
词不能用复数形式，即 词尾不加 -S ，且不与 o f 连用 。
Eg:The number of students in our school is six hundred .我们学校的学生人数是600。
②.表达不确切的数量
hundred, thousand,million,billion等可构成短语，表示泛指的数量。此时这些词用复
数形式并与 o f 连用 ，其前不能有具体的数字修饰,但可被 many，a few 等词修饰。
92新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:Hundreds of people are visiting this old town.成百上千的游客正在游览这个古城。
牛
刀小试
（ C ） 1.The number of the fans going to this concert is about three _ . And _ of them are girls.
A. thousand; two third B. thousands; two third
C. thousand; two thirds D. thousands; two thirds
（ B ） 2. People plant _ _ trees on Tree Planting Day every year.
A. hundred B. hundreds of C.hundreds
（ B ） 3. Nowadays, _people like HUAWEI phones better, and about _ _ of them are adults.
A. the number of; four fifths B. a number of; four fifths C. a number of; four fifth
五、单元重点语法讲练
形容词和副词的最高级
1、语法概述
形容词、副词的最高级用于三个或三个以上的人或事物之间的
比较；常用of/in 来说明比较的范围；形容词和副词前要加定冠词
the ，副词最高级前的the有时可省略。
二、最高级的构成
1.规则变化
单音节和部分 一般在词尾加-est tall→tallest high→highest
双音节词
以字母e结尾的词加-st fine→finest nice→nicest
重读闭音节词词尾只有一个辅音
字母时（辅元辅），先双写该辅音字
口诀：“大 红 胖 瘦 适合 湿 热”
母，再加-est
（biggest,reddest,fattest,thinnest,fittest,wettest,hottest）
以“辅音字母+y”结尾的双音节 easy→easiest funny→funniest
词，变y为i再加-est
多音节和部分 在词前加most comfortable→most comfortable
双音节词
carefully→most carefully
【特别提醒】由“动词+ed”或“动词+ing”构成的形容词变最高级时，通常在该形容词前加most
Eg.interesting→most interesting relaxed→most relaxed boring→ most boring
2.不规则变化
good/well（好的）→___best____（最好的） bad/badly/ill（糟糕的）→___worst___（最糟糕的）
many/much（多的）→___most___（最多的） little（少的）→___least____（最少的）
old（老的）→___ oldest __/___eldest___（最老的） far（远的）→__farthest___/__furthest___（最远的）
93新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
写出下列单词的最高级形式
2. big →__biggest__ 2. small →__smallest_ 3. heavy →__heaviest__
4. fine →___finest__ 5. cheap →_cheapest_ 6. happy →__happiest__
8. close →___closest_ 8. fresh →__freshest__ 9. popular →_ most popular
2. creative →most creative 11. bad →___worst___ 12. carefully →most carefully
13. good/well →___best ____ 14. many/much →___most____ 15. fat →___fattest___
三、最高级的常考句型
1. 主语 +be+the+ 形容词最高级 +in/o f 短语 ……是……中最……的
Eg. YiBo is the tallest one in my class. 一博是我们班最高的同学。
主语 + 实义动词（ + th e ） + 副词最高级 +in/o f 短语 ……在……中最……
Eg. He works (the) hardest in Class 23. 在23班他学习最努力。
2. 主语 +be+one of the+ 形容词最高级 + 可数名词复数 +in/o f 短语 ...是...中最...的...之一
Eg. The High Speed Rail is one of the newest inventions in China. 高铁是中国最新的发明之一。
3.“疑问词+be+the+形容词最高级，A、B or C ?”，用于三个或三个以上的人或事物之间的比较
“疑问词+助动词+主语+动词原形（+ the）+副词最高级，A、B or C ?”
Eg.Who is the tallest, Tom, Kate or Bill? 汤姆、凯特和比尔，谁最高？
Eg.Which city do you like best, Beijing, Shanghai or Guangzhou?你最喜欢哪个城市，北京、上海还是广州？
4. 主语 +be+the+ 序数词 + 形容词最高级 + 可数名词单数 +in/o f 短语 ……在……中是第几……的……
Eg.The Yellow River is the second longest river in China.黄河是中国第二长河。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.Fishing is one of ___ ___activities among the middle—aged men like my uncles.
A.popular B.more popular C.most popular D.the most popular
（ C ）2.Amy has read many history books, so she learns history___ ___ of all the subjects.
A.well B.bad C.best D.worst
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
94新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )1.Of the three pens, the boy chose ___ ____ one.
A.less expensive B.the most expensive C.the less expensive D.more expensive
( C )2.—I think Moon Theater has ___ ___ seats in my town.
—I agree with you.I usually go there with my friends.
A.more comfortable B.worse C.the most comfortable D.the worst
( A )3. Staying with family and friends is one of __ ___ things in the world.
A. the happiest B. happier C. the happy D. happiest
( D )4.—Did Cindy win the first prize in the long jump?
—Yes.She jumped ___ ___ of all the players.
A.far B.farther C.the farther D.the farthest
( C )5.Which is ____ ____way to travel, by plane, by train or by bus?
A.less expensive B.more cheaper C.the least expensive D.cheaper
( A )6.Yangtze River is ___ ____ longest river in the world. It runs across China from the west to the east.
A.the third B.third C.the three D.three
( C )7.I like the Big Screen Complex because it has ___ _____ screen.
A. bigger B. the worst C. the biggest D. worst
( C )8.Whichdo you think is ____ ____, Mary, Jim or Wang Lin?
A. more talented B. talenteder C. the most talented D. talentedest
( D )9.Xi’an is one of__ ___capital________in China.
A.older; city B.the older; city C.oldest; cities D.the oldest; cities
( B )10.—Of the two shirts, which one did Mom buy?
—She bought the __ __ one because she could save some money for a cap.
A. cheapest B. cheaper C. more expensive D. most expensive
( C )11．—Why does your grandparents like to live in the countryside?
—Because they like the ________ air.
A．boringB．exciting C．fresh D．terrible
( A )12．—What do you think of playing games?
—I think ________. We should spend more time on school work.
A．it is less important than school work B．it is more important than school work
C．it is as important as school work D．it is the same important as school work
( A )13．Liu Chang did quite ________ in math, but Zhang Sheng did even ________.
A．badly; worse B．worse; worse C．badly; badly D．worse; badly
95新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )14．Shanghai is much larger than _________ in France and it is one of the _________ cities in
China.
A．any city, biggest B．any other city, bigger C．any other city , biggest D．any city, bigger
( D )15．—How are the dishes in the new restaurant?
—Terrible! Nothing tastes _______.
A．best B．better C．worst D．worse
( B )16．________ the five students, Lucy plays volleyball ________.
A．Of; better B．Of; best C．Among; better D．In; best
( C )17．—The radio says it’ll be much ________ tomorrow.
—Yes. It’s said that there will be much ________ tomorrow.
A．rain, rain B．rain, rainier C．rainier, rain D．rainy, rain
( A )18．Be quick! The game will begin ________.
A．soon B．recently C．carefully D．luckily
( B )19．—Do you like his answer? —Not at all. It couldn’t have been ________.
A．better B．worse C．more D．less
( D )20．We cannot add “un-” to________ to give it the opposite(相反的)meaning.
A．certain B．important C．comfortable D．active
二、用所给单词的正确形式填空
1．Take exercise one hour a day, you’ll become healthie r (healthy) than before.
2．My sister is bette r (good) at Maths than I. She often helps me with it.
3．Friday is my busies t (busy) day in a week.
4．Of all the subjects, I like English bes t (good).
5．I know something about the film. Can you tell me mor e (much)?
三、完成句子
6．我比其他孩子更安静和稳重。
I’m quiete r and serious than other kids.
7．我现在的感觉比昨天更糟。
Now I’m feeling much worse than yesterday.
8．我没有买到演唱会的入场券。
I haven’t got the ticket to the concert.
9．到目前为止，中国在消除贫困方面卓有成就。
96新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
So fa r , China is successful in eradication of poverty(消除贫困）
10．他的老师总是建议他要认真听讲。
His teacher always advises him to listen to the teacher _ carefully ____ .
四、多句选词填空
excite, disappoint, live, it, African，usual, learn, go, important, store
11．The young bird can feed itsel f now.
12．The old man loves living in the livel y countryside.
13．Three Africa n s are visiting our school now.
14．You must know the importanc e of save water.
15．I want to go to the stor e . Can you show me the way?
16．Bob's father has gon e to Beijing and he will get back in two weeks.
17．It's the _ most exciting movie that I've ever watched. I like it very much.
18．Mary is worried, because she doesn't know how __ to learn English well.
19．It's disappointed that such a wonderful place can’t be visited.
20．My teacher always works out math problems in an unusua l way.
五、完型填空
Welcome to my hometown. It's a new 1 near a river. 2 it is smaller than the other cities. It is very quiet,
3 and nice. So 4 people think it is a good place. 5 you come to my hometown, I will show you 6 a big
and beautiful park. It is in the center 7 the city. It is my favorite place. I 8 go to the park on Sundays with my
family or friends. Many people 9 in it every day. Kids can play sports or play all kinds of 1 0 like flying kites
in it, too. There 1 1 pay phones, a supermarket, a market and restaurants in it. The library is 1 2 from 8：00 am
to 9：00 pm every day. People can read books, 1 3 videos and learn new things in it. People can buy things in the
1 4 and market. If people are hungry, they can go to the restaurants for a 1 5 . Do you like my hometown?
（ B ）1．A．village B．city C．town D．island
（ A ）2．A．But B．Though C．So D．Because
（ C ）3．A．crowded B．noisy C．clean D．dirty
（ A ）4．A．most B．least C．fewest D．biggest
（ D ）5．A．Where B．Why C．Which D．When
（ C ）6．A．at B．by C．around D．after
（ A ）7．A．of B．at C．after D．in
（ C ）8．A．never B．hardly C．usually D．ever
97新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ A ）9．A．exercise B．to exercise C．exercising D．exercised
（ B ）10．A．cards B．games C．Books D．tricks
（ B ）11．A．have B．are C．had D．were
（ D ）12．A．opened B．close C．closed D．open
（ D ）13．A．take B．play C．learn D．watch
（ C ）14．A．office B．library C．supermarket D．park
（ A ）15．A．meal B．party C．drink D．gift
六、阅读单选
A
One day, John read an advertisement in a newspaper．It said, "Wanted．The best salesman in the world．" John
thought he was a great salesman and went to ask for the job．" "I' m the best salesman in the world," he said to the
manager．"Give me the job．"
"You must prove you're the best," the manager said．
"OK I will," John said．
"Good．" The manager took several boxes of sweets out of his desk．"Last week I bought a thousand boxes of
sweets．If yon can sell them all before the end of the week, you can have the job, " said the manager．
"That's easy, "John said．He took the boxes of sweets and left the office．
Every day and all day he went from shop to shop, trying to sell the sweets．But he couldn't sell one．The sweets
were too bad for him to sell．At the end of the week he went back to the manager．"I'm sorry, sir," he said, "I was
wrong about myself．I'm not the best salesman in the world, but I know who is．"
"Oh" said the manager．"Who?"
"The person who sold you a thousand boxes of the sweets．"
（ D ）1．The manager told John .
A．he could start work at once B．he was the best salesman in the world
C．he wasn't a good salesman D．he must show he was the best salesman in the world
（ A ）2．John could get the job if .
A．he sold a thousand boxes of sweets B．he gave away a thousand boxes of sweets
C．he sent the manager a thousand boxes of sweets D．he bought a thousand boxes of sweets from the manager
（ C ）3．The right order(顺序） of the story is .
①John went to ask for the job. ②John told the manager who the best salesman really was.
③John read an advertisement in a newspaper. ④ John went to sell the sweets.
98新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．①②③④ , B．④③②① C．③①④②, D．③④①②
（ A ）4．From this story we can know that ．
A．John didn't get the job B．John was a good seller
C．the manager was a good seller D．the advertisement was a good one
（ B ）5．John couldn't sell the sweets because ．
A．he was not a good salesman B．the sweets were too bad
C．he wanted to send them to his friends D．nobody liked sweets
B
Tom , Jean, Jack and Lucy are talking about the movie theaters in the city .
My name’s Tom. I go to Movie Palace twice a month . It’s about two kilometers from my home . The
service is good . But the price of a ticket is a little expensive. I never go to Moon Cinema. It’s about 10
kilometers from my home.
I’m Jean. I go to Moon Cinema more often. There are often new movies on show and the screens are
big. Most importantly, the price is cheap. It’s always half the price for students , about 30 yuan . I go there
once a week.
I’m Jack . I live about 5 kilometers from Moon Cinema and 8 kilometers from Movie Palace. I think
the seats in Moon Cinema are hard and the music is too loud. So I prefer to go to Movie Palace. I go to
Movie Palace once a month .
I’m Lucy . I prefer to go to Movie Palace . It’s in the center of the city and is very modern . I like
shopping and there are some shopping centers around . I go there once a month .
（ C ）51．Who goes to a cinema once a month ?
A．Tom and Jean . B．Jean and Jack. C．Jack and Lucy. D．Lucy and Tom.
（ D ）52．How much is a full-price ticket in Moon Cinema ?
A．About 50 yuan. B．About 100 yuan.C．About 30 yuan . D．About 60 yuan.
（ D ）53．Why dose Tom never go to Moon Cinema ?
A．The ticket is expensive . B．The seats are hard .
C．The screens aren’t big . D．It’s far from his home .
（ C ）54．Jack’s home is ___________kilometers farther from Movie Palace than Tom’s .
A．3 B．5 C．6 D．10
（ B ）55．Which of the following is NOT true ?
A．Tom thinks the service in Movie Palace is good .
B．Jean and Jack prefer Movie Palace to Moon Cinema.
C．Lucy likes Movie Palace because she can go shopping .
99新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
D．Movie Palace is in the middle of the city .
七、阅读回答问题
Staying with a friend or family member is a great way to save some money when you travel. But how can you
be a great guest(客人）?
Be clear about who is going with you.
Don't say, "I'd like to come for a visit" if you mean, you'd better say, "I'd like to visit with my husband and two kids."
Keep an eye on your things.
Don't make your friend's home like staying in a hotel. When you're not in your room, you should make it clean and
tidy as usual.
Watch you children.
Before traveling, talk to your kids about their manners(礼仪）. Let them know what they should do and should not do.
Don't wish your hostess(女主人）to do all the work.
She may not want you to buy things or give some help at dinner time, but it's important to help her do some
housework, like washing a few dishes or cleaning the table after dinner.
Bring or send a thank-you gift and follow up with a note.
The gift needn't to be expensive. If you don't have time to shop, take the family to dinner to show thanks. When you
get home, send a quick note to let them know how much you enjoy your stay.
56．What's the great way to save some money when you travel?
Staying with a friend or family member .
57．When do you need to talk to your kids about their manners?
Before travelin g .
58．What housework you'd better do after dinner?
Washing a few dishes or cleaning the tabl e .
59．How can you show thanks to you host family if you don't have time to shop?
Take the family to dinner to show thanks .
60．How many pieces of advice are given to be a great guest?
Fiv e .
Unit 4 Amazing Plants and Animals
Section B How are plants and animals connected with us?
100新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
一．重点词汇梳理
1.connect /kə'nekt/v.关联;连接 2. connected /kə'nektɪd/ adj.连接的; 相关的
3.without /wɪ'ðaʊt/ prep.没有;缺乏 4. imagine /ɪ'mædʒɪn/ v.想象;猜想
5.honey /hʌni/ n.蜂蜜;(爱称)亲爱的 6. disappointed /,dɪsə'pɔɪntɪd/ adj.失望的;沮丧的
7.connection /kə'nekʃn/n.联系;连接 8 .pollination /.pɒlə'neɪʃn/n.授粉
9.pollen /pɒlən/n.花粉 10. action /ækʃn/n.行动;行为
11.percent /pə(r) 'sent/ (= percent) n.百分 12. peony /'pi:əni/n.牡丹;芍药
13.planet /plænɪt/n.行星 14. store /stɔ:(r)/v.贮存;存储;n.百货商店；商店
15.honeycomb /hʌnɪkəʊm/n.蜂巢 16. communicate /kə'mju:nɪkert/v.交流;沟通
17.ecosystem/'i:kəusistəm/n.生态系统 18.protect/prə'tekt/v. 保护；防护
19.importance/ɪm'pɔ:tns/n. 重要性 20 . title /'taɪtl/n. 标题；题目；名称
21 . human /'hju:mən/n.人 adj.人的；人类的 22.ant/ænt/n. 蚂蚁
23 . happiness /'hæpinəs/n.幸福；快乐 24. disappoint /disə'pɔint/v. 使失望；使破灭
25 . mush room /'mʌʃru:m/n.蘑菇 26 . t on /'tʌn/n. 吨
27. role /rəul/n. 作 用 ； 职 能 ； 角 色 28. tiny /'taɪni/adj. 极小的；微小的
29 . pea /pi:/n. 豌豆 30.climate/'klaɪmət/n. 气候
31.lively /'laɪvli/adj.精力充沛的；生机勃勃的 32.ocean /'əuʃn/n. 大海；海洋
二．重点词汇变形
1.connect(v.)关联；链接→connected(adj.)连接的→connection(n.)联系
2.imagine(v.)想象→imagination(n.)想象力 →imaginary(adj.) 想象中的
3.disappointed(adj.)失望的，修饰人 → disappointin g(adj.)令人失望的，修饰物 →disappoint(v.)使失望
3.pollination(n.)授粉→pollinate(v.)授 粉 →pollen(n.)花粉
4.action(n.)行为→act(v.)行动 → activ e(adj.)活跃的；积极的→activity(n.)活动
101新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
5.communicate(v.)交流；沟通→communication(n.) 交 流
6.protect(v.)保护→protection(n.)保护 →protective(adj.) 防护的；保护的
7.importance(n.)重要性→important(adj.) 重要的
8.happiness(n.)开心；幸福→happy(adj.)幸福的；快乐的→unhappy(adj.)不快乐的
9.live(v.)居住；存在；生活(adj.)活的；现场直播的 →lively(adj.)活泼的，生机勃勃的 →alive(adj.)活着的；
10.beautiful(adj.)漂亮的 →beautifully(adv)漂亮地→beauty(n.)美丽
11.heavy(adj.)重 的 →heavily(adv.)很大程度上；沉重地；大量地
12.painting(n.)画→painter(n.)画 家 →paint(v.)画画；漆
13.culture(n.)文 化 → cultur al (adj.)文化的
14.nature(n.)自然 → n atural (adj.)自然的
三．重点短语通关
1. over 200 million years ago 两百多万年前 2.a symbol of hope and long life 希望和长寿的象
3.thousands of tourists 成千上万的游客 4 . in mid - October 在10月中旬
5 . take a walk 散步 6.b ring joy to their heart 给他们带来欢乐
7.go to the supermarket 去超市 8. one of the best examples 最好的例子之一
9. in fact 事实上；实际上 10.for this reason 出于这个原因
11.one of the most interesting animals 最有趣的动物 12.for example 例如
13 .in order to to d o sth .为了做某事 14.store honey 储存蜂蜜
15. play an important part in 在.. 中扮演重要角色；在….中发挥重要作用
16.think about 考虑；思考 17. be home to sb . 是…的家乡
18.bamboo baskets 竹篮子 19.because of 因 为
20.climate change 气候变化 21.blue whales 蓝鲸
22.the largest and heaviest animal on earth 地球上最大最重的动物
23.the Arctic Ocean 北冰洋 24 .live up to 达到；符合
25. last for over a year 持续超过一年
102新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
26 . create a lively and healthy ecosystem 创造 一 个充满活力和健康的生态系统
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
We Can't Live Without Bees
Imagine you go to the supermarket in your area, but there are almost no fruits, vegetables, honey, milk, eggs, or
chocolate. How would you feel? Disappointed? Angry? Sad? At this moment you realize people, plants, and animals
are all connected. We need each other to live, and bees are one of the best examples of this connection.
Bees are very hard-working animals, and their greatest work is pollination. On one trip, they often visit 50 to 100
flowers. As they fly from one flower to another, they take pollen with them. This
action helps plants grow, in fact, without their work, about 80 per cent of the plants
in the world cannot grow, For this reason, many scientists believe that bees are the
most important animals on this planet.
Bees are also one of the most interesting animals in the world.For example, they
work hard together to make their homes, In order to store honey, they create
honeycombs. Another interesting thing about bees is how they communicate. When a bee
finds new food, it uses a dance to tell the others where and how far away the food is.
Bees play an important part in the ecosystem of our planet.However, the number of
bees is dropping, and scientists are worried, They need our help, and there is a lot we can
do. Think about what you can do to protect one of the most amazing animals on earth.
【 考 点 1. 】 Imagine you go to the supermarket in your area,but there are almost no
fruits,vegetables,honey, milk, eggs,or chocolate.想象一下，你去你所在地区的超市，但几乎没有水果、 蔬菜、
蜂蜜、牛奶、鸡蛋和巧力。
【用法详解】imagine作动词，意为“想象”，其名词形式为imagination，意为“想象；想象力；创造力”，是可
数名词，其复数形式为imaginations。
相关搭配：① imagine后面跟名词、代词。
Eg:I can imagine the scene clearly in my mind.我仍然能很清晰地想象此番情景。
② imagine sb./sth.(to be) .. . 意为“想象某人/某事……”。
Eg:The boy imagined himself (to be) a pilot.那个男孩想象自己是一个飞行员。
③ imagine sb . /sth . as.. .意为“想象某人/某事……”。
Eg:She always imagines it as an easy thing.她总是设想这事轻而易举。
103新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
④ imagine (sb) doing sth .意为“想象(某人)做某事。”
Eg: I can't imagine singing in front of that many people.我不能想象自己在那么多人面前唱歌。
牛
刀小试
( C )1.I can’t imagine her such a person .
A. marry B.to marry C.marrying D.married
2. Imagine life without fire. 想象一下没有火的生活。(翻译)
3. Can you imagine the life on a lonely island? 你能想象在一座荒岛上的生活吗?
【考点2.】How would you feel ?Disappointed?Angry?Sad?你会感觉如何？失望？生气？还是难过？
【用法详解】disappointed作形容词，意为“感到失望的；沮丧的”主语通常是人。修饰事物时通常用
disappointing意为“令人失望的”。
相关搭配：①be disappointed with/in...对某人感到失望。
Eg:He was disappointed in his friends .他对他朋友感到失望。
②be disappointed at/about sth 对某事失望
Eg: She was disappointed at/about the result.她对这个结果很失望。
③be disappointed to do sth 做某事失望
Eg:I'm disappointed to hear the news.听到消息我很失望。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.The teacher was disappointed __ __ the students’ performance.
A. with B.to C.in D.about
（ C ）2.·I was disappointed to find that they had left already.
A. disappointing B. excited C.disappointed D.exciting
（ C ）3.He disappointed his brother will leave him alone for 3 days.
A. realize B. realizing C. to realize D. realized
【考点3.】At this moment you realize people,plants,and animals are all connected.在这个时刻，你就会意识
到，人类，植物，动物都是联系在一起的。
【用法详解】（1）realize作动词，意为“理解;领会;认识到；意识到”。
Eg:They didn't realize the danger they were in.他们没有意识到自己身处危险之中。
Eg:The moment I saw her, I realized something was wrong.我一看到她，就觉得不太对劲。
104新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
相关拓展realize还有“实现，将……变为现实”的意思，常与 dream 连用，表示“实现梦想”。
Eg:Finally he realized his dream of becoming an actor.最后他实现了当演员的愿望。
（2）connect作动词，意为“连接、联系”。
相关搭配：① connect with 表示“与……连接；与……联系”。
Eg:The two towns are connected with a railway.这两个城镇由铁路连接起来。
② connect to 表示“连接到；与……相连”。
Eg:Connect the Wi-Fi to the computer.把无线网连接到电脑上。
③ be connected with 表示“与……有关；与……有联系”。
Eg:He is connected with this accident.他与这起事故有关。
④ connect A to/with B 表示“（使）连接，联结”。
Eg:They connect the model to the ground.他们把模型连接到地面。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.The road_____the village to the town.
A.connects B.disconnects C. collects D.content
( C )2.Students should connect what they learned what they see around them .
A.to B.for C.with D.in
( A )3.Will you connect the Wi-Fi my phone ?
A.to B.for C.with D.in
4. This bridge connects HongKong and Macau .这座大桥连接着香港和澳门。（翻译）
5.The connections of people and nature is endlessness.（connect）
【考点4.】In fact,without their work,about 80 percent of the plants in the world cannot grow.事实上，没
有它们的辛劳，这个世界上百分之八十的植物都不能生长。
【用法详解】without作介词，意为“没有;缺乏。后接名词/ 代词/v-ing，表示“没有做某事;缺乏某物”。
Without doing sth 没有做某事。
Eg:She can't finish the work without your help.没有你的帮助，她无法完成工作。
相关搭配: without doubt 毫无疑问 without numbe r 无数；数不清
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. He walked into the room without .
A. knocking B knocks C. to knock D. knock
105新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ B ）2.You can't make such a great progress __ __ your teacher’s help.
A. with B.without C. from D. in
（ A ）3._____water, all living things would die.
A. Without B.With C. Under D. from
【考点5.】In order to store honey,they create honeycombs. 为了储存蜂蜜，它们建造了蜂巢。
【用法详解】in order to是固定搭配，意为“ 目的是 ; 为了 ”，强调目的，后接动词原形构成不定式结构在句子中
作目的状语，否定形式是在to前面加not，即in order not to。
Eg:We have to study hard in order to pass the exam.为了通过这次考试，我们必须努力学习。
Eg:In order to let the students hear him, he spoke loudly.为了让学生们听到他的话，他大声讲。
相关拓展：在表示目的时，in order to短语通常可以转换为in order that 引导的目的状语从句。
Eg:We ran quickly in order to catch the first bus.=We ran quickly in order that we could catch the first bus.
为了能赶上首班公交车，我们飞快地跑。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.She studies hard she can get good grades.
A. so that B. because C. because of D. in order to
（ D ）2.He stayed home ___finish his homework.
A. so that B. because C. because of D.in order to
（ A ）3.They left early __ _ they wouldn't miss the train.
A.in order that B. although C. because of D. in order to
【考点6.】Another interesting thing about bees is how they communicate,另一件有趣的事是关于蜜蜂和彼
此之间的交流。
【用法详解】communicate作动词，意为“交流;沟通;传达”。其名词形式为communication，常用复数形式表示
“通讯;交流”。
相关搭配:①communicate with 与……交流
Eg:Parents should communicate with their children.父母应该与他们的孩子沟通。
②communicate sth.to sb.把某事传达给某人
Eg:He communicated his plans to the team.他向团队传达了计划。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1. I like to communicate my friends WeChat.
106新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.with; in B. with;on C.to; on D./; in
2.You need to have a communica t io n with your team members.(communicate)
3.We should learn how to better communicate with(与·…..交流) people from different cultures.
【考点6.】Bees play an important part in the ecosystem of our planet.蜜蜂在地球的生态系统中起到重要
作用。
【用法详解】play a part in动词短语，表示“参与某活动或对某事有影响；起重要作用”。
相关搭配： play a part in doing sth =play a role in doing sth 在做某事中扮演重要角色
Eg:Everyone can play a part in protecting the environment.每个人都能参与环保。
( A )1.Teachers play an important part students' growth.
A. in B.to C.on D.with
( C )2.How can I play a role in this problem?
A. To solve B.solving C.solving D. solves
( B )3.Social media_____a big part in our daily lives.
A. takes B.plays C.does D.does
【考点7.】However,the number of bees is dropping,and scientists are worried.然而，蜜蜂的数量正在减少，
科学家们都很担忧。
【用法详解】①the number of 意为“.....的数量”后面接可数名词复数，作主语时谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。
Eg:The number of the little kids in this picture is 18.图片里小朋友的数量是
18。
② a number of..... . 意为“一些......许多”，后面接可数名词复数，作主语时谓
语动词用复数形式。
Eg:We need to solve a number of problems.我们需要解决很多问题。
牛
刀小试
( C )1.--A number of people learning English nowadays.
--Yes. The number of people who are learning English increasing.
A.is; is B.are; are C.are; is D.is; are
( A )2. The number of the students in our school 600，but a number of students living in
the school.
A. is, like B. is, likes C.are, like D. are, likes
( C )3.-- Are there __ _ students in your school? -- Yes, the students is about 2000.
107新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.a number of; a number of B.the number of; the number
C. a number of; the number of D.the number of; a number of
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( D )1. Xi’an is one of ______ capital ______ in China.
A. older; city B. the older; city C. oldest; cities D. the oldest; cities
( B )2. One of the most popular ______of _____in the world is Chinese food.
A. kind; food B. kinds; food C. kind; foods D. kinds; foods
( D )3. Go down this street until you ______the third traffic lights.
A. will reach B. get C. arrive D. reach
( A )4. Jim is funnier than ______ in his class.
A. any other boy B. any boy C. any other boys D. all the boys
( C )5. Winter is the ______ season of the year in China.
A. warmest B. longest C. coldest D. heaviest
( A )6. When did you _____ Beijing?
A. get to B. come C. go D. reach to
( D )7. The box is ______ of all.
A. heaviest B. the bigest C. the heavier D. the biggest
( D )8. I think Wang YiBo is one of the ______ movie stars in China.
A. popular B. popularest C. more popular D. most popular
( A )9. ---We can't live ______ air or water. ---I think so.
A. without B. with C. to D. out
( B )10. Math ______ one of the _____ subjects in middle schools.
A. are; important B. is; most important
C. is; more important D. are; much important
( A )11. She looks ______ younger than she is.
A. even B. very C. a bit of D. a lot of
( D )12. If you do that, you’ll feel ______ soon.
A. more healthy B. more healthier C. much healthy D. much healthier
( D )13. You are getting fatter and fatter. You should eat ______ food and take ______ exercise.
108新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. less; less B. more; more C. more; less D. less; more
( B )14. John is ______ of the twins.
A. taller B. the taller C. the tallest D. high
( D )15. The sky grew _______.
A. dark and dark B. darker and dark C. dark and darker D. darker and darker
( B )16. ---Could you help me, please? ---______.
A. Yes, I can B. Certainly C. No, I can't D. Yes, I can't
( D )17. We’ll try to do ______ work with ______ time than before.
A. much; much B. little; little C. less; more D. more; less
( A )18. China has the ______ population（人口数）in the world.
A. largest B. bigger C. most D. fewest
( C )19. Of all the students, Li Ming is _______ to Mr. Wang.
A. close B. closer C. the closest D. the most closest
( B )20. This is the ______ largest city in Japan.
A. three B. third C. thirds D. thirdest
二、完型填空
My parents took me to Japan when I was little .I lived there for five years. 21 I came back, my Japanese was very
good. “Can I do something useful with my Japanese?” I asked myself.
Then , one day last spring , I got a good opportunity(机会).
Everyone was afraid of SARS, so I stayed at home with 22 to do.
My father brought me a Japanese book. “Why don’t you translate(翻译)it into Chinese? It will be better than 23
computer games all day.”
I promised (许诺)to do 2000 words each day. But 24 I found it was hard to keep the promise.
One day in May, the weather was beautiful .But I couldn’t go out .Those 2000 words were still 25 me.
After translating only three pages, I already lost interest in the book.
I looked at it for a long time. But I couldn’t make myself turn the pages. How I 26 I could just go outside and play
football with my friends!
I counted the words again and again .I just wanted to give up.
I felt as if two people were fighting 27 my mind. One said, “Don’t give up! Keep working hard, and you’ll do
well!” But then the other one said, “Go and play! It will be more 28 than translating. Do your work tomorrow. ”
I stood up and would 29 the computer.
109新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
But then I remembered 30 my parents had told me: “Whatever you do, don’t stop halfway. ” So I sat down and
went on with it.
( D )21. A. Because B. Until C. Since D. When
( A )22. A. nothing B. something C. everything D. anything
( B )23. A. be played B. playing C. played D. plays
( C )24. A. just then B. right now C. soon D. suddenly
( D )25. A. talking to B. looking at C. smiling at D. waiting for
( C )26. A. thought B. felt C. wished D. decided
( A )27. A. in B. with C. about D. for
( A )28. A. fun B. important C. useful D. dangerous
( B )29. A. turn on B. turn off C. open D. close
( D )30. A. how B. where C. which D. what
三、 阅读理解（每小题2分，共30分）
A
Have you ever been ill? When you are ill, you must be unhappy because your body becomes hot, and there are pains
all over your body . You don’t want to work, you stay in bed, feeling very sad.
What makes us ill? It is germs(细菌).Germs are everywhere. They are very small and you can’t find them with your
eyes, but you can see them with a microscope. They are very small and there could be hundreds of them on a very
small thing.
Germs are always found in dirty water. Water under the microscope, we look at dirty water under the microscope, we
shall see them in it .So your father and mother will not let you drink dirty water.
Germs aren’t found only in water. They are found in air and dust .If you cut your finger, if some of the dust from the
floor goes into the cut (割开处), some of the germs would go into your finger. Your finger would become big and red,
and you will have much pain in it .Sometimes the germs would go into all of your body, and you would have pain
everywhere.
( D )31. Which of the following is true?
A. If things are very small, they are germs. B. If things can’t be seen, they must be germs.
C. Germs are only in dirty water. D. Germs are everywhere around us.
( A )32. What is a microscope used for?
A. Making very small things look much bigger.
B. Making very big things look much smaller.
110新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
C. Helping you read some newspapers.
D. Helping you if you can’t see things clearly.
( C )33. Why don’t your parents let you drink dirty water?
A. You haven’t looked at it carefully. B. Water can’t be drunk in this way.
C. There must be lots of germs in it. D. Water will make you ill.
( D )34. Which of the following is not true?
A. Germs can be found both in water and in the air.
B. Germs can go into your finger if it is cut.
C. If your temperature is not OK, there must be germs in your body.
D. If your finger isn’t cut, there aren’t any germs on it.
( A )35. What’s the main idea of the passage?
A. Germs may make us ill. B. Germs are in dirty water.
C. Don’t drink dirty water. D. Take care of your fingers
B
Mr. Read works in a hospital. He's a good doctor but he often forgets thing. People know him well and don't mind
it.
One morning he looked over an old woman and found something was wrong with her eyes. He began to do an
operation. It took him three hours to finish it. The old woman could see again and thanked him very much. After that
he had a look at his watch and found it was half past twelve. He felt hungry and wanted to buy some food for himself.
When he reached the lift, he remembered he didn't wash his hands. He had to return to his office. He took off his
coat and put it on the back of the chair. After that he left. However in the restaurant, he realized he wasn't wearing his
coat. All his money was in one of his pockets. He got up and went back to the hospital. The lift was just on the first
floor. He ran to it but it was going to close. He put his head into it, and the doors opened. A man in the lift called out,
“Oh, dear, sir! Why didn't you hold the doors open with your hands? It's too dangerous to do so with your head!”
“I think my hands are more important than my head, I have to do operation not with my head, but with my hands!”
( B )36. People know ______, so they don't mind it.
A. Mr. Read is a doctor B. Mr. Read isn't careful
C. Mr. Read works in the hospital D. Mr. Read often does operations
( C )37. The operation began at ______ that morning.
A. half past eight B. nine C. half past nine D. ten
( A )38. Mr. Read returned to his office because _______.
111新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. he forgot to wash his hands B. it was cold and he had to put on his coat
C. he was too tired to reach the restaurant D. he had to borrow some money
( C )39. Mr. Read left the restaurant because ______.
A. he ate much there B. he couldn't find his friend
C. he had no money with him D. it was closed
( D )40. Mr. Read put his head into the lift because _______.
A. he wanted to know who was in it B. he wanted to stop it rising
C. his head was much harder than his hands D. he was afraid it could hurt his hands
C
In England, “Bank Holidays” are Easter Monday, May Day, the Spring Bank Holiday (the last Monday in May), the
Summer Bank Holiday (the last Monday in August). Christmas Day, Boxing Day and New Year’s Day. During the
Bank Holiday, all the banks are closed.
The August Bank Holiday is perhaps the most popular one of the year, partly because it comes at a time when
children are not at school. Very many people try to make this a long weekend, and go away to the seaside of the
country. The result is that anyone who can manage to take a holiday at another day would be well advised to do so, for
the roads get crowded with traffic.
In recent years, there has been much talk of creating another Bank Holiday, mid-way between August and Christmas,
but nothing has yet been done. October would be a good month because the weather is often pleasant then. Many
people would welcome an extra(额外的) bank Holiday or two because England has fewer than most European
countries.
根据短文内容选择正确答案：
( B )41. During Bank Holiday, people in England ________.
A. usually stay at home and spend the holidays with their family
B. don’t have to go to work and usually spend the holidays in the country
C. usually go shopping with their family members
D. try to do more office work in the day time
( C )42. The August Bank Holiday _________
A. is also called Boxing Day. B. is a holiday only for children
C. falls on the last Monday in August D. is on the last day of August
( C )43. People like the August Bank Holiday because __________
A. it is a long holiday B. it is in summer
112新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
C. the children don’t go to school D. the weather is the best
( D )44. The vest time to have another Bank Holiday is ______
A. at the beginning of the year B. at the end of the year
C. in the middle of the year D. between August and Christmas
( A )45. Form the passage we know that English people hope to ______
A. have more Bank Holidays B. see the banks open every day
C. spend their holidays in Europe D. find jobs in banks
四、任务型阅读
"Which meal do we all need most, breakfast, lunch or dinner?" Miss Baker asks. Boys and girls wave their hands in
the air. They know the answer. "What do you think, Jim?" Miss Baker asks. "Dinner, " Jim answers. "Dinner is the
biggest meal of the day," says Miss Baker. "But I don't think we need it most." Tom puts up his hands. " Do we need
lunch most?" "No," says Miss Baker. "We need breakfast most." "Why is this so?" "From night to morning is a long
time to go without food," says Ann. "That's right," says Miss Baker. "We need food every morning. What may happen
to us if we have no breakfast?" The students have many answers to give. “We may feel hungry." "We may not feel like
working." "We may feel sick." "Yes, you are right," says Miss Baker. "Now let's talk about what makes a good
breakfast. Give me your answers. I will write them on the blackboard.
根据短文回答问题：
46. Which meal do we all need most, breakfast, lunch or dinner?
breakfas t
47. What may happen to us if we have no breakfast?
__“We may feel hungry." "We may not feel like working." "We may feel sick."
48. 翻译划线句子。
_ 我认为我们不需要它。 _____________________________________________
49. How many people are in the family?（ D ）
A.6 B.5 C.3 D.4
50. Why are they talking about the meals?（ C ）
A. They want to buy some food. B. They have no food to eat.
C. They want to eat breakfast well. D. We don’t know
五、短文填空。
My mother told me a good friend is like a mirror. I’m 1 quiete r (quiet) and more serious than most kids. That’s
why I like reading books and I study harder 2 in class. My best friend Yuan Li is quiet too, 3 so we enjoy
113新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
studying together. I’m shy so it’s not easy for me 4 to mak e (make) friends. But I think friends are like books —
you don’t need a lot of 5 them (they) as long as they’re good.
I don’t 6 really (real) care if my friends are the same as me or different. My favorite 7 sayin g (say) is, ＂A true
friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.＂ My best friend Carol is kind and very funny. We 8 have
known (know) each other since we were very little. In fact, she’s funnier than anyone I know. I 9 brok e (break)
my arm last year and she made me laugh and feel better. We can talk about and share everything. I know she 1 0 care s
(care) about me because she’s always there to listen.
六、书面表达。
题目:某中学生英文杂志社正在举办征文比赛，征文主题是介绍你家乡最令你向往或心旷神怡的一处地方。请你
根据以下内容提示写一篇短文向该杂志社投稿。内容提示:
1.点明该地方的名称;
2.说明你为什么喜欢该地方;
3.具体介绍该地方。
My favorite place in my hometown is the city library. Let me tell you something about it.
For me, it's the quietest and the most comfortable place. It's also the best place to get new information. It has more
books than any other library in my city.
It has three floors. On the first floor there's a Children's Reading Room. It has the most wonderful picture books. On
the second floor is the Newspaper and Magazine Reading Room. You can read many different kinds of newspapers
and magazines, such as China Daily, The New York Times and so on. The most useful newspaper for my English
learning is China Daily in English. The books on the third floor are mainly about history, literature and story. It is the
most crowded place for readers on weekends.
In a word, the city library is so far the best place for me to go to in my free time, because I can really enjoy myself
there.
114新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 5 What a Delicious Meal !
Section A How do we make food ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. peppe r /'pepə(r)/n. 粉；辣椒
2. mi x /miks/v. 混合；融合；调配n. 混合；混 放；混合料
3. bak e /beɪk/v. 烘培 4. ove n /'ʌvn/n. 烤箱；烤炉
5. flou r /'flauə(r)/n. 面粉 6. boi l /boil/v. 煮沸； 烧开n. 沸腾；沸点
7. butte r /'bʌtə(r)/n.黄油 8. chees e /tfi:z/n.奶酪；干酪
9. t ablespoo n /'teɪblspu:n/n. 一 汤匙(的量);餐 匙；汤匙
10. mas h /mæʃ/v. 捣烂；捣碎 11. bow l /bəul/n. 碗 ； 钵 ； 盆
12. hea t /hi:t/v. 加热；变热 n 热；温度；炎热 天气
13. oi l /ɔɪl/n.食用油；石油；燃油 14. pa n /pæn/n.平底锅；烤盘
115新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
15. simple /'sɪmpl/adj.简单的；朴素的 16. ingredien t /in'gri:diənt/n.材料；食材
17. instructio n /in'strʌkfn/n.(pl.) 用法说明；操作指 南
18. mes s /mes/n.脏乱；凌乱
19 . pretty /'priti/adj. 漂亮的；美观的 adv. 相当； 十分；非常
20. Christma s /'krisməs/n.圣诞节 21. pancake /'pænkeɪk/n. 烙饼；薄饼
22. dream /dri:m/n. 梦想；梦v.(dreamt/dremt/dreamed)做梦；梦见；梦想
23. university /ju:ni'v3:səti/n.(综合性)大学；高等 学府
二．重点词汇变形
1.mix(n.&v.)混合；混合料→ mixtur e (n.)混合物
2.bake(v.)烘焙→ bake r (n.)烘 焙 师 → baker y (n.)面包店
3.heat(n.&v.)加热；温度→ heate r (n.) 加热器
4.oil(n.)食用油；石油→ oil y (adj.) 含油的；油污的
5.pan (n.)平底锅→ pancak e (n.) 煎饼
6.simple(adj.)简单的→ simpl y (adv.) 仅仅；不过，只是
7.instruction (n.)说明书；操作指南→ instruc t (v.) 指导
8.steamed(adj.)蒸汽的→ steam (v.)蒸 (n.)蒸汽
9.mess (n.)脏乱；凌乱→ mess y (adj.) 混乱的
10.dream(n.&v.)梦想；梦→ dreame r (n.) 梦 想 家 → daydream (n.) 白日梦
三．重点短语通关
1. add pepper to the soup 把辣椒加进汤里 2. cut up he potatoes 把土豆切碎
3. mix the vegetables 混合蔬菜 4. bake the cake in the oven 在烤箱里烤蛋糕
5. pour the milk into the flour 把牛奶倒进面粉里 6 . boil the potatoes 把土豆煮沸
7. cut potatoes into pieces 把土豆切块 8. one tablespoon of butter 一茶匙黄油
9. half a cup of milk 半杯牛奶 10. mash the potatoes 把土豆捣烂
116新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
11.make a banana milk shake 制作香蕉奶昔 12.peel the bananas 给香蕉剥皮
13. Chinese dish 中国菜 14. stir-fried eggs and tomatoes 番茄炒鸡蛋
15 .do with 处理 16. mix the eggs in a bowl 在碗里混合鸡蛋
17. steamed fish 清蒸鱼 18. beef with black pepper 黑胡椒牛肉
19. hot and sour soup 酸辣汤 20. go boating 去划船
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Peter: Hey Teng Fei,can you teach me how to cook a popular Chinese dish?
Teng Fei: Sure. How about stir-fried eggs and tomatoes?
Peter:Great idea. How do we make it?
Teng Fei: We need eggs, tomatoes, salt, and sugar .
Peter:OK. How many tomatoes and eggs do
we need?
Teng Fei: Four tomatoes and thre e egg s.
Peter: OK. What should we do with the tomatoes and eggs?
Teng Fei: First, cut the tomatoes into small pieces. Next, mix the eggs in a
bowl.
Pter: Like this?
Teng Fei: Perfect. Then, heat some oil in a pan and add the egg s to it. Stir-fry for one minute.Then take
the eggs out of the pan.
Peter: Got it.
Teng Fei: Next, cook the tomatoes in the pan until they're soft. Then, add some salt and sugar.
Peter:What an amazing smell! What's next?
Teng Fei: Finally, put the eggs back into the pan and mix them with the tomatoes.
Peter: Wow, it looks so good! How simple!
【考点1.】What should we do with the tomatoes and eggs?我们应该如何处理番茄和鸡蛋？
【用法详解】do with表示“处理、处置”，常与what连用，侧重于处理事情的对象。
Eg:I don ’t know what they do with the problem.我不知道他们如何处理这个问题。
相关拓展：deal with 表示“处理、处置” ，常与how 连用，侧重于处理事情的
方式、方法。
117新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:I don’t know how to deal with this math problem.我不知道他们如何解决这个数学题。deal with 还意为"应付，
涉及，论及"。
Eg:He’ s good at dealing with pressure. 他善于应付压力。
Eg:His songs often deal with the subject of youth.他的歌经常涉及青春这一主题。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）2. My mother is so busy that she has a lot of problems to
A. deal with B.come up with C.catch up with D.agree with
（ C ）3.The scientists are trying to think of a better way to--- air pollution.
A.turn on B.care for C.deal with
（ B ）4. - How should the students their problems?- By regarding problems as challenges.
A. do with B.deal with C. to deal with
（ B ）5.-What’s wrong with you?-I don 't know ______ stress from work and family.
A. how to do with B. how to deal withC. what to deal with D.what to do
【考点2.】First,cut the tomatoes into small piece.
【用法详解】①cut into 是“动词+副词”短语。意为“把...切成...”注意宾语是代词时，代词应放在cut和into
中间。
cut sth in/into sth将......切成......
Eg:Please cut the watermelon into slices.请把西瓜切块。
相关搭配： cut in 插嘴；超车；插入 cut up 切碎；抨击
cut off 切断，中断，隔绝，使死亡，剥夺继承权
cut down 削减；砍倒；杀死；删节；胜过
cut out 切断；删去；停止；关掉
②First意为“首先；第一”表示事情的顺序。表示顺序的词语可以和祈使句
一起用来表达做某件事的先后顺序或过程，使叙述更加有条理。表示顺序的词语有 first( 首先 ) 、 next( 接下来 ) 、
then( 然后 ) 、 after that( 在那之后 ) 、 firstly( 第一 ) 、 secondly( 第二 ) 、 thirdly( 第三 ) 、 finally ( 最后 ) 等。
Eg;First,open the fridge. 首先，打开冰箱。
Next ,put the elephant into it. 接下来，把大象放进去。
Then,close the fridge. 然后，关上冰箱门。
Finally,you will know the steps of put the elephant into the
118新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
fridge.最后，你就知道把大象放进冰箱的步骤了。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.The storm the electricity.
A.cut down B.cut off C.cut in D.cut out
（ A ）2.We should on junk food.
A.cut down B.cut off C.cut in D.cut out
（ C ）3.Don't when others are talking!
A.cut down B.cut off C.cut in D.cut out
（ D ）4.She the bad news from the newspaper.
A.cut down B.cut off C.cut in D.cut out
【考点3.】Next，mix the eggs in a bowl .接下来在一个碗里搅匀鸡蛋。
【用法详解】mix动词，意为“(使)混合:融合”，注意宾语是代词时，代词必须放在词组中间。
相关搭配：mix up 把......混合在一起、搅拌、搅匀。
Eg:Put the milk and tea in a cup and mix them up together,you will get a cup of milk tea.把牛
奶和茶放进杯子里搅匀，你就会得到一杯奶茶。
mix...up 使......混淆
Eg:I am always mixing her up with her twin sister.我总是分辨不出她和她的双胞胎姐姐。
mix...into/to 把......混合进....里，指把两种不同类的事物混合在一起
Eg:Mix an egg into batter.在面糊中加进一个鸡蛋。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.Put the eggs in the bowl and_____, please.
A. mix them up B. mix it up C.mix up them D.mix up it
（ B ）2.She____the flour and eggs to make dough.
A.cut B.mixed C.touched D.washed
【考点4.】Then take the eggs out of the pan .然后把鸡蛋从锅里倒出来。
【用法详解】take out是“动词+副词”短语,意为“取出；拿出；发泄；击败”注意宾语是代词时，代词应放在中
间。
Eg:I left my coat in your bedroom,please take it out for me .我的外套忘在你房
间了，请帮我带出来。
119新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
相关搭配：take in 充分理解，吸收；欣赏；收留
take on 开始雇用；开始具有或呈现（某种品质、面貌等）；承担责任
take up 拿起；开始；从事；吸收；接纳；占去；继续做
take over 接收，接管，接任
take down 拆除；取下；记下 take off 起飞；脱下；迅速走红
take away (from…) (从…)拿走 take after 长得像
take action 采取行动
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1. -Many wild animals are in great danger. -Let's _ __to save them.
A. take off B. take down C.take action D.take after
（ C ） 2. There will be a brand new road through the small village, so we need to ___those old buildings.
A. take up B.take after C.take down D. take in
（ B ） 3. Please ___your English dictionary to look up this word.
A. take off B. take out C. take in D.take to
（ A ）4.Take __ _your coat. It's time _ go to bed.
A. off; to B, off; for C. on; to D. on;for
（ B ）5. If you feel hot, you can _____your coat.
A. take out B. take off C. put on D. put off
【考点5.】Sue got into her dream university!sue进入了她梦想中的大学!
【用法详解】①dream可作名词，意为“梦想；梦”,是可数名词。
Eg:His dream is to be an singer .他的梦想是成为一个歌手。
②dream还可以作动词，意为“做梦；梦见；梦想”。
Eg:Many people dream of becoming famous.很多人梦想成名。
相关搭配：① dream about / of sb / sth 梦到某人/某物 ② dream about / of doing sth 梦想做某事
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Last night, I______about flying in the sky.
A.dream B.dreamt C.dreams D.dreaming
（ B ）2.She dreams______becoming a scientist someday.
A.of B.with C.at D.on
（ D ）3.His greatest______is to travel around the world.
120新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. Mixture B.hope C.heat D.dream
五．单元重点语法讲练
感叹句
一、概念:用来表示喜悦、惊讶、愤怒、欣赏等强烈情绪或情感的句子.
一般由what 和how引导感叹句。
（1）"What"感叹句
① What +a/an+ 形容词十可数名词单数 +( 主语 + 谓语 ) !
Eg:What a beautiful girl she is!多么漂亮的女孩呀！
What an honest boy! 多么诚实的男孩呀！
② What+ 形容词 + 可数名词复数 +( 主语 + 谓语 ) !
Eg:What brave students!同学们好勇敢啊！
What friendly villagers they are!村民们多么友好啊！
③ What+ 形容词 + 不可数名词 +( 主语 + 谓语 ) !
Eg:What cool weather it is! 天气好冷哦！
What good advice!多好的建议呀！
（2）"How"感叹句--
① How+ 形容词或副词十主 语 + 谓语 !
Eg:How tall the boy is!那个男孩好高呀！
How hard YiBo works!一博工作多么努力啊！
② How+ 形容词 +a/an+ 单数可数名词 ( 主语 + 谓语 ) !
Eg:How lovely a girl she is!她是一个多么可爱的女孩啊！
③ How+ 主语 + 谓语 !
Eg:How time flies!光阴荏苒，时光飞逝！
感叹句用"what"还是"how'
小妙招：
①看题目定位横线后第二个单词
②判断其是否为名词，是名词选 what(复数，不可数)
what a（单数，形容词辅音）
what an（单数，形容词元音）
不是名词选 how
不会判断是不是名词？
121新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
记住除以下这些之外的都是名词--（-the,that,this,these,those,a,an,人称代词物主代词表格，人名，地名）
不会判断可不可数？
记住这些常见不可数名词: news新闻 /advice建议 /meat肉/air空气/information信息/weather天气/ homework
作业/housework家务/progress进步/fun乐趣
牛
刀小试
( A )1.-All of my classmates have passed the PE test. - _ exciting the news is!
A.How B.What C.What an D. How an
( B )2. important the Internet is in our life!
A. What an B.How C.What D. What a
( D )3.___great fun it is to gather with close friends, chatting and laughing!
A.How a B. What a C. How D. What
( C )4. beautifully little Simon dances in front of the camera!
A. What B. What a C. How D. How a
( D )5. special class we had today! We learned about kung fu.
A. How B.What C.How a D.What a
( A )6.- _ hot weather it is! Why not have a cold drink? - Sounds good! Let's go.
A.What B. What a C.How D. How a
( A )7. important information!
A. What B. What a C.How D. How a
( C )9.Wow, _ _ amazing vase! The artist must have spent a lot of time on it.
A. what B. what a C.what an D. how
( B ) 10. The self-diving plane proves to be useful in many ways. smart invention it is!
A. What B. What a C.What an D.How
( A )11. - Do you know that our team won the first prize in the basketball games? -Really?
good news!
A. What B. What a C.How D. How a
( B )12.-We will have a 2.5-day weekend soon. _ exciting news! We can hang out on Friday
afternoons.
A.How B. What C.How an D. What an
( A )13. wonderful the music is! What's its name? - Victory.
122新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. How B. How a C.What D.What a
( D )14. _ _ smart the driver less car is! I really want to have one.
A.What B. What a C. What an D.How
( D )15. exciting speech our headmaster gave just now!一Yeah, it was really an inspiration to
us all.
A. How B.What C. How an D. What an
( A )16." useful advice you've offered us! Thank you so much!" Tina said to me excitedly.
A. What B. What a C.What an D.How
( A )17. amazing it is to see so many various Rabbit lanterns during the festival!
A. How B. What C. What a D.What an
( D )18. - The police advise us not to transfer money to a stranger without telling our family.
-- important advice they gave us!
A. How B.What an C. How a D.What
( B )19.____ we had making preparations for the party last night!
A. What a great fun B. What great funC.How a great fun D.How great fun
( C )20.____ honest boy Tom is! He found a bag full of cash and immediately returned it.
A. What B. What a C. What an D.How
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( D )1．—Remember ________ the classroom after school. —OK. I ________.
A．cleaning; do B．to clean; do C．cleaning; will D．to clean; will
( A )2．—What do you think of the movie Fang Hua?
—It is moving and it ________ my grandma ________ the life in the countryside.
A．reminds; of B．lets; down C．turns; on D．wakes; up
( D )3．—Hi, John. You look unhappy. What happened?
—I made a lot of careless _______ in the English test. I’m so worried now.
A．machines B．activities C．pollution D．mistakes
( C )4．Please add a tomato ______the sandwich.
A．on B．in C．to D．at
( B )5．─ _________ milk do we need？─ One bottle.
A．How many B．How much C．How often D．How long
123新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )6．-Mom, I want to make fruit salad. _____________ honey do I need?-Three spoons.
A．How much B．How many spoon of C．How much of D．How many
( A )7．-The light is on. When you leave, please _____________ . -OK,I won't forget _____________ it.
A．turn it off;to do B．turn off it;doing C．turn on it; to do D．turn it on; doing
( D )8．-Let's make fruit salad. - _____________ .
A．No,I'm not B．Thank you C．That's all right D．That's a good idea
( B )9．-We don't have classes this afternoon. Let's go swimming. - _____________ . By bike or by bus?
A．Well,don't worry B．OK ,good idea C．Yes, that's true D．Sorry,I can't
( A )10．This photo often makes me ______ of my teachers in the primary school.
A．think B．to think C．thinks D．thinking
( B )11．________ away from the lake, boys. It is deep.
A．Stays B．Stay C．Staying D．To stay
( C )12．—What gift did you give your mum on her birthday?
—A card. I didn't buy it. ______ I made it by myself.
A．Suddenly B．Exactly C．Instead D．Finally
( D )13．Please ________ the CD player and ________ the CDs.
A．turn off, put up B．turn on, put in C．switch on, plug in D．switch off, put away
( B )14．—I'd like to know if Ted ________ back in a week.—I'll call you when he ________ back.
A．will come; will come B．will come; comes C．comes; will come D．comes; comes
( C )15．—Well, ________? —Yes. There's nothing more we can do. We can go home now.
A．how do you like it so far B．what about you C．that's it D．are you joking
( C )16．Don’t ________ sugar to Mrs. Green’s tea because she dislikes anything sweet.
A．dig B．pull C．add D．mix
( C )17．—Will there be less pollution on the earth?—________.
A．Yes, there is B．No, there isn't C．I hope so D．Me too
( A )18．He likes eating ________, so he has a sweet tooth.
A．sugar B．salt C．pizza D．pie
( A )19．It’s ________ in China to eat zongzi during the Dragon Boat Festival.
A．traditional B．impossible C．peaceful D．serious
( A )20．________ to smile at your life when you are in trouble.
A．Try B．To try C．Trying D．Tried
二、 用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
124新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
1.Read these instruction s (instruct)carefully before you use the machine.
2.Last Saturday,we went boatin g (boat)on the river and had a fantastic time.
3.Many universitie s (university)have clubs for students to join and make new friends.
4.My mom likes potatoes for mashe d potatoes.(mash)
5 . When we are heatin g the soup,we can feel the hea t from the pot.(heat)
三 、从方框中选择合适的单词并用其适当形式填空
boil pretty steam simple bake
1.This is the mos t simpl e way of all to solve the problem.
2.My mother bake d a delicious cake for the party this morning.
3.Would you like to have steame d fish or fried fish for lunch?
4.My mother is much prettie r than any other woman in my heart,and I love her so
much.
5.Wait a moment,please.I am boilin g water,and then you can drink some boile d water.
四 、根据语境，用适当的虚词盲填
1.Did your brother get int o his dream university?
2.She carefully poured the hot tea int o the cup.
3.First,put two tablespoons o f oil into a big bowl.
4.Jim,don't mix any cream t o the salad.I don't like that.
5.Look at your room!Paper is everywhere,and clothes are on the floor.What a mess!
五、 根据汉语意思补全句子
1. 你能告诉我如何处理这台旧机器吗?
Can you tell me what t o d o wit h this old machine?
2. 他们把一些香蕉、苹果和草莓切碎了做水果沙拉。
They pu t u p some bananas,apples,and strawberries to make a fruit salad.
3. 读完这本书后，我把它放回书架上。
After reading this book,I pu t i t awa y on the shelf.
4. 老师把西瓜切成块和学生们分享。
The teachers cu t the watermelon int o piec e to share with the students.
5 . 当我还是个孩子时，我梦想成为一名科学家。
I dreamt of a scientist when I was a child.
六、按要求完成下列句子
125新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
1.The flowers in the garden are very pretty. (改为感叹句)
How beautiful the flowers in the garden are!
2.How delicious the pancakes are!(改为同义句)
What delicious pancakes they are!
3.The smell of the baked bread is quite amazing.(改为感叹句)
How a mazing the smell of the baked bread is!
4.What a sweet poem!(改为同义句)
How sweet the poem is!
5.They had a wonderful time in the park last Sunday.(改为感叹句)
What wonderful time they had in the park last Sunday.!
七、完型填空
Do you know how to make spaghetti with creamy mushroom sauce and cook rice with a machine? Now let's
learn how to make 1 .
※How to make spaghetti with creamy mushroom sauce?
Boil a pot of water and cook the spaghetti in it 2 20 minutes and 3 the onion. Heat 4 oil(油)in a
pan and cook the onion and garlic for three minutes. 5 the mushrooms and cook for one minute.
Add the wine,cream and vegetable soup. Cook them for 10 minutes. 6 an egg,and add a little water and pour it
7 into the pan, 8 for half a minute.
Add the beans and tomatoes and stir for two minutes on a low heat,put the spaghetti on the plates and 9 the
sauce over the top.
※How to cook rice with a machine?
First， 1 0 the lid and put water,salt,and rice in the pot. Then put the cover on the pot and close the lid. 11
,press the button for “white” or “brown”,and then press the “start” button. Cook the rice for about 30 minutes. You will
12 a beeping sound when it's finished,but you should wait about five minutes before 13 .Finally， 1 4 the pot.
Bring it to the table and enjoy your 15 .
（ B ）1．A．it B．them C．some D．all
（ C ）2．A．during B．in C．for D．on
（ C ）3．A．cut down B．cut off C．cut up D．cut to
（ B ）4．A．a few B．a little C．few D．little
（ A ）5．A．Add B．Put C．Cut D．Take
（ D ）6．A．Peel B．Pour C．Shake D．Beat(敲打)
126新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ B ）7．A．slow B．slowly C．slower D．more slowly
（ C ）8．A．mix to B．mix of C．mix up D．mixed up
（ B ）9．A．put B．pour C．peel D．pot
（ C ）10．A．close B．put C．open D．give
（ C ）11．A．First B．At first C．Next D．At the end
（ C ）12．A．listen B．see C．hear D．watch
（ D ）13．A．to eat B．eats C．ate D．eating
（ B ）14．A．find out B．take out C．turn on D．look at
（ C ）15．A．supper B．noodles C．meal D．salad
八、阅读单选
A
The most famous food in the Republic of Korea is kimchi(泡菜).It is the food they eat every day. Also，there are
about 190 kinds of kimchi. There are different kinds of kimchi for different seasons of the year. For example，in
spring，watery kimchi，which is called mooli kimchi，and Chinese cabbage are popular. In summer，young radish(萝
卜)kimchi which is called chonggak kimchi and cucumber(黄瓜)kimchi are common.
The Republic of Korea is a small country. There are not enough fields to grow vegetables. In winter，it often
snows and it is very cold. In the old days，people there found pepper was very good for them. They also found salty
water could help them keep cabbage longer，so they mixed pepper，salt and cabbage together. They named it kimchi.
Today，lots of things are added to kimchi，such as fish，lettuce，pears，apples and other ingredients. Some
scientists say kimchi is very good for health，but others don't agree. What do you think of it？
（ A ）1．What do people in the Republic of Korea make in spring？
A．Mooli kimchi. B．Chonggak kimchi.
C．Cucumber kimchi. D．Fruit kimchi.
（ C ）2．Why did people in the Republic of Korea make kimchi in the old days？
A．Because people there didn't grow vegetables. B．Because there was too much pepper.
C．Because there were not enough vegetables. D．Because eating kimchi made them warm.
（ D ）3．What's the second paragraph(段)mainly about？
A．Kimchi's ingredients. B．Different kinds of kimchi.
C．People in the Republic of Korea and kimchi. D．The history of kimchi.
（ B ）4．_________ is not mentioned(被提到)about the ingredients of making kimchi.
A．Cabbage B．Yogurt C．Fish D．Lettuce
127新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ C ）5．Which of the following is NOT true？
A．People in the Republic of Korea eat kimchi every day.
B．Chonggak kimchi is made of radishes.
C．Scientists have the same ideas about kimchi.
D．There are different kinds of kimchi in different seasons of the year.
B
Dear Meimei,
I'm really glad to receive your e-mail. You said you were learning to cook.
Is it interesting? I think if you want to keep healthy, food is very important. You'll be better if you try all kinds of fool,
especially vegetables and fruit. I eat then every day.
You asked me how to make a milk shake. There are different kinds of milk shakes. Such as apple milk shakes, banana
milk shakes, carrot milk shakes, and watermelon milk shakes. Apple mill shakes are my favorite, because apples and
milk are both good for our health. Before starting, we need an apple, a cup of milk. some ice-cream and two spoons of
honey. Of course, you need a blender.
Now, let's start. First, peel at apple and cut it up. Next, put the apple, the milk, some ice-cream and two spoons of
honey into the blender. Then turn on the blender. Keep it going for only one minute. Finally, Pour the apple milk shake
into a glass and drink it. It's delicious!
I Want to learn how to make some Chinese food,such as dumplings, noodles and zongzi. Could you teach me?
Please write back to me soon!
Yours,
Maria
（ D ）6．What 'the letter mainly about?
A．Good eating habits. B．A good lifestyle.
C．How to look after yourself. D．How to make an apple milk shake.
（ B ）7．In this e-mail,Maria mentioned(提到)___ kinds of milk shakes.
A．three B．four C．fine D．six
（ D ）8．Of all the milk shakes, Maria likes ____ best.
A．banana milk shakes B．watermelon milk shakes
C．carrot milk shakes D．apple milk shakes
（ D ）9．Which of the following is TRUE?
A．Meimei is showing Maria hom to make dumplings.
128新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
B．Meimei wants Maria to learm to make noodles from her.
C．Maria can cook Chinese food.
D．Maria eats many different kinds of food,especially vegetables and fruit every day.
（ C ）10．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the e-mail?
A．A blender and a glass. B．Noodles and dumplings.
C．Sugar and coffee. D．A watermelon and an apple.
九、阅读填表
It’s easy to just get fast food when you’re hungry, but it can also be unhealthy and expensive. So I decided to
test myself and not have fast food for five days. I made my own food at home using healthy cooking way.
Day 1: Hardest day
For breakfast at school, I ate corn, and for lunch I got myself a salad. I looked out the window on my bus ride
home and McDonald’s was calling to me. Then I remembered my plan. I cooked fish for dinner.
Day 2: Trying new things
I tried some cabbage noodles. Cabbage isn’t my all-time favorite, but I was surprised by how good this tasted.
Day 3: Breakfast
Two more days until my healthy diet was over and I felt really good about myself. For breakfast, I had a banana
sandwich. Don’t let the term “sandwich” fool you. The banana actually works as the “bread”.
Day 4: At-home pancake(煎饼)
I found an easy way to cook pancake. I needed carrot, oinion, tomatoes, lettuce and some other vegetables. What
great food!
Day 5: Going all out
I made it! I even baked honey mushroom(蘑菇) chicken for my family! I will eat healthy more often.
Five-day 66 ． Healthy Cooking Way
Day 1 Breakfast: corn. Lunch: salad. Dinner: fish.
Day 2 Cabbage noodles. To my 67 ． surprise , they tasted really nice.
Day 3 Banana 68 ． works/serves as “bread” in my sandwich.
Day 4 I mixed carrot, onion, tomatoes, lettuce and some other vegetables 69 ． together to make pancakes.
Honey mushroom chicken. The author cooked it 70 ． f or her family. She thought she would eat
Day 5
healthy more often.
129新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 5 What a Delicious Meal !
Section B what does cooking give us?
三．重点词汇梳理
1. memory /'meməri/n.回忆；记忆 2. visibl e /'vizəbl/adj.看得见的；可见的
2. pumpkin / 'pʌmpkɪn/n. 南瓜 4. pi e /pai/n.果馅饼；肉馅饼
5. cinnamon /'sinəmən/n. 肉桂皮；桂皮香料 6. sweetness /'swi:tnəs/n.甜；芬芳；愉悦
6. college /'kɒlidʒ/n.学院；大学 8. hos t /həust/n. 主人；东道主v. 主办；主持(活 动 )
9. hostes s /'həustəs/n.女主人；女房东 10. recip e /'resəpi/n.食谱；烹饪法
11. cream /kri:m/n. 奶油；护肤霜；奶油色 12. crus t /krʌst/n. 糕饼酥皮；面包皮
13. mixtur e /'mikstʃə(r)/n. 混合物 14 . least /li:st/adj. 最少的；最小的 pron. 最少；最 小
15. secre t /'si:krət/n.诀窍；秘密 adj.秘密的；隐秘的
16. wheneve r /wen'evə(r)/adv.&conj.每当；在任何……的时候
17. item /'aɪtəm/n.项目 18. spaghett i /spə'getɪ/n.意大利细面条
19. spoo n / spu:n/n.勺；匙n.(=spoonful) 一 个的勺量
20. slic e /slais/n. 薄片；片v. 把……切成薄片；切；割
21. coupl e /'kʌpl/n. 夫妻；情侣；两人 22. islan d /'aɪlənd/n. 岛
23. w i f e /waɪf/n. (pl.wives /waivz)妻子
24. separat e /'seprət/adj. 单 独 的 ； 分 开 的 v. /'separert/ ( 使 ) 分 开 ； ( 使 ) 分 离
25. bor n /bɔ:n/v. 出生；出世 adj. 天生(有某方面 才 能 ) 的
26. Thanksgivin g /θæŋks 'gɪvɪŋ/ 感恩节
二．重点词汇变形
13.memory(n.)回忆；记忆→复数形式：memories→ memorabl e (adj.)难忘的；值得纪念的
14.visible(adj.)能看见的；可见的→ visio n (n.) 视野；视力
15.sweetness (n.)甜；芬芳；愉快→ swee t (adj.) 甜的；甜蜜的
130新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
16.host(n.) 主人；东道主→ hostes s (n.) 女主人
17.least（adv&pron）最小；最少→ 比较级 les s → 原形 littl e
18.secret(n.) 秘 密 → secretar y (n.)秘书
19.wife(n.)妻子→复数形式： wive s 妻 子
20.separate (adj.&v.)单独的；分开的→ separatel y (adv.)分别地；单独地 → separatio n (n.) 分开；隔离
21.potato (n.)土豆 → 复数形式 potatoe s
22.tomato (n.)西红柿 → 复数形式 tomatoe s
23.sugar(n.) 糖 → sugar y (adj.)甜的→ sugarcane (n.)甘蔗
24.salt(n.)盐 → salt y (adj.) 咸的
25.blender(n.) 搅拌器 → blen d (v.)
26.dish(n.)菜肴 → 复数形式 dishe s
27.luck(n.) 运气 → luck y (adj.) 幸运的→反 unluck y → luckil y (adv.)幸运地→反：unluckily
28.kind(adj.) 善良的→ kindness(n.)善良
三．重点短语通关
1.have wonderful memories 有美好的回忆 2.thanks to 归功于；由于
3.share my love with others 和他人分享我的爱 4.along with sb./sth.除……以外；与……同样地
5.pumpkin pie 南瓜派 6.warm up 使活跃起来；热身；预热
7.enjoy a taste of the changing seasons 享受季节变换的味道 8.fill..with.…使充满
9.think of 记得，想起 10.tell sb.about sth. 告诉某人关于某事
11.a host family 寄宿家庭 12.at least 至 少
13.make friends 交朋友 14.around the world 全世界
15.the secret to cooking 烹饪的秘籍 16.a good way to do sth.做某事的好方法
17.a bottle of milk 一瓶牛奶 18.a bowl of rice 一碗米饭
131新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
19.a cup of tea 一杯茶 20.a piece of cake 一块蛋糕
21.a glass of grape juice 一杯葡萄汁 22.a plate of spaghetti 一盘意大利面
23.a bag of flower 一袋面粉 24.a spoon of sugar 一勺糖
25.a slice of bread 一片面包 26.add..to...将. …加到...
27.pour...into...将….倒入.. 28.cut...into.. 将…切成…
29.mix.….with... 将…和….混合 30.Guoqiao Rice Noodles 过桥米线
31.long ago 很久以前 32.boil some chicken soup 煲鸡汤
33.one by one 逐一地
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
Food for Thought
" Cooking is love made visible. " That is what my grandmother
always told me. Thanks to her, I love cooking. It's a great way
for me to share my love with others. Every time I sit at the table,
after cooking for my family, we create memories. The smells
and the food's taste, along with our conversations, connect us to
each other. What wonderful memories I have! One of my favourite memories is my grandmother's pumpkin pie. She
always made it in autumn, when the weather got colder. Her friendly kitchen was the perfect place to warm up and
enjoy a taste of the changing seasons. I still remember the days when the smell of
cinnamon filled the room with sweetness. Now, every time I smell cinnamon, I think of
my grandmother's pumpkin pie.
My grandmother told me about her first pumpkin pie. When she was a college student in
the US, she stayed with a host family. One year around Thanksgiving, the hostess taught
her how to make a pumpkin pie. Many years later, she taught me how to make it too.
My grandmother loved learning how to make food from other cultures. " It's my way of
making friends from around the world, she said, Grandmother taught me the secret to cooking: Cook with love.Thanks
to my grandmother, I love to try new food and new recipes from other countries and cultures.
【考点1.】Thanks to her,I love cooking.多亏了她，我爱上烹饪。
【用法详解】thanks to 意为“多亏了….;由于...的帮助”，相当于because of...或with the help of...，强调感谢的
132新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
对象。在此短语中，to是一个介词，后接名词或代词。
Eg:Thanks to the doctor, I am well again.多亏这位医生，我身体又好了。
Eg:Thanks to our teachers' help, we all passed the exam.多亏了我们老师的帮助，我
们都通过了考试。
相关拓展：thanks for= thank you for 意为"为...表示感谢”，强调感谢的原因。for
后面可跟名词、代词或动词-ing形式。
Eg:Thanks for lending me your umbrella.谢谢你借给我雨伞。
Eg:Thank you for your dictionary.谢谢你借给我词典。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. Thanks for the flowers for me.
A.watering B.water C. watered D. to water
（ B ）2.-Susan, you look so happy today.
-- the teacher, I passed the English exam!
A. Thank for B. Thanks to C. Thanks for D.Thank to
【考点2.】It’s a great way for me to share my love with others .对于我来说这是我跟其他人分享爱最好的
方式。
【用法详解】lt+be+adj+(for sb/of sb)+to do sth 意为“(对某人来说)做某事是……的" it 为形式主语，真正的主
语是后面的动词不定式短语。
Eg:It's necessary to study hard.努力学习是有必要的。
Eg:It's dangerous for us to swim in such deep pool.对我们来说，在如此深的水池里游
泳是危险的。
相关拓展：for sb 与 of sb 的区别及具体用法
①for sb的句型中，sb为动词不定式的逻辑主语，该句型中的形容词为描述事物特征的词，常用形容词有
difficult/important/easy/hard/necessary/impossible/dangerous 等.
②of sb的句型中，sb为动词不定式的逻辑主语，该句型中的形容词为描述人品质及性格特征的词。常搭配的形
容词有clever/foolish/good/nice/polite/kind等。
Eg:It's nice of you to help me.你能帮我真是太好了。
Eg:It's polite of people to knock the door before entering.人们在进门前先敲门是礼貌的。
牛
刀小试
133新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
1.It is always hard to say goodbye to a good friend 和好朋友离别总是很难的。
2.I think that it's wrong of you to spend much time on computer games.我认为你把很多时间花在电脑游戏上是不对
的。3.It is easier to make careless mistakes when you're nervous.当你紧张的时候更容易犯粗心的错误。
4.It is friendly of you to help with my English in your free time with me.你真友好利用空余时间帮我补习英语。
（ A ）5.Ladies and gentlemen, it's my pleasure my speech here.
A. to present B. present C. presenting D. presents
【考点3】It’s a great way for me to share my love with others .对于我来说这是我跟其他人分享爱最好的
方式。
【用法详解】 others意为“另外的人或事物”，用于已知的一些人或事物中，除去某些后，剩余的部分。
others=other+名词复数。常用搭配:some... others ...一些...另一些...
Eg:Some students were playing basketball while others were reading books in the library.
一些学生在打篮球，另一些学生在图书馆看书。
相关拓展：①. other adj. 其余的，另外的，后接名词复数。
Eg:I have other books to read.我还有其他书要读。
②. the other :指“两者中的另一个”，表示特指。常用搭配: one... the other 一个... 另一个
Eg:I have two cakes, one is for me and the other is for my brother.我有两蛋糕，一个给
我，另一个给我哥。
③.another 三者或三者以上的)另一个
Eg:I don't like this one, please show me another.我不喜欢这个，请给我看另一个。
⑤. the others 特指“其余所有的(人或物)
Eg:I don't like this one, and show me the others.我不喜欢这个，把剩余的都拿来给我看看。
注意:some... others... some...the others有些区别(使用“some... the others...”时，意味着这两部分覆盖了所有可
能的情况，没有遗漏。而" some... others... ”则不强调这一点，可能还有其他未提及的部分。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.I don't care about what people think of me or say about me.
A. another B.other C.others D.the others
（ A ）2. some people go to coffee shop to meet friends , just buy a cup of coffee.
A. others B.other C.the others D. the other
( B )6. He took her money in one hand and with hand he grasped her mitten.
A.other B.the other C.the others D.another
134新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【考点4.】 What wonderful memories I have!我有多么美妙的回忆啊!
【用法详解】memory 在此处作可数名词，意为“回忆；记忆”。
Eg:I have a bad memory for numbers. 我不善于记数字。
相关拓展 ①memory 意为“记忆力；记性”时是不可 数名词。lose one's memory
意为“失去记忆”。
Eg:David often forgets things.His memory is poor. 戴维经常忘记事情,他的记忆力
差。
②memorize v. 记忆；记住
Eg:It's hard to memorize these words. 记住这些单词很难。
牛
刀小试
1.Did you remember the memo r ie s (memory) we have spent together in our childhood?
2.He got the winner of the competition of talent show because his fantastic memor y (memory)
3. It’s important for us to memoriz e our ID card number.(memory)
4. He will never forget the memo r y of the first day they met. (memory)
【考点5.】Thanksgiving,the hostess taught her how to make a pumpkin pie.在感恩节的时候，女主人教他做南瓜
派。
【用法详解】how to do sth 意为“如何做某事”，是疑问词+动词不定式(短语)的句式结构。在此结构中的疑问词
包括疑问代词what,which,who 和疑问副词when,where,how 等。这些疑问词和动词不定式一起在句中作宾语、
表语等 。
Eg:I don't know how to spell the word.我不知道怎样拼写这个单词。
Eg:The main problem is where to go camping . the work on time.主要的问题是去哪里露营。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. She taught me______the computer.
A. how to use B. what to use C.when to use D.how using
( A )2.I don’t know tell her this news about her .
A. how to B. what to C.when to D.how
【考点6.】It’s my way of making friends from around the world.这是我与世界各地的人交朋友的方法。
【用法详解】① way 表示“方式；方法”时，后面常接后置定语。
a/the way of doing sth = a/the way to do sth 意为做某事的方法。
135新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:Tell me the way of you learning English .告诉我你学英语的方法。
Eg:A way to make friends is honesty.真诚是交朋友的一种方式。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.Can you teach me the way of the math problem.
A. working out B. work out C.to work out D.works out
( C )2.The way the confidence is smile.
A. build B. building C to build D. builds
【考点7.】Grandmother taught me the secret to cooking:Cook with love.奶奶叫我烹饪的秘诀是：为爱烹饪。
【用法详解】secret作名词时，意为“秘密;诀窍”，常与动词keep保守、tell透露、discover发现等搭配。
Eg:Can you keep a secret?你能保守秘密吗?
相关搭配:keep a secret (from sb.)(对某人)保密 the secret to sth ... . .....的诀窍/秘诀
牛
刀小试
( A )1.The to losing weight is exercise and a healthy diet.
A.secret B.reason C.result D.gaol
( B )2.Don't tell anyone --it's a__
A. problem B.secret C.question D.difficulty
( B )3. He promised to_____the secret for me.
A. Break B.forget C.keep D.speak
【考点8.】And she kept the ingredients separate且她让两种食材分开了。
【用法详解】①.separate作形容词，意为“单独的;分开的”。常与 from搭配。
be separate from 表示“与....…分开的”。
Eg:The two rooms are separate from each other.这两个房间是分开的。
②separate作动词，意为“(使)分开:(使)分离 ”。separate A from B 表示“将A与B分开”。
Eg:Can you separate the eggs from the milk?你能把鸡蛋和牛奶分开吗?
牛
刀小试
( B )1.It's difficult to separate the good apples the bad ones.
A.to B. from C.with D.about
( D )2. You'd better separate the old clothes the new
ones.
136新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.to B. in C.with D.from
【考点8.】The Guoqiao Rice Noodles was born! 过桥米线诞生了!
【用法详解】born可作动词，意为“出生；出世”,还可作形容词，意为“天生(有某方面才能)的”。
相关搭配： ①be born in +年份/月份/地点(大范围)
Eg;He was born in1997.他出生于1997年。
②be born on +具体日期/星期
Eg;He was born on October 5th.他出生于10月5日。
③be born at+小地点(如医院、家庭)
Eg;The baby was born at home.这个婴儿是在家中出生的。
④be born with....天生具有...
Eg;He was born with a talent for music.他天生具有音乐天赋。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.She was born __ _ a small village in 1998.
A. at B. in C.on D.to
( C )2.The child was born____a talent for drawing..
A.in B.on C.with D.to
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( A )1．My brother was ________ with happiness when he was told that he had been accepted into a key high school.
A．filled B．full C．provided D．joined
( D )2 .Please the ingredient _______ the cheese on the plate and then cut it into pieces first, and then eat it.
A．pour； into B．put； on C．fill； to D．cover； with
( D )3．—Mom, may I add some more sugar to the soup?—No way. Too much ________ food is bad for your teeth.
A．delicious B．healthy C．traditional D．sweet
( C )4．Did you put a lot of ________ and ________ into your sandwich?
A．butter; vegetable B．butters; vegetables C．butter; vegetables
( A )5．You can improve your English _________ practicing more.
A．by B．with C．of D．in
137新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )6．—How many________ do we need? —One.
A．yogurt B．pancakes C．sugar D．honey
( B )7．— butter do we need for a sandwich?—Two tablespoons should be enough.
A．How many B．How much C．How long D．How far
( A )8．—There_______some GuoQiao Rice Noodles in the lowl. You can eat it for breakfast.—OK, I will.
A．are B．is C．was D．were
( A )9．—Let’s make the steamed fish.— .
A．Sounds good B．You’re welcome C．That’s right D．Don’t worry
( D )10．Paul made a nice cage _______the little sick bird till it could fly．
A．keep B．kept C．keeping D．to keep
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1.My monitor was born (bear)with the voice of a singer.
2.How poor these husbands are!They have to stay here to look after their wives’ (wife) bags.
3.One of the most unforgettable memories (memory)of my childhood is the summer vacation I spent with my
family in the countryside.
4.I made a special drink by mixing fruit juice and milk together;it was a delicious mixture .(mix)
三、从方框中选择合适的单词或短语并用其适当形式填空
secret sweet at least visible couple
1.The stars are visible in the clear night sky.
2.I told my friend my secret s and I asked her to keep them to herself.
3.The flowers in the garden filled the air with the fresh and pleasant sweet ness .
4.The old couple are living a quiet life in a village far away from the city.
5.As a teenager,I think we should help our parents to do chores at least twice a week.
四、完形填空
I live in a happy family. 1 of my parents love me very much and they never let me do any chores. My dad is an
excellent 2 , so he does all the cooking in our family. My mom does all the other chores 3 cleaning the house
and washing clothes.
Last weekend, my parents went away on vacation, and I had to take care of 4 .In the afternoon, I was 5 ,so I
138新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6 to cook a meal. I 7 did this before, but how hard would it be？My father is a good cook, I must 8 him in
some ways. Finally, I decided to cook 9 . I took out the chicken from the fridge and let it soak(浸泡) in the water
for 30 minutes. When the pan of oil on the stove became very 10 , I 11 the chicken into it. Immediately(立即),
the pan went up in flames(火苗)．I stood there for a few seconds not knowing how it 12 before I threw the flaming
pan into the sink(水槽) and turned on the tap(水龙头). After 13 my breath, I noticed the white table next to the
stove and the ceiling(天花板) above became black. I 14 the next hour and a half trying to clean up the kitchen.
Perhaps my life is not as perfect as I ever thought, and there is always 15 I need to learn to do.
( D )1．A．All B．Either C．Neither D．Both
( A )2．A．cook B．worker C．teacher D．driver
( C )3．A．for B．with C．like D．in
( D )4．A．Himself B．themselves C．yourself D．myself
( C )5．A．full B．dirty C．hungry D．busy
( C )6．A．learned B．started C．decided D．began
( D )7．A．often B．ever C．always D．never
( A )8．A．take after B．look after C．find out D．get out
( B )9．A．fish B．chicken C．beef D．mutton
( A )10．A．hot B．cold C．wet D．dry
( B )11．A．throw B．threw C．throws D．thrown
( A )12．A．happened B．stopped C．left D．lost
( A )13．A．catching B．stopping C．blowing D．throwing
( C )14．A．took B．cost C．spent D．got
( C )15．A．nothing B．anything C．something D．everything
五、阅读单选
A
Do you like eating chocolate? Companies spend millions of dollars on tools and machines to make chocolate.
With a little ingredients(原料), however, you can turn your kitchen into a chocolate factory. Today we will teach the
Cocoa Powder(可可粉) Method(方法), and it is easier for beginners. Try it and make your own homemade chocolate.
Here are the ingredients you need: cocoa powder―2 cups (220g); butter―3/4 cup (170g); sugar―3/4 cup
(100g); milk―2/3 cup (150ml); salt―a little bit; water―1 cup ( 235ml ).
Now, please follow these steps. First, mix the cocoa powder and butter in a bowl until you have a smooth
paste(酱). Then, add the cocoa powder mixture(混合物) to the hot water and stir(搅拌). Allow the temperature to rise
139新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
back up. Put the hot mixture into a bowl. Add sugar and stir. Add milk, stir until smooth. At last, put the mixture into
different containers(容器). The chocolate will take the shape of the container. You can put it in the fridge to harden(使
变硬) it.
We hope you can enjoy your homemade chocolate.
（ D ）1．What is NOT necessary(必要的) when we are making chocolate?
A．Cocoa powder. B．Salt. C．Water. D．Egg.
（ A ）2．Which is the right order to make chocolate
①Put sugar and milk into the mixture.
②Mix the cocoa powder and butter
③Place the mixture into containers, and put it in the fridge.
④Add hot water and stir.
A．②④①③ B．②①④③ C．②④③① D．④②①③
（ C ）3．What’s the best title of this passage?
A．How to Build a Chocolate Factory B．The Ways to Eat Chocolate
C．How to Make Chocolate at Home D．The Cocoa Bean Method
（ B ）4．The information above may come from a ________.
A．story book B．Magazine C．history book D．travel guide
B
For one group of children aged between ten and fifteen, Saturdays are spent learning the art of serious cooking.
Their weekly lessons in small classes are so popular that there is a waiting list of 30 children who want to do the
course. Parents pay $280 for the course where their children can have fun and learn how to make good food.
Class member Bill, aged ten, says, “I love my mum’s cooking and now I can do it better than her. The teachers
make us laugh, especially when we sit down with them to share the food we’ve made.”
Flora is twelve, and she’s having problems preparing onions. “I love cooking. I did a meal for ten friends which
they really enjoyed. Then my mum suggested I take up a hobby, instead of doing nothing at weekends. I was happy
staying at home, so I wasn’t too active at first. I’m really glad I decided to come, though.”
Their teacher, Philippe, says, “It’s great fun. Children pay attention and remember things better than adults,
although the kitchen isn’t always tidy when they’re cooking! As adults, we’re always learning more about food. If
parents interest their children in cooking while they are young, they’ll have enough skill to make food for themselves
when they leave home.”
（ C ）1．In this article, the writer is trying to ________.
140新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．warn parents not to expect too much from their children
B．advertise schools to teach children how to cook
C．describe how some children spend their spare time
D．explain why parents want to learn more about cooking
（ D ）2．Why did Flora join the course?
A．Her friends asked her to improve cooking. B．She wanted to learn to cook a big meal.
C．She felt bored at home at weekends. D．Her mother wanted her to develop an interest.
（ A ）3．What does Philippe say about his young students?
A．They will be confident about cooking in the future.
B．They have a good memory but don’t always listen.
C．They keep the kitchen cleaner than adults do.
D．They teach their parents what they have learnt in class.
（ D ）4．What would one of Philippe’s students say to a friend?
A．We made onion soup yesterday. The course is great, although there are 30 people in my class.
B．I go every Saturday, and now I cook as well as my mum. I’m ten, and I’m the oldest.
C．It’s great. No one’s over 15 and the food looks delicious. I just wish we could eat it together instead of taking it
home.
D．I was on a waiting list for ages, but now I’m on the course. Last week I cut up some onions-it was hard!
C
The Chinese New Year is called the Spring Festival, which is the biggest festival in China. It usually comes in
January or February.
Where there are Chinese, there is the Spring Festival. Each Chinese year has a name. We may call it the Year of
the Tiger, the Year of the Pig or the Year of the Snake. And the year of 2007 is called the Year of the Pig. The year after
it is the Mouse Year.
People always spend a month before the festival in preparing for it. People are busy shopping and cleaning their
houses. On the eve there is a big family dinner. All the family stay up late to welcome the New Year, watching the
CCTV programs or playing cards. On the first day of the Chinese New Year, people put on their new clothes and go to
visit their relatives(亲戚) and friends, saying “Happy New Year”, “Good luck” and some other greetings to each other.
It often lasts to the Lantern Festival, which is also an important Chinese festival and people usually have sweet
dumplings(yuanxiao). People always have a very good time, especially children. Children can usually get some money
for the new year from their parents and the elder relatives.
141新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( C )1．We call the Chinese New Year __________.
A．the biggest festival B．the Lantern Festival C．the Spring Festival D．the Year of the Pig
( A )2．The year of 2008 is the Year of the _________.
A．Mouse B．Pig C．Sheep D．Tiger
( B )3．“All the family stay up late to welcome the New Year.” Here “stay up” means _________.
A．to go to sleep B．not to go to bed C．to stand up D．to have a good rest
( B )4．What do we know from paragraph(段落) 3?
A．what is the Spring Festival
B．how Chinese people celebrate the Spring Festival
C．People celebrate the Spring Festival all over the world.
D．People who can speak Chinese celebrate the Spring Festival in the world.
( D )5．What do people say when they meet on the Chinese New Year’s Day?
A．They say “Merry Christmas” and “Happy New Year”.
B．They say “Good luck” and “Good night” to each other.
C．They say “Have a nice day” and “Good luck” only to their friends and relatives.
D．They say many greetings, such as “Good luck” to each other.
六、多任务混合阅读
Sally’s parents were not at home, so she had to cook lunch by herself. She thought about what to do for a long
time. At last, she decided to cook egg and tomato noodles.
①______________, she cut up two tomatoes and beat two eggs. ②______________, she turned on the gas
cooker (天然气灶) and poured two teaspoons of oil into the pan. ③______________, she poured the beaten (搅拌好
的) egg into the pan when the oil was ready. And then she put the tomatoes into the pan and mixed the tomatoes and
egg together. And then she added some water into the pan. When the water boiled(沸腾), she put the noodles into it.
④______________, she added some salt to the noodles. About three minutes later, the lunch was ready.
Although the noodles were not very delicious, Sally was very happy.
根据短文内容，完成下列任务:
任务一：填词
1．在文中①②③④处填入适当的词，使上下文连贯。
① First ② Next/Then ③ Then/Next ④ Finally
任务二：翻译句子
2．把文中的画线句子翻译成汉语
142新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
然后她往锅里加了一些水。
任务三：根据短文内容，回答下列问题:
3．Why did Sally cook lunch by herself?
Because her parents were not at home
4．How long did Sally boil the noodles?
For about three minutes .
5．How did Sally feel when she finishes cooking her lunch?
She was happy .
四 、阅读还原(有一项多余)
Mashed potato is a delicious dish.Many people like cooking it at home.However,there's an important step
where many of us go wrong1. D In fact,using different kinds of potatoes can make mashed potato taste and look
great.Here are a few other mistakes to avoid(避免):
Cutting the potatoes into small pieces.
It's a good idea to cut large potatoes into big pieces.If you cut them smaller,they'll have too much water
inside.After you cut the potatoes,place them into a pot with cold water,so they don't change color.
2. E Remember to use low temperature to cook and cover the pot to cook them more quickly.
Boiling the potatoes and leaving them in the water for a long time.
The biggest mistake is boiling the potatoes and then putting them into a pot full of water for hours before
cooking mashed potato.3. C Instead,boil the potatoes until a small,sharp knife goes in easily.Then remove the
water from the potatoes and keep the potatoes hot.
4. A
When you've got hot potatoes,you're almost ready to mash.First,add butter and milk.Let them stay in the
potatoes for three to five minutes.5. B You'd better use a hand to mix them,which can let air go into the
dish.Whatever you do,don't use a food blender.
A.Mashing potatoes in the wrong ways to mix.
B.Then,you can begin to mash them.
C.This will make much water in potatoes and make them taste less delicious.
D.People often buy the same kind of potatoes in the market.
E.When all the potatoes are ready,put the pot on the stove and begin to cook.
F.Wash some potatoes and peel them.
五、短文填空
The dumpling is one of the most traditional foods in China.The people in a family often get
143新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
together 1 . to make (make)dumplings during the New Year's Eve.Yesterday I 2. decided (decide) to make this
delicious food for my family.Because that3. was (be)my first time to make dumplings,rolling dumpling wrappers
and 4 . making (make)the dumpling filling(馅料 )were difficult for me.
First,some meat,one cabbage and one carrot were necessary.Second,to prepare the dumpling filling,my
mum taught me to cut 5. up the meat and vegetables so that I could 6. easily (easy)make the dumpling filling with
those pieces by 7. adding (add)some salt and pepper. Third,I put the finished dumpling filling in a bowl.Fourth,I
was going to make the dough.Fifth,I cut the dough into small 8. pieces (piece),and then made them into round
ones.Sixth,I put the filling in the center of a dumpling wrapper one by one,and then folded(对折)the wrapper up.
9. F inally (final),I put the dumplings into the pot and cooked them for a few minutes.In this way,I cooked
delicious dumplings.
Although it was difficult for me to make dumplings for the first time,with the help of my mum,I found the fun
of cooking and thought it was 10. an interesting experience.
六、单元写作
假如你是李华，你校英文专栏正在寻找校园小美食家，请你根据表格内容及要求用英语写 一篇短文，向
该英文专栏进行投稿，介绍你最喜欢的一道菜及制作方法。
名称 炒土豆(stir-fried potatoes)
土豆冲洗干净备用
做法 土豆切块
锅烧热(heat),倒入油(oil)
放入土豆块翻炒(stir-fry),加适量盐
Everyone has his or her favo rite food.As for me,my favorite food is stir - fried potatoes .
Let me share my way to cook them with you.To begin wit h , prepare two or three potatoes and wash
them . Then , what I should do is to cut them into small pieces . Next,heat the pot for half a minute and pour some
oil into the pot . After that , put the potatoes and stir - fry them . At the same time , I would like to add some
pepper . In fact , it ' s up to you to decide whether you add pepper or not . And then add some salt to the potatoes.At
last,put the potat oes on a big plate .
How delicious my stir- fried potatoes are!
144新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 6 Plan for Yourself
Section A When do we make plans ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1. yourself /jɔ:'self/pron.(pl.yourselves/jɔ:'selvz) 你自己；您自己
2. engineer /,endʒi'n(r)/n. 工程师；技师 3. fashion /'fæʃn/n.时装业；时尚
3. design er/di'zainə(r)/n. 设计师 5. director /də'rektə(r),daɪ'rektə(r)/n. 导演；主任；董事
6. musician /mju'zɪʃn/n.音乐家；作曲家 7. fireman /'farəmən/n.(pl.firemen/'faɪəmən/) 消 防队员
7. A I /,eɪ 'aɪ/(=artificial/,a:ti'fiʃəl/intelligence /n'telədʒəns/)人工智能
8. essay /'esei/n. 小品文；文章 10. classic /'klæsɪk/n.经典作品；名著adj. 最优秀的；古典的
11 .literature /'lɪtrətʃə(r)/n. 文 学 12. athlete /'æθli:t/n. 运动员
145新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
13. photographer /fə'tɒgrəfə(r)/n. 摄影师；摄影者 14. painter /'peɪntə(r)/n. 画家；油漆匠
15. businessman /'biznəsmæn/n.男商人；企业家 16. actress /'æktrəs/n. 女演员
17. lawyer /'bɔ:jə(r)/n. 律师 18. law /Lɔ:/n.法律；法规
19. bath /ba:0/n. 洗澡；浴缸 20. miss /mis/v. 想念；错过
21. able /'eɪbl/adj. 能够；有才能的 22. stick /stɪk/v.(stuck /stʌk/) 粘贴；将……刺入 n. 枝条；棍
二．重点词汇变形
1.yourself (pron.)你自己→形物代： your 你的；你们的 →名物代： yours 你的；你们的
2.engineer(n.)工程师；技师→ engineering (n.) 工程学；工程
3.fashion(n.)时装业；时尚→ fashionabl e (adj.)时髦的；时尚的
4.designer(n.)设计师→ desig n (n.) 设计；设计方案 (v.) 设计
5.director(n.)导演；主任→ direc t (v.) 指导；指挥 (adj.) 直 接 的 → directio n (n.)方 向
6.musician(n.)音乐家→ musi c (n.)音乐 → musica l(adj.)音乐的
7.classic(n.)名著；最优秀的→ classica l (adj.)经典的；古典的
8.photography(n.)摄影；摄像→ photographe r (n.)摄影师
10.actress(n.)女演员→ acto r (n.)男演员 → ac t (v.)表演；行动
11.businessman(n.)商人；生意人→ businesswoma n (n.)女商人 → busines s (n.)生意
12.lawyer(n.)律师→ law (n.)法律
13.bath(n.)→ bath e (v.) 洗澡；沐浴
三．重点短语通关
1.IT engineer 信息技术工程师 2.fashion designer 服装设计师
3. film director 电影导演 4.be going to 计划；将要；打算
5.grow up 长大 6.realize one's dream 实现某人的梦想
7.be good at doing sth.擅长做某事 8.read more classics 阅读更多经典作品
9.keep on doing sth. 继续做某事；反复做某事 10.make sure 确保；保证
11 .try one's best to do sth . 尽某人做大努力做某事 12.take a hot bath 洗个热水澡
13.live in the countryside 在乡下居住 14.take acting classes 上表演课
15.have no idea 不知道 16.play badminton 打羽毛球
146新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
17.on Saturday morning 在星期六早上 18.stick to sth.坚持
19.decide to do sth.决定做某事 20.make resolutions 下决心
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Adam:What are you reading, Fu Xing?
Fu Xing: It's a book of essays by a famous Chinese writer.
Adam:Wow, now I know why you're so good at writing.
Fu Xing: Thanks! You know, I want to be a writer when I'm older.
Adam: Really? How do you plan t o d o that?
Fu Xing: I'm going to read more classics. And also, I'm going to keep on
writing storie s and essays .
Adam:Your plan sounds wonderful! I think you're going to be a great
writer.
Fu Xing: I hope so! What about you, Adam? What do you want to be when you're older?
Adam: My parents want me to b e a docto r, but I'm not sure about that.
Fu Xing: Well, don't worry. Not everyone knows what they want to be. Just make sure you try your best at
school. Then you can do anything you want! Adam:Yeah, you're right.
【考点1.】It's a book of essays by a famous Chinese writer.这是一本由一位著名的中国作家编写的散文集。
【用法详解】①essay作名词，意为“短文、散文、论说文”。是可数名词，复数需加 -s。
a book of essays 表示“一本散文集”。book作为量词（a book of...）时，后接可数名词复数或不可数名词。
类似结构还有：a book of poems 诗集 a book of short storie s 短篇小说集。
②by a famous Chinese writer表示“由...创作/所作”，是介词短语，修饰前面的名词 book，作后置定语，说明
书的作者。
Eg:I read a short story by Lu Xun. 我读了鲁迅的一部短篇小说。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1. YuanAi is a positive song Wang YiBo.
A.by B. from C. with D.to
2. She published a book of essays (essay) on modern art.
【考点2.】now I know why you’re so good at writing .现在我知道你为什么擅长于写作了。
【用法详解】① be good at doing sth 意为“擅长于做某事”
Eg:Tom is good at running.汤姆擅长奔跑。
147新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
相关拓展：②be good for 对...有好处
Eg:Eggs are good for our health.鸡蛋对我们的健康有好处。
③be good with 和...相处的好
Eg:She is good with these children.她和这些孩子相处的好。
④be good to 对...友好
Eg:The teacher is good to us.老师对我们很好。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.I think washing hands every day is good our health.----Yes,I agree_________you!
A.to;to B.with;to C.for;with D.at;with
（ C ）2.The people in this town are good the old and the young.
A.for B.at C.with D.to
（ A ）3. Eating more vegetables _good your health.
A.is,for B.are,for C.is,to D.are,to
（ B ）4.I'm good . playing chess.
A.for B.at C.with D.to
（ A ）5. Miss Smith is good._____music,and she is good her students.
A.at,with B.for,at C.at,in D.to,with
【考点3.】I want to be a writer when I’m older.等我长大我想成为一名作家。
【用法详解】want 作动词，意为“想要”。
①want to be +名词，表示主语想要成为某种职业或某种身份。
Eg:I want to be a designer like Sean .我想成为一个像肖恩那样的设计师。
②want sth.想要某物。
Eg:I want a new sweater.我想要一个新的毛衣。
③want to do sth.=would like to do sth 想要做某事。
Eg:I want to play TIMI games with my brother after dinner.晚饭后我想和哥哥一起TIMI。
④want sb. to do sth.想要某人做某事。
Eg:My brother wants me to camp with him this weekend.我弟弟想让我这个周末和他去露营。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.They want a football match.
A. not watch B. watch C. to watch D. watches
148新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ A ）2. 1 want ______dinner at home.
A. to have B.have C.has D. having
（ C ）3. I would like ____sick people better.
A. making B. make C. to make D.makes
（ D ）4.Kitty wants_____a pilot.
A. is B.be C.being D. to be
【考点4.】How do you plan to do that ?你计划如何做呢?
【用法详解】plan作动词,意为“计划”,也可用作可数名词,意为“计划;打算”。
相关搭配：①plan to do sth. 计划做某事
Eg:I plan to do my homework this evening.我打算今晚做作业。
②make a plan ( to do sth. ) 制订计划(做某事)
Eg:They made a plan to learn English well last night.昨晚他们制定计划要学好英语。
③ make a plan for...(制订)……的计划
Eg:He is making a plan for the winter vacation.他在制订寒假计划。
牛
刀小试
1.They plan to sing the old song in school art festival.（sing）
2.He made a prefect plan to learn English last night.( learn)
( A )3.He is making a plan his music concert.
A. for B. to C. with D.at
【考点5.】I'm going to read more classics.我打算读更多的经典著作。
【用法详解】①classic 作名词，意为“经典作品;名著”。指长期被认可为优秀或典范的作品(书籍、电影、音乐
等)。也可作形容词，意为“最优秀的/典范的”，强调高质量或代表性。
Eg:She likes reading classics at the age of 18.她在18岁时喜欢读经典名著。
Eg:The museum displays the most classic literature.博物馆展出了最经典的文献。
相关拓展：classic强调“经典、典范”或“典型”。
classical 专指“古典的”，Eg:classical music 古典音乐
②be going to表示将要发生的动作，含有＂计划，打算＂的意思，后跟动词原形，其中be动词要与主语的人称
和数一致，常跟表将来的时间连用。
Eg:He is going to visit YunNan next week. 他打算下周去云南游玩。
牛
刀小试
149新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
1. His speech was a classic (典范) case of effective communication.
2.She prefers classical novels to modern ones.比起现代小说，她更喜欢古典的。(翻译）
( D )3.I _________________ the shops. Can I get you anything?
A. go to B. went to C. have gone to D. am going to
【考点6.】and also,I'm going to keep on writing.而且，我打算继续坚持写作。
【用法详解】keep on doing sth表示经过一段时间的间隙后＂继续做同一件事＂，后可接表动态的词，如walk、
write、talk 等。还暗指不顾困难、反对、警告而＂坚持＂做某事。
Eg:They kept on working in the fields, though it was raining. 虽然天正在下雨，他们
还是继续在田里干活。
相关拓展：① keep on doing 表示动作的反复
Eg:This old man kept on coming to offer us hot water.这位老人不断地给我们送热水。
②keep doing 表示动作或状态的持续
Eg:He kept standing there for an hour without moving. 他在那儿一动不动地站了一个小时。
相关搭配：①keep sb(sth) doing sth 让某人(物) 不断做某事
Eg:The boss kept the workers working all day. 老板让工人们整天不断地工作。
②keep sb/sthfrom doing sth 表示 ＂阻止某人/物做某事＂。
Eg:Be careful! Keep the glass from dropping onto the floor. 当心！防止玻璃杯掉到地板上。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.It was raining, but the farmers kept on_____ in the fields.
A. working B. to work C.work D.worked
( B )2."Keep , and you'll improve!"
A.practice B. practicing C.to practice D.practiced
( D )3.We should keep on _________________ English every day.
A. to practice to speak B. to practice speakingC. practicing to speak D. practicing speaking
【考点7.】①But I’m not sure about that .但是我没有把握。
②Just make sure you try your best at school.只要确保你在学校尽力就好。
【用法详解】①be sure about/of 意为“确信,对……有把握”后接名词、代词或动
词-ing形式，表示对客观事物有肯定的认识和判断，主语必须是人。
Eg:I am really sure about it. 对于这件事我确实有把握。
相关拓展：be sure to do sth.务必做某事；确信做某事。
150新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:I’m sure to go shopping with you. 我确定和你一起去逛街。
②make sure 意为“确保，查明”。
Eg:Make sure (that) you lock the door when you leave. 当你离开时确保锁上门。
③ try one's best to do sth 尽最大努力做某事
Eg:She tried her best to finish the project.她尽力完成项目。
牛
刀小试
1. To make sure his safety,his brother sends him to school everyday.(确保)
（D）2.Please check your paper to _________________ there are no mistakes.
A. think of B. try out C. find out D. make sure
( A )1.We must try our best _______the wild animals.
A.to protect B.protecting C. protect D.protected
( B )2.Please try _______ best to learn English well.
A. you B.your C.yours D.yourself
四．单元重点语法讲练
含be going to的一般将来时
一、语法概述
“be going to+动词原形”结构可以表示将来，多用于口语中。be going to是一般将来时态的一种表现形式，
表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态，意为“打算做某事”。be动词随主语的人称和数的变化而变
化。
二、be going to的用法
1.be going to主要用于以下两种情况：
（1）表示事先经过考虑、安排打算要做的事情，非临时想法。
Eg:I'm going to study medicine at a university. 我将在读大学的时候学习医学。
（2）表示根据某种迹象判断，某事非常有可能发生。（常用于判断天气情况）
Eg:Look at those clouds. It's going to rain. 看那些云，马上要下雨了。
2.be going to 与表示将来的时间状语连用，如 this evening, tomorrow, the day after tomorrow（后天）, next
week/month/year, soon等，也可以与when, before, after, until 等引导的时间状语连用。
Eg:She’s going to watch TV this evening. 她打算今天晚上看电视。
He is going to be an engineer when he grows up. 他打算长大后当一名工程师。
三、be going to的句式结构
151新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
肯定句 主语+be going to+动词原形+其他. I am going to play basketball.我打算去打篮球。
否定句 主语+be not going to+动词原形+其他. I am not going to play basketball.我不打算去打篮球。
一般疑问句 Be+主语+going to+动词原形+其他？ —Are you going to play basketball?
及其肯定、 肯定回答：Yes, 主语+be. 你打算去打篮球吗？
否定回答 否定回答：No, 主语+be not. —Yes, I am.是的，我打算去。
No, I’m not.不，我不打算去。
特殊疑问句 特殊疑问词+be+主语+going to+动词 Where are you going to play basketball?
原形+其他？ 你打算去哪儿打篮球？
【特别提醒】There be going to be...结构中，靠近there的be随主语变化，而后面的be是动词原形，不变化。
Eg:There is going to be an English film this evening. 今晚将有一场英文电影。
牛
刀小试
根据所给提示，完成句子（每空一词，含缩略词）。
1.They are going to take guitar lessons. (改为否定句）
They aren’ t goin g to take guitar lessons.
2.Alice is going to make a model plane herself. (改为一般疑问句）
I s Alice goin g to make a model plane herself?
3.I am going to buy a computer this weekend. (改为一般疑问句并作否定回答）
Ar e you goin g to buy a computer this weekend?
No, I’m no t .
4.Alex is going to move to his new house next month. (对划线部分提问）
Whe n i s Alex going to move to his new house?
5.The Greens are going to travel to America. (对划线部分提问）
Wher e are the Greens going to trave l ?
（ B ）6．一There __________ a basketball game against Class Two this Sunday.
— I see. I will come and cheer you on.
A．will have B．is going to be C．is going to have
（ C ）7． There ________ a basketball game next Monday. If it ________ , we’ll have to put it off.
A．is going to have; will rain B．is going to have; rains
C．is going to be; rains D．is going to be; will rain
（ A ）8． —The coffee’s finished!
—Oh, sorry! I ________to the shop to get some.
A．am going B．was going C．went D．have gone
152新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ A ）9．、—Mum, the hand wash is finished.—Oh, sorry! I ________ to the store to get some.
A．am going B．have been C．went D．have gone
（ D ）10.I a new house next year. I need your help.
A．bought B．buy C．was buying D．am going to buy
（ D ）11．They _________ play basketball next weekend.
A．go to B．goes to C．is going to D．are going to
（ D ）12.—China is getting stronger and stronger in the world.
—Yes. More and more foreign students ________ Chinese in many colleges in China.
A．has learned B．is learned C．learned D．are going to learn
（ D ）13．—Lucy is ill in hospital.—Yes, I know. I________her________three hours.
A．visit; for B．go visiting; for C．go to visit; in D．am going to visit; in
（ D ）14．He _________ her a beautiful hat on her next birthday.
A．gives B．gave C．will giving D．is going to give
（ B ）15．—_________ you _________ free tomorrow?—No, I _________ free the day after tomorrow.
A．Are; going to; will B．Are; going to be; will be
C．Are; going to; will be D．Are; going to be; will
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
（ B ）1．—Do you know the name of the costume ?—Sorry , I’m not sure ________ it .
A．to B．about C．that D．at
（ C ） 2．We are going to _________ a food festival to _________ money for the children in poor areas.
A．hold; give B．have; give C．hod; raise D．make; raise
（ B ）3．Not only you but also Peter _______ going to climb the hill next Sunday.
A．are B．is C．were D．was
（ B ）4．There _______ an English party in our class next week.
A．is going to have B．is going to be C．will have D．have
（ A ）5．Li Ming is so careful that he always looks over his exercises to ________ there are no mistakes.
A．make sure B．find out C．think of D．work out
（ B ）6．It's not good to ________ food. Let's take the dumplings away.
A．cook B．waste C．finish D．provide
（ C ） 7．I _________ the shops. May I get you something?
153新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．go to B．went to C．am going to D．have gone to
（ B ） 8．-__________is your father?-He's an engineer in a big factory.
A．Who B．What C．Which D．Where
（ C ）9．He was born in Hong Kong but__________ in America.
A．picked up B．gave up C．grew up D．dressed up
（ A ）10．Danny usually _____________ breakfast at seven o’clock in the morning. But tomorrow he ___________
breakfast at half past six.
A．has; is going to have B．has; have C．is having; has D．have; is having
二、用括号里所给词的适当形式填空。
1.Can you imagine that my classmate,WangYiBo,has become a talented director (direct)?
2.I'm good at designing things,so my dream is to be a great of AI robots.(design)
3. Never think too much of yourself (you)because one tree doesn’t make a forest.
4.John and Jack are my uncle's friends and they're both __engineer s ______ (engineer).
5.When the light turned on, that musician (music) started his concert.
6.—What do you want to be?—I want to be an excellent lawyer (law) like Mr. Smith.
7.There are some photos of famous painter s (paint) on the wall.
8.She is a popular actress (act) in China.
9. How about writing down our mistakes in our notebooks? (write)
10. Jane keeps on doin g (do)some reading before going to bed.
11. I am going to visi t (visit) my English teacher with my friend tomorrow.
12. He stick to play (play) baseball every day because he wants to be a baseball player.
13. I want to make a plan to read a book of essays (essay) in my free time.
14. He is going to make a resolution (resolute) to improve his math .
15.Firemen are the most lovely person in the world.(fireman)
三、用方框中所给单词或短语的适当形式填空
grow up；make sure；try one's best；be good at；keep on； literature；business ；law ；fireman ；miss
1．Don't worry.I'll try my best to help you.
2．I am going to be a doctor when I grow up .
3．—I'm leaving now.— make sure you turn off the lights and the computer.
4．“Please keep o n discussing this math question after class，” Mr.Li said.
5．Jane is good at English and she did well in the English exam.
154新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6.Wu Cheng'en stuck to his dream,and he succeeded in literature .
7.I can’t stop missing my old friends in China.We used to have fun together.
8.He was a successful businessman .He once developed a small shop into a big store.
9.Two firemen lost their lives in the fight against the big fire in the forest.
10.My brother wants to go to law school and be a lawyer like my father.
四、完型填空
A lot of students are having all kinds of sports on the sports field. A football game is going on right now 1 Class 3
and Class 4. We don’t know which team will 2 . Look at those people over there! Some students of Class 1 are
practicing the 3 jump. One of them is the best high jumper in the school. He practices hard every day. Many
people think he will 4 the school record (记录) in the sports meet next spring. Not far away from them, some girls
are preparing for a race. They 5 have a 600-meter race in ten minutes. Now on the corner of the field, you can see
another group (群) of students. Their teacher is telling them 6 to throw discus (铁饼).
In schools, 7 students love sports now. Sports help people to keep 8 . They also help people to live happily.
And 9 doing sports on the sports field, many people will 1 0 good friends, too. Do you think so?
（ B ）1．A．in B．between C．from D．of
（ A ）2．A．win B．winning C．fall D．falling
（ C ）3．A．long B．far C．high D．tall
（ A ）4．A．break B．turn C．leave D．name
（ D ）5．A．were B．going to C．were going to D．will
（ B ）6．A．what B．how C．which D．that
（ D ）7．A．much and much B．most and most C．many and many D．more and more
（ C ）8．A．health B．tired C．healthy D．happy
（ C ）9．A．in B．before C．after D．over
（ A ）10．A．Become B．change C．get D．bring
五、阅读单选
A
Let us suppose (假设) it is now about A．D．2060. People go to the moon every day. It is as easy to take a
holiday on the moon today as it was for the people in 1960 to take a holiday in Europe.
What are people eating now? People are still eating food. But many foods now come in pill (药丸) form.
Farming, of course, is very highly developed. Very few people have to work on the farm. People are now largely
vegetarians (素食者) and we are healthier both in our bodies and in our minds, and we don't have any diseases (疾病).
155新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
No one has to be ill any more.
（ A ） 1．The writer thinks in 2060 people can go to the moon _____.
A．every day B．every hour C．every minute D．every second
（ C ）2．Now people are eating _____.
A．grass B．flowers C．food D．books
（ B ）3．Many foods in 2060 come in _____ form.
A．water B．pill C．air D．trees
（ D ）4．In 2060, _____ have to work on the farm.
A．no people B．no farmers C．many people D．very few people
（ C ）5．No one has to be ill any more because _____.
A．there is much medicine B．there are few people
C．there are no diseases D．there are no doctors
B
I'm Larry. I'm really good at selling things. I also love helping people. But I'm not so good at solving problems.
I think I'd like to be a salesman or a detective.
I'm Anita. I really like doing things with my hands. I also enjoy working with wood. I don't enjoy working in the
same place every day, and I hate being in noisy places. I think I'd like to be an artist or a carpenter.
I'm Jill. I'm good at explaining things and I really like children. I can't stand working long hours. I think I'd like to
be a doctor or a teacher.
I'm Maria. I'm really interested in meeting people, and I enjoy wearing different clothes every day. I'm not so
good at organizing my time and I can't stand computers, I am going to be a model.
I'm Jim. I enjoy helping people, but I can't stand working nights and weekends. I want to be a social worker.
（ C ）6．Larry wants to be ____________ .
A.a worker or a teacher B.a nurse or a doctor
C.a salesman or a detective D.a model or a carpenter
（ D ）7．Anita doesn't enjoy working in ____________ .
A．the same place B．different places
C．noisy places D．A and C
（ B ）8．____________ wants to be a teacher or a doctor.
A．Anita B．Jill C．Maria D．Jim
（ D ）9．Maria likes ____________ .
156新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．meeting people B．wearing different clothes
C．working nights and weekends D．A and B
（ A ）10．What does the underlined words “can't stand” mean in Chinese?
A．不能忍受 B．不能站立 C．不能坚持 D．不能适应
六、短文汉语提示填空
I’m sixteen now and I’m studying in a high school. I 41 ． am going to finish (finish) high school in two years, and then
I’m going to a college for four years. I 42 ． am going to study (study ) language because after college I’m going to work
as a language teacher. While at college, I’m also going to take a computer lesson because I’m going to use computer in
my work.. Also, I’m going to play sports 43 ． to keep (keep) healthy at college.
I really enjoy 44 ． traveling (travel),so before going to work, I’m going to travel. To spend money to travel, I’m going
to save my money for six months, and I’m going to visit Egypt. I’m going to see the Pyramids (金字塔) and ride a
camel (骆驼) . Of course, I’m going to take a lot of 45 ． photos (photo) on my trip so that I can remember it.
七、根据短文内容，从短文后所给的选项中，选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。选项中有两项为多余选项。
Do you make a resolution on New Year’s Day? How to make a good resolution? 1. C
Plan for the resolution.
It is not enough to have a goal. You need to think out some right steps for the resolution. So make your plan.
2. F And it’ll also tell you how to make the goal come true at last. Make a plan is very important.
3. A
If you make your plan later, you may forget your resolution gradually（逐渐地）. It’s important that you start making
your plan right now.
4. D
You should write your resolution and plan in some places, such as a notebook or your diary.
Think“year around”, not just“New Year’s”.
You can’t finish anything in one day. You make a resolution in one day. 5. G It may need a hundred small steps.
New Year’s resolution should be a starting point. You must keep a habit for making your resolution come true
gradually.
A. Make your plan right now.
B. Making a plan is very important.
C. Maybe the following can help you.
D. Write down your resolution and plan.
E. New Year’s resolution helps people a lot.
F. A good plan will tell you what to do next.
G. It doesn’t mean you must finish it in one
day.
157新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Unit 6 Plan for Yourself
Section B How can we make good plans?
一．重点词汇梳理
1.resolution /rezə'lu:ʃn/n. 决定；决议 2.achieve /ə'tʃ i:v/v. (凭长期努力)达到；完成
3.physical /'fizikl/adj. 身体的；物理的 4.health /helθ/n. 健康
5.healthily /'helθɪli/adv. 健康地 6.photography /fə'tɒgrəfi/n. 照相术；摄影
7.confident /'konfidənt/adj.自信的；肯定的
8.organized /'ɔ:gənaizd/(=organised)adj.有条理的 ；有组织的
9.wisely /'waɪzli/adv. 聪明地；明智地 10.possible /'pɒsəbl/adj.可能的；合理的
11.paragraph /'pærəgra:f/n.段；段落 12.introduce /Intrə'dju:s/v. 介绍；引见；引进
13.meaning /'mi:nɪŋ/n. 意义；含义 14.fail /feɪl/v.未 能 ( 做 到 ) ; 失 败
15.ahead /ə'hed/adv. 提前；在前面 16.design /dɪ'zaɪn/v. 设计；计划 n. 设计；花纹
17.bridge /brɪdʒ/n. 桥 18.final /'faɪnl/adj. 最后的；最终的 n. 决赛
19.confidence /'konfɪdəns/n.信心；信任 20.form /fɔ:m/v. (使)形成；组成 n. 类型；形式
21.relationshi p/rɪ'leɪʃnʃip/n. 关系；联系 22.energetic /enə'dʒetɪk/adj.精力充沛的；充满活力
二．重点词汇变形
1.achieve(v.)达到；完成→achievement(n.)完成；实现
2.physical(adj.)身体的；物质的→physician(n.) 内科医生 →physics(n.) 物理学 →physicist(n.)物理学家
3.healthily(adv.)健康地→healthy(adj.) 健康的 →health(n.) 健 康
4.confident(adj.)自信的；肯定的→confidence(n.)自信；信心
5.organized(adj.)有条理的；有组织的→organize(v.)组织 →organization(n.)组 织
6.wisely(adv.)聪明地；明智地→wise(adj.) 明智的 →wisdom(n.) 智 慧
7.introduce(v.)介绍；引见→introduction(n.) 介绍
8.meaning(n.)意义；含义→meaningful(adj.) 有意义的；重要的
9.fail(v.)未能做到的；失败→failure(n.) 失 败→反：succeed(v.)成功 →success(n.) 成 功
10.final(adj.)→finally (adv.)最后，终于
11.energetic(adj.)精力充沛的→energy(n.) 能量；热量
12stong(adj.)强壮的 →strongly(adj.) 强烈地
13.write(v.)写 → 过去式：wrote →writer(n.)作家
14.hope(v.)&(n.)希望 →hopeful (adj.)充满希望的 → 反：hopeless(adj.) 绝望的；无望的
15.novel(n.) 小说→novelist(n.) 小说家
158新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
16.improve(v.) 改 善 → improveme nt (n.) 提升；改善
17.decide(v.)决定 →decision (n.)决定
18.useful(adj.)有用的 → 反：useless(adj.)无用的 →use(v.)(n.)使 用
三．重点短语通关
1.have to do with sb./sth. 和...有关系 2. mini-goal 小 目标
3.self-improvement 自我改进；自我提升 4.have ...in common 有...共同之处
5.hardly ever 几乎不 6.too...to..太…而不能 …
7.set a goal 设定目标 8.write down 写下；记下
9.remind sb.of sth.提醒某人关于某事 10.give advice on 就…给出建议
11.be tired of 对…感到厌倦 12.for the first time 第一 次
13.give up 放 弃 14.spare time to do sth. 抽出时间做某事
15.be happy to do sth.很高兴做某事 16.with one's help 在某人的帮助下
17.the final exam 期末考试 18.form good habits 养成还习惯
19.hope to do sth. 希望做某事 20.physical health 身体健康
21.promise to do sth.承诺做某事；答应做某事 22.take up 开始从事；开始认真对待
23.last but not least 最后
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
Making Resolutions
Do you know what a resolution is? A resolution is a promise that you
make to yourself. It's like a personal contract you sign, People make
resolutions to improve their life. The most common kind is a
NewYear's resolution.D. After all, the start of the year is often a
perfect time for making resolutions
Resolutions can be about anything. Some are about physical health.
For example, some people may promise to exercise more or eat more healthily. A . Some resolutions have to do with
learning new things. People might decide they are going to take up a hobby, like painting or photography. And
some resolutions have to do with self-improvement, like becoming more confident or organized.B. For example, a
student may decide to start a new study plan.
Although there are differences, most resolutions have one thing in common: people hardly ever keep them! But there
are good reasons for this. Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep. And sometimes people just forget
159新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
about them.
To make your resolutions work, you need to plan them wisely.Always make sure
your resolution is possible to achieve. Don't set a goal that is too difficult or too
much for you.C. Try to set mini-goals to help you achieve your resolution.
And if you don't want to forget your resolutions, write them down. Also, talk
about them with your family and friends.Encourage them to remind you of your goals. So what resolutions are you
going to make? How are you going to keep them?
【考点1.】were you able to stick to the plans ?你能够坚持你的计划吗？
【用法详解】1.be able to意为“能够”，相当于 can，常用来表示 can不能表达的将来时或完成时的情况，可用
于各种时态。
Eg:He will be able to finish reading the book next week. 他下周将能读完这本书。
相关拓展：can / be able to
① can＂能＂，表示过去或现在＂能力所及＂时，与be able to 通用。
② be able to的过去式还可表示一种＂经过努力做到了＂的意思。而can的过去式则没有这种意义。
③can通常只用于过去或现在两种时态，而be able to 则可用于各种时态。
④在表示猜测时，只能用can，而不能用be able to。
2.stick作动词，意为“粘贴；将……刺入”,其过去式和过去分词均为stuck。stick作名词，意为“枝条；棍”。
stick to 意为“坚持;维持”，后接名词/代词/v-ing，表示“坚持(计划、信念、原则等)”。
stick to doing sth 坚持做某事
Eg:Stick to your dream, and you'll succeed.坚持你的梦想，你会成功的。
Eg:He sticks to dancing,and finally succeed .他坚持跳舞，最后他成功了。
相关拓展：stick with继续做/支持
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Finish your homework first, then you’ll watch TV for an hour.
A. can B. be able to C. may D. could
（ B ） 3. I decided to stick to learning French despite the difficulties.
A. learning B. to learning C. learn D.learned
【考点2.】A resolution is a promise that you make to yourself。决心，是你对自己许的一个承诺。
【用法详解】promise作动词，意为“承诺;保证” 。作名词，意为“诺言”。是可数名词。
相关搭配：①promise (sb) to do sth 承诺(某人)做某事
Eg:He promised to teach me to ride.他承诺会教我骑车。
160新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
②promise (sb) that...承诺(某人)....
Eg:He promised that He would come to my wedding.他承诺他会来我的婚礼。
③ keep a promise 遵守诺言 break a promis e 违背诺言 mak e a promis e 许诺
Eg:He always keeps his promises.他总是信守诺言。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.He made a promise to his hometown during the holidays.
A. return B. to return C.returning D. returned
（ B ）2.They promised you as soon as possible.
A. contact B. to contact C.contacting D. contacted
（ A ）3.We should always _ our promises.
A. Keep B.make C.break D. promise
（ B ）4.John promised Mary_ _her a gift on her birthday.
A. Give B. to give C.giving D. gave
【考点3】After all,the start of the year is often a perfect time for making resolutions.
【用法详解】①Start在此作名词，意为“开头，开端”。
at the start of ... 在…的开始= at the beginning of .. .
Eg:At the start of this term, I found it hard to learn math. 这学期初，我发
现学习数学很难。
Eg:You can find this sentence at the beginning of this article. 你会在文章
开头找到这个句子。
②start作动词，意为“开始”。
相关搭配：start to do sth 开始做某事。强调开始做某事的动作（可能是一次性或具体的动作）。
Eg:The rain started to fall heavily.雨开始下得很大。
start doing sth 开始做某事。强调开始做某事的过程（或长期、习惯性的动作）。
Eg:He started learning street dance at the age of thirteen.他十三岁开始学习街舞。
③ It’s time for + 名词或名词短语 ，意为“时间是是做某事的时候了” =It’s time to do sth .
Eg:Whenever you want to start is the best time for starting.任何时候你想开始都是最好的时间。
牛
刀小试
1.It’s time for Chinese class. (填to还是for)
161新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
2.It’s time to play computer game.
( B )3.She started to classic music when she was young.
A. to listen B. listening C.listens D.to listen
【考点4.】some resolutions have to do with learning new things.很多决心都与学习新的事物有关。
【用法详解】have to do with意为“关于；与…有关系”。这个句型表示与某事、某人有牵连，有关系，有瓜葛。
Eg:What does this have to do with me? 这跟我有什么关系？
相关拓展：have nothing to do with 与……没关系
Eg:My brother has nothing to do with the fight. 我弟弟和打架没关系。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.Many projects have to do _________ the environment.
A. for B.in C.as D. with
【考点5.】people might decide they are going to take up a hobby,like painting or photography.人们可能
会决定他们将会开始一个像画画摄影这样的爱好。
【用法详解】①take up意为“学着做；开始做；从事” 。
take up doing sth 开始做某事
Eg: She wants to take up teaching English to little kids.
她想开始从事幼儿英语教学。
相关拓展：take up还有“占据；占用时间或空间”之意。
Eg: Learning English takes up a lot of my time. 学英语占了我许多时间。
②decide作动词，意为“决定”
相关搭配： decide to do sth .决定做某事 mak e a decision 作决定;下决心
Eg: He decided to learn medicine.他决定学医。
Eg: He made a decision to go aboard.他决定出国。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.Sandy seldom goes out at weekends because reading ________ most of her free time.
A. takes up B. takes on C. takes off D. takes out
（ A ）2.The meeting took up most of the afternoon.
A.up B. on C. off D. out
（ B ）3.She wants to take up English to improve herself.
162新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A.learns B. learning C.to learn D. learn
（ C ）4.My brother decided when he was free.
A.cook B.cooking C.to cook D. cooks
5.we made a decision to give a surprise to our teacher.(decide)
【考点6】Sometimes the resolutions may be too difficult to keep.有的时候决心有可能太难而不能坚持。
【用法详解】 too … to … 是＂太……以致不能……＂，to是不定式符号，后接动词原形，该句式虽没有否定词not/
no，但表达否定意义，若逻辑主语是动作的执行者，则需用 for 引出。
Eg:English is too difficult for me to read. 对我来说英语太难了。
相关拓展：①too…to…可转化为复合句 so…that… 句型，此时that从句的谓
语动词要用否定形式。
Eg:The problem is too difficult for me to work out.=The problem is so difficult
that I can’t work it out.解决这个问题对我来说太难了。
②too…to…还可转化为＂ not+ 形容词 / 副词 +enough to do ＂，其中形容词/副词是句型too…to…中形容词/副词
的反义词。
Eg:His son is too young to go to school.= His son is not old enough to go to school.他的儿子还不够年龄去上学。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.He is fat get into the room.
A.to; too B.too; to C.too; too D.to; to
( C )2.The house is big for me _.
A.too much…live B.too much…to live C.much too…to live in D.much too…living
( A )3.He was tired go on walking.
A.too; to B.such; that C.so; that D.such; such
( B )4 .I got up _ early_ I caught the first bus.
A.so; as B.so; that C.such; as D.such; that
( D )5 .It is a heavy stone I can't lift it up.
A.so; that B.such; but C.so; and D.such; that
【考点7.】Encourage them to remind you of your goals. 鼓励他们提醒你你的目标。
【用法详解】1.remind在此处用作及物动词，意为“提醒；使想起”,后跟名词或代词作宾语，常与介词 about
或 of 连用。
相关搭配：①remind sb of sb/sth 使某人想起某人/某物
163新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:His song reminds me of my old days.他的歌让我想起了我的旧时光。
②remind sb to do sth 提醒某人做某事
Eg:He reminds me to bring a cup of coffee to him . 他提醒我给他带一杯咖啡。
2.encourage作动词，意为“鼓励；激励”。
相关搭配： encourage sb to do sth 鼓励某人做某事。
Eg:Teachers encourage students to ask questions.老师们鼓励学生提出问题。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.Before I left, my mom reminded me ______ turn off the lights.
A; to B. of C. for D. about
( B )2.The smell of coffee reminded me ______ some on my way home.
A.buy B. to buy C. buying D.bought
( A )3.My mother always encourages me again when I make mistakes.
A. to try B. try C. trying D. tries
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( A )1．—It’s a fine day. Let’s _________ the city park—Good idea.
A．clean up B．take up C．give up D．put up
( A )2．Our Chinese teacher often asks us to ________ what we read with each other in class.
A．discuss B．match C．chat D．decide
( B )3．—Are you going out with Jade tonight?—That’s my ________. Mind your own!
A．offer B．business C．question D．chance
( B )4．The children had a picnic yesterday. They enjoyed ________.
A．himself B．themselves C．himselves D．themself
( B )5．—I can't wear the mask, it's too hot.—For your health, I'm afraid you ________.
A．may B．have to C．can D．need
( C )6．— There ________ a talk about science in our school next week.— Sounds cool.
A．be B．have C．is going to be D．is going to have
( D )7．— What are you ________ in the future?— Maybe a doctor.
A．will be B．going to do C．going be D．going to be
164新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )8．He left school and began to work ________ twelve.
A．at the age of B．at the beginning of C．at the top of D．at the bottom of
( B )9．—Some Chinese government officers have turned into live streamers(网络主播).
—Yes. They are trying their best to help local farmers to ________ products(产品) sales(销售量).
A．compare B．improve C．afford D．provide
( D )10．—What _______ you _______ this afternoon?—I plan to climb the mountain with my friends.
A．do；do B．have；done C．did；do D．are；going to do
二、完型填空
My grandpa's 88th birthday is coming. We are going to have a great birthday party for 11 . All of my family
members are going to the party. The party is in Bridge Town. Grandpa was born and 12 there. He always wants to
go back to have a look. Now we help him make his 13 . come true. Grandpa must be very 14 .
Uncle Bob is a great 15 in a restaurant. He is going to do all the dishes at the party. I'm sure he will give us a
great 16 . Each of the family members will 17 Grandpa a gift. 18 the youngest grandson, I have a gift for
Grandpa too. I'm making a model plane. Grandpa was a 19 . He spent all his youth flying planes. He must love the
gift. Oh, I tell you too much. You must 20 you won't tell Grandpa. They are secrets.
( B )11．A．her B．him C．you D．them
( D )12．A．made up B．put up C．took up D．grew up
( C )13．A．problem B．team C．dream D．plan
( B )14．A．rich B．excited C．serious D．simple
( A )15．A．cook B．pianist C．artist D．actor
( D )16．A．program B．show C．movie D．meal
( C )17．A．paint B．improve C．send D．discuss
( A )18．A．As B．With C．For D．To
( B )19．A．teacher B．pilot C．scientist D．doctor
( D )20．A．wonder B．mind C．expect D．promise
三、阅读单选
A
Good study habits are important for all students. When you have good study habits, you will learn faster and
find you have a good memory (记忆).
Do you usually study in the living room? This is not a good place for study because it is usually too noisy. You
need to study in a quiet place, such as your bedroom. A quiet place will help you learn better.
165新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Before you begin to study, do not forget to clean your desk. It helps you study well, too. Light(光线) is important,
too You will feel tired easily if there is not enough light.
Of all the good study habits developing asking questions is the key. Just ask. No one knows everything .but we
can always learn from each other by asking questions.
One simple but important habit is to tell yourself what you are studying for. Put your dream grades(理想的分
数)on the wall next to your bed or computer. It means (意味着)you will see and think about it every day.
When do you work best? Are you an early bird or a night owl(猫头鹰), or something in between? Find your most
productive work time and then plan to study at this time.
( C )21．Why is the living room not a good place for study?
A．Because it is too quiet. B．Because it is too small. C．Because it is too noisy.
( A )22．According to the passage. What should you do before you study?
A．Clean the desk. B．Put your story books away. C．Turn on the 1ight.
( C )23．Why should we put your dream grade on the wall?
A．To make us happy. B．To develop a good study habit. C．To remind(提醒) us what weare studying for.
( A )24．What is the Chinese meaning Of the underline word “productive”?
A．有效的 B．有趣的 C．精彩的
( B )25．What is the best title for important?
A．Study in the bedroom B．Good habits are very important C．How to study.
B
A large group of people came together at Tian’anmen Square in Beijing on Tuesday evening, Oct. 1st to
celebrate the 70th anniversary of the founding of the People’s Republic of China.
A group of teenagers sang the classic song Me and My Motherland as they walked past the Golden Water Bridge
at the foot of the Tian’anmen Rostrum.
“The teenagers suddenly appeared and started the gala(晚会) . People came and sang along with them. As more
people joined the crowd, it was very touching, ”Zhang Yimou, the chief director of the gala told Xinhua News Agency.
“The gathering of people highlighted the lively atmosphere of the new age.”
The Tuesday evening gala created quite a rock on social media.Thousands of people discussed it online. One
person wrote：“It’s a great show for the country’s birthday.”Another praised the music：“The song Me and My
Motherland actually fills me with pride.”
The song Me and My Motherland was created by Zhang Li and Qing Yongcheng in 1985 and was first performed
by Chinese singer Li Guyi. It has been popular with Chinese audiences for generations.
166新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
“I have adapted the song into four different versions in the past six months, ”said Huang Kairan, composer(作曲
家)of the China National Symphony Orchestra(交响乐团). We sang it together to express our best wishes for the
country.”
More than 1, 000 musicians across the country and a large choir(合唱团) including more than 1, 400 primary and
middle school students performed together.
( D )26．Who sang the song Me and My Motherland and started the gala?
A．A group of soldiers. B．A famous singer.
C．A teacher and his students. D．A group of teenagers.
( D )27．The song Me and My Motherland was created by ________.
A．Zhang Li B．Qing Yongcheng C．Li Guyi D．Zhang Li and Qing Yongcheng
( A )28．What does the underlined word “highlighted”probably mean?
A．brought out B．took out C．began with D．lived with
( B )29．It took the composer Huang Kairan ________ to adapt the song into four different versions.
A．three months B．six months C．one year D．two years
( B )30．What’s the best title of the passage?
A．The Most Wonderful Spring Festival Gala B．Singing the Song to Bless Our Country
C．The Song We Like Best D．The Great Director Zhang Yimou
When your dream is to become a footballer(足球运动员),nothing should get in your way—even if you have no
feet.
Gabriel Muniz,an 11yearold Brazil kid,was born without feet.Although his family thought he would have serious
difficulties living a normal life,he started walking before he was one year old.His mother would go after him,expecting
him to keep falling,but he never fell.It took him a while to make the jump from walking to playing football,but he did
make it. And in fact,there's nothing he loves more than playing football.In his school,the skillful young man is not only
the best player in his school team but also the captain of his gym team.
He knows that his disability means he'll never be able to play for a professional football team.So Gabriel is
hoping that football will one day become a Paralympic(残奥会的)sport.He proves to everyone there he can go head to
head(正面交手)with any other boy.Watching him play is unbelievable.He's fast and he's got a big bag of tricks—he's
very skilled and he does everything he can to copy his idol Messi so much that he is invited to go to Spain to meet his
idol Messi and show his talent in the Barcelona Football Club.
His coach says he is proving the disability only exists inside our heads and he is challenging(挑战)the social
norms．
167新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )31．What's wrong with Gabriel Muniz?
A．He was born without feet. B．He can't see and hear anything.
C．He often argues with his partners. D．He always gives trouble to his family.
( D )32．According to the passage we can know that Gabriel Muniz ________．
A．thinks others look down upon him B．is a professional football player
C．prefers playing for a club D．is a skillful football player
( C )33．In the passage the underlined word “norms” has the same meaning of ________．
A．advice B．habits C．rules D．progress
( C )34．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A．The boy's family was surprised that he could walk well.
B．The boy wants to play football in the Paralympics.
C．The boy has too many difficulties living a normal life.
D．The society has noticed the boy's hard job and talent.
( A )35．What is the best title of the passage?
A．The Power of the Dream B．The Most Popular Sports
C．A Disabled Boy and His Hero D．Practice Makes Perfect
D
Hobbies and Dreams
Name Hobby Dream How to make his/ her dream come true
Practice singing in the school music club
Ted Music Be a popular singer and take part in the city’s singing competition
next year
Katrina Dancing Work as a dancer in London Go to the dancing club to practice dancing
Isabel Playing sports Be a runner in the national team Join a sports club this term
Go to China to study Chinese medicine next
Hector Traveling Work as a doctor in Beijing
year
Be a great basketball player like
Bob Playing sports Join a basketball club and exercise every day
Lin Shuhao
( D )36．Katrina wants to work as a __________ in England.
A．doctor B．runner C．singer D．dancer
168新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )37．Both Isabel and Bob like __________.
A．traveling B．playing sports C．music D．dancing
( A )38．__________ wants to work in China when he grows up.
A．Hector B．Ted C．Bob D．Isabel
( B )39．There is going to be a __________ in Ted’s city next year.
A．basketball game B．singing competition
C．running competition D．dancing competition
( C )40．From the above information we know that __________.
A．Ted is going to study Chinese medicine next year
B．Isabel likes traveling very much
C．Bob wants to be a great basketball player
四、阅读回答问题
Jack and Hob are going to high school now. Jack wants to be an engineer. He is going to build roads, bridges
and houses. Hob is interested in math and science, but he is going to study medicine. He wants to be a doctor.
Kate is good at music. She wants to be a musician. She is going to write music for people. Joan wants to be a
woman astronaut(宇航员). She says, "I am going to explore space some day." "What do you want to be, Alice?" Joan
asks me. "Oh, I want to be a teacher. When I grow up, I'm going to teach in the mountain village."
Each of us is doing our best at school. I am sure we will do something good for our country.
51．How many students are mentioned(被提到) in the article ?
Fiv e
52．Who wants to be a musician?
Kate
53．What is Hob going to study?
Medicin e
54．What does Joan want to be?
An astronau t
55．Where is Alice going to teach?
__In the mountain village
六、补全对话7选5
A: Hi, Anna. What are you doing?
B: Oh, I'm reading a book, Lao She's Tea house.
169新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A: 56 ． F
B: Yes, reading helps me a lot. 57 ． A
A: Really？ 58 ． G
B: I am going to keep reading and writing stories. What do you want to be?
A: 59 ． D But my parents want me to be a policeman.
B: Don't worry. 60 ． B Just find your interest and try your best.
A: Yes, you are right.
A．I want to be a writer.
B．Not everyone knows what they will be.
C．Why are you going to be a writer?
D．I want to be a teacher.
E.Are you good at writing?
F.You really like reading books!
G.How are you going to make your dream come true?
七．. 用所给单词的适当形式填空
1. Tom,does your maths teacher often ask you to think by yoursel f (you)and then discuss with group
members?
2.His grandfather has a good lifestyle and eats healthily (healthy)every day.
3.He wants to become more organize d (organize)in the new year.
4.Beethoven is a great musicia n (music).He has many wonderful works.
5.Jack is very confiden t (confidence)about his future because he studies hard every day.
7.The young lady is a famous designe r (design).
8.The man is my favourite directo r (direct).I like all of his films.
9.Those fireme n (fireman)tried their best to put out the fire in that old building.
9.It's impossibl e (possible)for me to finish the work in two days.I need another two days.
八、书面表达
假设今天的英语课上大家都在讨论“Dream Job”。你对此有什么想法呢？请根据下面的提示，写一篇短文
谈论一下你理想的职业，与大家分享。
提示：1. What's your dream job？
2. Why do you want to do it？
3. How are you going to make your dream come true？
……
要求：1. 语句通顺、符合逻辑，可适当发挥；
170新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
2. 不少于65词。开头已给出，不计入总词数。
Dream Job
Do you know what I want to be when I grow up ？ I want to be a tour guide. I'm outgoing and I like traveling. Another
reason is that I want to learn more about different countries and different people. So I think working as a tour guide
will be a perfect job for me.
To make my dream come true ， I'm going to study more foreign languages. And I will go to university to learn how to
be a tour guide. I believe that I can be an excellent tour guide in the future ！
Unit 7 When Tomorrow Comes
Section A What are your predictions about the future ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1.prediction/prɪ'dɪkʃn/n. 预测；预言 2.outer /'autə(r)/adj. 外围的；外表的
3.worse/w3:s/adj.(bad的比较级)更差的；更坏的；更糟的adv.(badly的比较级)更糟；更坏
4.sci-fi/'saɪ faɪ/n.(=science fiction)科幻小说(或影片等) 5.ticket/'tɪkɪt/n. 票；券
6.positive /'pɒzətɪv/adj. 乐观的；积极的；良好的
7.traffic /'træfɪk/n. 交通；运输 v. (非法)进行交 易；做买卖
8.technology /tek'nɒlədʒi/n.科技；工艺
9.video/'vidiəu/n. 视频；录像系统v. 录视频； 给…….录像
10.transport n./'trænspɔ:t/ 交通运输系统；旅行方 式 v./træen'spɔ:t/ 运输；运送
171新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
11.system /'sɪstəm/n. 系统 12.efficient /ɪ'fiʃnt/adj. 高效的；有功效的
13.education/,edʒu'keɪʃn/n. 教育 14.length/leŋθ/n.时长；长度
15.topic /'topɪk/n. 话题；题目；标题 16.partner /'pa:tnə(r)/n.搭档；同伴
17.shall/ʃəl;ʃæl/modal v.(should /ʃud/) 将；将要 18.pass /pa:s/v. 及格；通过 n. 及格；通行证
19.winner /'wɪnə(r)/n. 优胜者；成功者 20.cure /kjuə(r)/n. 药物；疗法 v. 治愈；治好
21.cancer/'kænsə(r)/n. 癌症 22.concert/'kɒnsət/n. 音乐会；演奏会
23.cash /kæʃ/n. 现金；金钱 v. 兑 现 24.wallet /'wɒlit/n.钱包；皮夹
二．重点词汇变形
1.prediction(n.)预测；语言→predict(v.)预测
2.worse（adj.）更糟的→ worst 最糟糕的（最高级）→ 原级bad (adj.) 差的；坏的→ badl y（adv.）坏地；差地
3.positive(adj.)乐观的；积极的→positively (adv.) 乐观地 → 反：negative (adj.) 消极的；负面的
4.efficient(adj.)效率高的；有功效的→efficiently(adv.)高效率地 →efficiency(n.)效率
5.education(n.)教育 →educator(n.) 教育家 →educational(adj.) 有教育意义的 →educate(v.) 教育
6.length(n.)时长；长度→long(adj.)长的；很久的
7.winner(n.)优胜者；成功者→win(v.)赢得；获胜
三．重点短语通关
1. make predictions about the future 对未来作出预测 2. prepare for the future 为未来做准备
3. come true 实现 4. agree with s b./sth. 同意某人/某事
5.in outer space 在外太空 6. take over 接替；接管；接收
7.come out 出现；出版；发行 8. invite sb . to do sth . 邀请某人做某事
9.climate change 气候变化 10. In the future 在将来
11. find ways to do sth . 找到做某事的方法 12.make the earth a better place 把地球变成更好的
13. an exciting sci - fi film 一部激动人心的科幻电影 14. keep my eyes open 使保持我的眼睛睁开
15. what ' s up 怎么了，什么事 16. the transport system 交通系统
17. sounds great 听起来不错 19.traffic accidents 交通意外
20. be positive about sth . 对...持乐观态度
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Helen:Hi,Jennifer. What's up?
172新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Jennifer: Oh, hi, Helen. I'm watching a video about future predictions.
Helen: So, what will the future be like?
Jennifer: Well, there will be more people in cities , but the transport system will be
more efficient. It means that there will be fewer traffic accidents.
Helen: Sounds great! Any other predictions?
Jennifer:Students probably won't go to a school in the future. They will study at
home or any place they want.
Helen: Oh, but I really like going to school! Anything
else?
Jennifer: And people will live longer.
Helen: Really?Why?
Jennifer: Because we'll have better health care technology in our homes. Machines will
tell us how to solve small health problems before they become bigger.
Helen:That'll be great. How long will most people live?
Jennifer; Well, more people will live to be over 100 years old. Some may even live to be 150.
Helen:Wow, that sounds wonderful!
【考点1.】Which of the predictions do you think will come true in 100 years ?你认为在100年以后以下
哪一个预期将会实现？
【用法详解】“in+时间段”表示“ 在 .. 之后 ”;常用于一般将来时。对“in+时间段”的提问，使用how soon 意为
“还要多久”。in three days 三天后，in two weeks 两周后，in 100years100年后。
Eg:I think there will be more pollution in 50 years.我认为50年后会有更多的污染。
Eg: How soon will you finish your homework?你多久能完成作业?
---in an hour 一个小时以后
相关拓展：“for+时间段”表示“做某事持续多久”。常用于现在完成时。对
“for+时间段”的提问，使用 how long 意为“多久”。
Eg: My brother danced for 2 hours yesterday.我弟弟昨天练舞了两个小时。
Eg: How long has Sean exercised on Sunday.肖恩周天锻炼了多久?
---for two hours.两个小时。
牛
刀小试
( B )1. will you go to school? ---in a week.
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D. How far
173新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( A )2. will you stay in Beijing? ---For about a week.
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D. How many
( B )3. can we expect to hear from you again?---In a couple of days.
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D. How fast
( D )4.-- is it from your home to the school?---About ten minutes' walk.
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D. How far
( B )5. does the train leave for Shanghai?---In half an hour.
A.How long B. How soon C. How often D. How many times
【考点2.】AI and robots will take over boring work.所有的机器人将接替无聊的工作。
【用法详解】take over意为“接替；接管；接收”
Eg:Miss Li took over our class when we entered grade 3.三年级后李老师接管了我们班。
相关搭配:take over from sb 接替某人
Eg:He took over the basketball match from me .他接替我继续篮球比赛。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.The new worker will the project next week.
A.take over B. take off C. take up D.take away
( C )2.He_ _ __ _ his brother's duties during the vacation.
A. took down B. took after C. took over D.take out
【考点3.】A new sci-fi film is coming out .一部新的科幻电影正在热映。
【用法详解】①come out意为“ 出版 ； 发布 ； 上映 ”。
Eg:His new movie will come out next week.他的新电影下周上映。
②come out意为“ 出现 ； 出来 ”。
Eg:The stars came out as the sky darkened.天空变暗后，星星出现 。
③come out意为“ 揭露 ； 曝光 ”。
Eg:The truth came out in the news yesterday.昨天新闻曝光了事件的真相。
④come out意为“ 结果是 . ..”。
Eg:Everything came out well in the end.最终一切都很顺利。
⑤come out意为“开花；盛开”
Eg:Jasmines will come out in Summer .茉莉会在夏天盛开。
牛
刀小试
174新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )1.Spring is coming,the flowers will
A. come on B. come out C. come over D.come up
( D )2.The film acted by WangYiBo was last year.
B. came on B. come out C. come om D.came out
【考点4.】So what will the future be like? 所以未来将会是什么样的？
【用法详解】①like作介词,译为“像,类似”。Be like问“内在”,用于描述内在特质(性格、行为等) 。
①对性格,品质进行提问 What is/are sb . like? 某人是什么样的人?
Eg:What is she like?她是什么样的人?
---She is quiet她很文静
②:look like问“外在”仅指视觉可见的外貌特征。对外貌进行提问 What do/ does
sb . look like? 某人长什么样?
Eg:What does he look like?他长得什么样?
---He has two big eyes.他有两个大眼睛.
③.作为动词,译为"喜欢"。询问某人喜欢什么? What do/ does sb.like? 某人喜欢什么?
Eg:What does he like?他喜欢什么?----- He likes camping with all things.他喜欢搬家露营.
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1. - What does your brother look like? ------ .
A. He likes football B. He is tall and thin C.He is kind D. He is at home
（ C ）2. -Can you tell me -- ---He’s active and energetic.
A. What does he like B.What he likes C. What he is like. D. What is he like
（ B ）3.-What does your new friend look like? ------ _ .
A.He is from Australia B. He is tall and of medium build
C. He is very nice to others D. He has a pair of blue shoes
【考点5.】It means that there will be fewer traffic accidents. 这就意味着交通事故会更少。
【用法详解】fewer意为“更少的”。是few的比较级形式。修饰可数名词。
Eg:There will be fewer mistakes if you more careful.如果你更认真的话就会犯更少的错。
相关拓展：①less意为“更少的”。是little的比较级形式。修饰不可数名词。
Eg:More and more people go out by bike to make less pollution .越来越多多的人骑车
出行来减少污染。
②辨析 little, a little, few, a few
175新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
a few 意为“有一些;有几个"，表示肯定的意义。修饰可数名词。
few 意为“没有，几乎没有"，表示否定的意义。修饰可数名词。
a little 意为“有一点，有一些”，表示肯定的意义。修饰不可数名词。
little 意为“几乎没有”，表示否定的概念。修饰不可数名词。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.To make mistakes,I think you should be careful with your homework.
A. Less, much more B.fewer ,much more C. less,many much D.fewer ,many more
( B )2. There were _ rainy days this month than last month.
A. Less B.fewer C. little D.few
( A )3. It took me than an hour to complete my homework.
A. Less B.fewer C. little D.few
( C )4. My little sister has__less money in her piggy bank than I do.
A. more B.fewer C. less D.few
( A )5. The swimming pool has water than it did last week.
A. Less B.fewer C. more D.few
【考点6.】Machines will tell us how to solve small health problems before they become bigger。机器会在
小的健康问题变大之前告诉人们如何解决。
【用法详解】tell 作动词，意为“告诉；讲述”，
相关搭配：tell sb(not) to do sth 告诉某人做(不做)某事
Eg:My teacher told us not to eat in class.我的老师告诉我们不要在课堂上吃东西。
tell sb sth=tell sth to sb 告诉某人某事
Eg: Please, tell me the truth.求你，把真相告诉我。
tell sb.+ 宾语从句告诉某人....
Eg: She tells me(that) She will be our new English teacher.她告诉我
她将会是我们的新英语老师。
tell sb+特殊疑问词+to do告诉某人...
Eg: He told me how to get there.昨天他告诉我怎么去哪儿?
相关拓展：tell a story 讲故事 tell the truth 说实话 tel l
the world 郑重声明 tell a lie 说谎;撒谎
牛
刀小试
176新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( D )1.Can you_ me the way to the bakery?
A.say B.speak C.talk D.tell
( C )2.Sugar likes to jokes when she meets us.
A.speak B.say C.tell D.talk
( A )3.Tiny can English very well.
A.speak B.say C.tell D.talk
( A )4.We should hello to our friends and teachers when we meet them.
A.say B.speak C.talk D.tell
( B )5.My brother told me playing basketball more can keep fit.
A. practise B. to practise C. practising D. practise
【考点7.】How long will most people live ?人们将会活多久？
【用法详解】①how long指多长时间，主要用来对一段时间(如three days, four weeks 等)提问,常用“for+时间
段”或“since+时间点”回答。
Eg:How long have you known him?你认识他有多久了?
For six years.六年了。
②how long可以用来提问具体物体的长度。
Eg:How long is the board?这条木板有多长? About one meter.大约一米。
相关拓展：how long、how soon、how often、how far
常用“for+一段时间”或“since+时间点”
how long 多久;多长时间 常对时间段提问
“since+时间段+ago”来回答
对“in+时间段”提问，常用
how soon 多久以后 其答语常用“in+时间段”
于一般将来时态的句子中
其答语常用“once(twice/….)+时间段”，
how often 多久一次 对频率提问
always，often等频度副词
其答语是表距离的内容
how far 多远 对距离提问 Five kilometers五公里
Five minutes’ walk 五分钟的路
牛
刀小试
( D )1.- has he studied English. He has studied English for ten years .
177新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A. how much B. how far C. how many D. how long
( B )2.-_ _ _is it from here to our school?一It is five kilometers from here to our school.
A. how much B. how far C. how many D. how long
( B )3.-____will the bus leave Nanjing for Shanghai?-The bus will leave Nanjing for Shanghai in a moment.
A. how much B. how soon C. how many D. how long
( C )4. -Tom, your teeth look so nice.____do you brush your teeth?-Twice or more a day.
A. How many times B. How long C. How often D. How soon
( A )5.-___has Hong Kong been back to our motherland?-For 22 years. How time flies!
A. How long B. How soon C. How often D.How much
四．单元重点语法讲练
一般将来时
一、语法概述
一般将来时表示将来某个时间要发生的动作，事情或存在的状态，也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作或事情。
及计划、打算或准备做某事。常常与表示将来的时间状语连用。 如： tomorrow, next day(week, month ,
year…),soon, the day after tomorrow( 后天 ) 等。
其基本结构主要有“be going to+动词原形”和“ will+ 动词原形 ”。
will本身没有人称和数的变化，常缩写
为’ll，其否定形式为will not，常缩写为
won’t 。
二、一般将来时的基本结构
类型 结构 例句
肯定句 主语 +will+ 动词原形 + 其他 . People will have robots in their homes in the
future.将来人们家里会有机器人。
否定句 主语 +won ’ t+ 动词原形 + 其他 . People won ’ t have robots in their homes in the
future.将来人们家里不会有机器人。
一般疑问句 Will+ 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他？ —Will people have robots in their homes in
及其肯定、 肯定回答： Yes , 主语 +will . the future?将来人们家里会有机器人吗？
否定回答 否定回答： No , 主语 +won ’ t . —Yes, they will.是的，他们会有。
No, they won’t.不，他们不会有。
特殊疑问句 特殊疑问词 +will+ 主语 + 动词原形 + 其他？ Why will people hav e robots in their homes in
the future? 为什么将来人们家里会有机器人
呢？
178新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
根据所给提示，完成句子（每空一词，含缩略词）。
1.My brother will go to the movies this evening. (改为否定句)
My brother wo n ’ t g o to the movies this evening.
2.They will study at home on computers this Saturday. (改为一般疑问句）
Wil l they stud y at home on computers this Saturday?
3I will finish reading the novel in two weeks . (对划线部分提问）
How soo n will you finish reading the novel?
三、一般将来时的用法
①“will+动词原形”常与表示将来的时间状语连用，如 tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next year, in
the future等。
②一般现在时有时也可表示将来，表示按照时间表将要发生的动作或事件，或者事先安排好的动作。有此用法
的动词主要有：be, arrive, begin, come, start, leave, go等
Eg.The train leaves at 9:00 p.m.火车将于晚上九点出发。
③表示位置移动的动词，如go, leave, start, come, arrive, reach等，可用现在进行时表示按计划或安排将要发
生的动作。
Eg.My father is coming to see me. 我父亲就要来看我了。
相关拓展：there be句型的一般将来时结构
there be句型的一般将来时结构有两种，即：
句型 There will be + 主语 + 其他. There is/are going to be + 主语 + 其他
否定句 There w on ’ t be + 主语 + 其他. There is n ’ t /are n ’ t going to be + 主语 + 其他
一般疑问句 Will there be + 主语 + 其他? Is/Are there going to be + 主语 + 其他?
肯定回答 Yes, there will. Yes, there is/are.
否定回答 No, there won’t. No, there isn’t/aren’t.
注意：there be句型和have不可共存。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.There a football match in our school tomorrow.
A. will have B. will be C. is D.is going to have
( A )4.There a food festival in our school next weekend.
A. is going to be B. are going to be C. is going to have D.are going to have
179新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
四、“be going to+动词原形”与“will+动词原形”的区别
1.be going to含有“计划；准备”的意思，而will则没有这个意思。
Eg.He is going to act a sci-fi film .他打算演一部科幻电影。
2.在含有条件状语从句的复合句中，主句一般不用be going to，而多用will。
Eg.If you have problems, I’ll stay with you and help you.如果你有困难，我会和你在一起并且帮助你。
3.“be going to+动词原形”表示根据目前迹象推断将要发生的事情；“will+动词原形”表示客观上将来势必
发生的事情。
Eg.Look at the dark clouds! It’s going to rain! 看那些乌云！就要下雨 了！
He will be twenty-eight years old next year. 明年他就28岁了。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.—The coffee’s finished!—Oh, sorry! I ________to the shop to get some.
A. am going B. was going C. went D. have gone
( C )2.John________ us when he is free.
A. joins B. join C. will join D. joined
( C )3.—What are you expecting to do when the flu stops spreading?
—I ________ the world and enjoy different food.
A. go around B. have been on a tour of C. will travel around
( C )4.—I to Hainan on vacation with my parents this coming summer holiday.—That's great!
A. go B. went C. will go D. have gone
( B )5.—Is Helen here?—Not yet, but she______________ in half hour.
A.arrives B. will arrive C. arrived D. has arrived
( A )6．—I wonder if you ________ us for the English party tomorrow.—If I ________ free, I will go with you.
A．will join, am B．will join, will be C．join, am
( C )7． There ________ a concert in our school hall next week.
A．is B．was C．will be D．will have
( C )8． —Is Helen here?—No, she isn’t here, She ________ in half an hour.
A．arrives B．arrived C．will arrive D．has arrived
( D )9． —Has your father come back yet?—No. He ________ come back ________ this Sunday.
A．doesn’t; until B．won’t; after C．doesn’t; after D．won’t; until
( D )10． We have no more vegetables in the fridge. I _____and buy some.
A．go B．went C．will go D．was going
180新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
用所给单词的适当形式填空
1．My mother will be (be) back in two days.
2．There wil l b e (be) heavy snow tomorrow.
3．He too k (take) the train to school yesterday.
4．The builders built many buildings (build) in our city last year.
5．We can do the work with les s (little) money and fewe r (few) people than they can.
6．They wo n ’ t hav e ( not have ) any classes next week.
7．Betty __ will write (write) to her parents tomorrow.
8．Look at those clouds. It goin g t o rai n (rain).
9．He i s readin g ( read ) an English book now.
10．Look! Many girls are dancing (dance) over there.
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( B ) 1．—Is Jack here?—Not yet, but he _________ in half an hour.
A．arrives B．will arrive C．arrived D．has arrived
( C ) 2．—Can I see the headmaster now?
—I’m afraid you can’t. He ________ a meeting. He ________ back in 10 minutes. You can wait for
him in his office.
A．will have; will come B．will have; comes C．is having; will come D．is having; comes
( D ) 3．My father ________ us a speech in our school next week.
A．give B．gave C．was giving D．will give
( C ) 4．— Do you think ________ an art show next week?— Yes, I think so.
A．there have B．there will have C．there will be D．there is going to have
( C ) 5．—Is Jim still angry ________ you?—No. We made peace ________ each other yesterday.
A．at; with B．with; at C．with; with D．about; with
( C ) 6．I want to know if Mary ________ to the party tomorrow.
A．go B．went C．will go D．goes
( B ) 7．—The air is very fresh in our city. There is less _______ than before.
—Yes. The government has taken action to protect the environment.
A．wood B．pollution C．noise D．water
( C ) 8．—Who ______ folk songs at the concert? —Sorry, but I am going tomorrow. I like folk
181新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
music.
A．sings B．sang C．will sing D．sings
( B ) 9．---What will the future ________?---Cities will be more ________.
A．like; pollute B．be like; polluted C．like; pollution D．be like; pollution
( C ) 10．We will try our best to do the work with_________ money and _______ people.
A．few; little B．a few; a little C．less; fewer D．fewer; less
二、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1.This book is really education al (education).Students can learn a lot from it.
2..She passed (pass)all the tests and became the winne r (win)of the competition.
3.The young professor Gui Haichao got the chance to go into outer (out)space through hard training.
4.I spent one night's time making some videos (video)about the story to take part in the “Tell China's
Stories”competition.
5. Futurists (future)say robots will be a large part of life.
三、从方框中选择合适的单词并用其适当形式填空
traffic long positive technology shall
1.The length
of the report must be at least 5 minutes.
2.Training your mind to think positive ly is a good way to live happily.
3.Luckily,we're in the age of AI technology .Everything can be smart.
4. S hall we buy some colourful stars and flowers to decorate the house,Mum?
5.There is so much traffic on the road today that I am late for school.
四、完型填空
There are many kinds of pollution around us, 1 air pollution, soil pollution, noise pollution and light
pollution. They are bad 2 our health in many ways.
Burning gas, oil and coal creates air pollution. It can cause sore eyes and breathing problems.
In our life, litter(废弃物)is everywhere. It 3 our environment dirty. People put lots of rubbish in the land. Pilots use
too many chemicals in the fields. They do harm to the soil. So soil pollution is becoming more and more 4 .
Noise pollution can make people deaf. For example, people may lose their hearing if they work in a 5 place for a
long time. 6 noise can cause high blood pressure (血压)as well.
182新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
7 for a long time in strong light may cause some other problems. It makes people feel 8 and the eyes can be
very uncomfortable.
With 9 pollution, our planet will become greener and our health 10 better. Let's be greener people.
（ A ）1．A．such as B．for example C．as well as D．because of
（ C ） 2．A．to B．in C．for D．of
（ A ） 3．A．makes B．helps C．gives D．lets
（ A ） 4．A．serious B．important C．clear D．dangerous
（ B ）5．A．Noise B．noisy C．quiet D．quietly
（ C ）6．A．Much too B．Many too C．Too much D．Too many
（ A ）7．A．Working B．Work C．Worked D．Works
（ C ）8．A．comfortable B．possible C．terrible D．ugly
（ B ）9．A．little B．less C．few D．fewer
（ A ）10．A．will be B．would be C．was D．is
五、阅读单选
A
As time goes by, everything in our life improves. Do you want to know about what our homes will be like in the
future? Here are some predictions(预测)：
Want to take a shower when you get home? You’ll be able to let your smart (智能)water heater(热水器)start
heating up when you’re on your way home.
Did I turn off the oven? Did I close the window? Everyone may have a moment like that. But in the future, your
home will check these for you.
In your home of the future, all of your devices (设备) can work together to make your life more comfortable.
When you turn on the lights in the morning, your windows will open at the same time. The lights will slowly turn off
by themselves after the sun appears.
Your home may have dangers. The hackers(黑客)could open your door and bring a loss(损失)at your home
through your phone or other devices. Your home will tell you about it, but you can’t arrive in time. So people will have
to be careful of their personal information.
( C )1．What can we do on our way home in the future?
A．Take a shower. B．Keep working.
C．Let the water heater work. D．Have a look at our smart home devices.
( D )2．What will our life be like in the future in smart homes?
183新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．More boring. B．Very busy.
C．Very Safe. D．More comfortable.
( A )3．Who will let you know if someone breaks into your home in the future?
A．Your home. B．Your neighbor.
C．Your phone. D．Your friend.
( C )4．How many kinds of predictions are mentioned(提到)in the passage?
A．Two. B．Three. C．Four. D．Five.
( B )5．What’s the best title of the passage?
A．Some Beautiful Houses B．Homes of the Future
C．A Better World D．Some Famous Predictions
B
Do you want to know what our life will be like in the future? Let’s have a look. You may get a surprise.
You will go to the kitchen when you are hungry. You will give orders to the kitchen robot. The robot will cook the
food for you in a few minutes. Then it will bring it to you.
In the kitchen you will find a special food machine. The food machine will tell you what your body needs. It will
help you eat healthily. The food machine will be connected with(连接) the kitchen robot. The robot can get messages
from the food machine.
After having a meal, you can go to your home office. You will work at home and you don’t need to go out to
work any more.
You will have a special information screen. You can get any information on the screen. When you receive a
message from a friend in America, your information screen will be turned on automatically(自动地).Your friend’s face
appears on the screen. Then you can talk to your friend easily.
( B )51．What is the second paragraph (段) about?
A．It’s about healthy food. B．It’s about the kitchen robot.
C．It’s about a nice kitchen. D．It’s about a robot which can do homework.
( B )52．According to(根据) the passage, ______will tell you what your body needs.
A．the kitchen robot B．the food machine
C．the information screen D．the computer
( C )53．What does the underlined word “receive” mean in Chinese?
A．丢失 B．复制 C．接收 D．保存
184新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( B )54．You can see your friend’s face_______.
A．on the wall B．on the screen
C．on the Internet D．on TV
( A )55．What’s the best title for the passage?
A．Our life in the future B．A food machine
C．A special information screen D．A kitchen robot
四、阅读回答问题
We will see a new kind of little car called "E-car" in the street in the future. The car is as small as a bike, but it
can carry two people in it. Everybody can drive it easily, just like riding a bike. Even children and old people can drive
it to school or parks.
If everyone drives such a car in the future, the air will be fresher. There will be more space for all the cars in
cities, and there will also be more places for people to walk in the street.
The little car can't go very fast (it can go only 65 kilometers an hour), so driving will be safer. It will be
convenient for people to go around the city, and it'll be also useful for a long trip.
People won't have to spend much money on E-cars. They are so cheap that almost all people can afford to buy.
And this kind of cars can save lots of gas. They can go 450 kilometers with only a little gas.
41．Is an E-car as big as a bike?
Yes, it is.
42．What will the air be like if everyone drives such a car in the future?
The air will be fresher.
43．Why are people safer when they drive the E-car?
The little car can't go very fast
44．How many people can the little car carry?
Two.
45．What’s the topic sentence of the fourth paragraph?
People won't have to spend much money on E-cars.
Unit 7 When Tomorrow Comes
Section B How can we prepare for the future ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1.guest /gest/n.客人；宾客 2. author /'ɔ:θə(r)/n.作者；作家
3.best -selling /,best 'selɪŋ/adj.畅销的 4.futurist /'fju:ʃərɪst/n.未来学家
5.everywhere /'evriweə(r)/adv.&pron.&conj.到处；所有地方
185新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6.service /'s3:vɪs/n. 服务；公共服务 7.disaster /di'za:stə(r)/n. 灾难；不幸
8.emergency /i'm3:dʒənsɪ/n.突发事件；紧急情况 9.disappear /,drsə'pɪə(r)/v. 消失；不见
10.challenging /'tʃælɪndʒɪŋ/adj.挑战性的 11.pilot /'paɪlət/n.飞行员；领航员
12.expert /'eksp3:t/n. 专家；行家 adj. 熟练的；内 行的
13.replace /rɪ'pleɪs/v.代替；取代 14.creativity /,kri:eɪ'tivəti/n.创造力
15.emotional /ɪ'məuʃənl/adj. 情感的；情绪的 16.intelligence /ɪn'telɪdʒəns/n. 智力；智慧
17.mention /'menʃn/v. 提到；写到 18.refrigerator /rɪ'frɪdʒəreɪtə(r)/(=fridge/frdʒ/)n.冰箱
19.accept /ək'sept/v. 接受；相信 20.influence /'nfluəns/n. 影响；对……起作用 v. 影响；作用
21.creative /kri'eɪtiv/adj. 创造性的；创作的 22.impossible /ɪm'pɒsəbl/adj. 不可能的
23.vs (=versus/ 'v3:səs/)prep. 对；对抗
24.quality /'kwɒləti/n. 素质；质量；品质 adj.优质的；高质量的
25.develop /dɪ'veləp/v. 增强；发展；开发 26.German /'d3:mən/n. 德语；德国人adj.德国的
27.valuable /'væljuəbl/adj. 很有用的；宝贵的 28.challenge /tʃælɪndʒ/n. 挑战；质疑 v. 向(某人)
29.public /'pʌblɪk/adj. 公共的；公众的 30.medical /'medɪkl/adj.医学的；医疗的
31.industry /'ɪndəstri/n. 行业；工业 32.France /fra:ns/ 法国
33.task /ta:sk/n. 任务；工作 34.depend /dɪ'pend/v. 取决于；依靠
二．重点词汇变形
1.futurist(n.) 未来学家→ future (n.)未来；将来
2.service(n.)服务→ serve (v.) 为….服务→ servant (n.)仆人
3.emergency(n.)突发事件；紧急情况→ 复数形式：emergencies
4.disappear(v.)消失；不见→ 反 ： appear (v.) 出 现
5.challenging(adj.)挑战性的→ challenge (v.)(n.) 挑战
6.replace(v.)代替；取代→ replacement (n.） 代替
7.creativity(n.)创造力→ creative (adj.) 有创造力的 → create (v.) 创造
8.emotional(adj.) 情感的 → emotion (n.) 情绪
9.intelligence(n.) 智力 → intelligent (adj.)有智慧的；机智的
10.impossible(adj.)→反： possible 可能的
11.develop(v.)→ development (n.)发展→ developed (adj.)发达的→ developing (adj.)发展中的
12.German(n.)(adj.)→ 复数形式：Germans 德国人 →Germany (n.)德国
13.valuable(adj.)有用的；宝贵的→invaluable(adj.)极其宝贵的；价值极高的→value(n.)价值 (v.)重视；珍视
14.public(adj.)公共的→publicly(adv.) 公共地
15.medical(adj.)医学的；医疗的→medicine(n.) 医药；药
186新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
16.industry(n.)行业；工业→industrial(adj.) 工业的
17.depend(v.) 取决于；依赖→dependent(adj.)依赖的 →independent 反：独立的(adj.)→independence(n.) 独立
18change(v.)改变；变化→changeable(adj.)多变的
19.prepare(v.)为...准备 →preparation(n.) 准备
20.invite(v.)邀 请 →invitation(n.)邀请
21.believe(v.)相信 →belief(n.) 信仰；信念
22.scientist(n. 科学家 →science(n.) 科学 →scientific(adj.) 科学的
三．重点短语通关
1.the best-selling book 最畅销的书 2.thank sb.for doing sth. 感谢某人做某事
3.save lives 拯救生命 4.go to the supermarket 去超市
5.be out of 缺少 6.one day 将来的某一天
7.take steps to do sth. 采取措施做某事 8.meet the public's needs for.…满足公众的需
求
9.run away 逃避 10.build a smart public transport system 建造一个智能的公共交通系统
11.go away 离开；消失 12. focus on 专 注于；集中于
13.depend on 取决于；依赖 14.live in the countryside 住在乡村
15.stay close to nature 亲近自然 16.invite sb.to sp. 邀请去某人来某个地方
17.as long as 只要
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
Ready for Tomorrow?
Host: Good evening, everyone! Our guest today is Dr Pete Roberts, author of the
best-selling book Ready for Tomorrow. So welcome to our show, Dr Roberts.
Guest: Good evening, Thank you, it's a pleasure to be here.
Host: Dr Roberts, thank you for joining us. So, as a futurist, can you tell us how
life will be different in 50 years?
Guest: Well, you' ll see robots working everywhere.
Host: Can you give us some examples?
Guest: Well, we’ ll have service robots. They will do almost all our housework. They
will also help save lives when disasters and emergencies happen.
Host: So, what jobs will humans still do in the future?
187新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Guest: Good question! Some jobs today will disappear in the coming years. However, there will be more challenging
jobs in the future, such as space pilots and Al experts.
Host: Do you think robots will replace humans one day?
Guest: No, I don't, Our creativity and emotional intelligence are important for relationships. Al will not replace
humans for these things.
Host: You mentioned Al. How will Al change our world?
Guest: It will change the world in many ways, For example, we won't need to go to the supermarket, Smart
refrigerators will understand our needs. When we are almost out of some food, they will order it for us.
Host: Wow, that' ll save us a lot of time! Now, my last question:How can we prepare for the future?
Guest: It's simple. Just accept change. Keep learning and working hard. Today's choices will influence your future.
Host: Thank you for your time, Dr Roberts.
【考点1.】Dr Roberts,thank you for joining us.罗伯特博士，谢谢你加入我们。
【用法详解】thank you for = thanks for 意为“为...表示感谢”，强调感谢的原因。for 后面可跟名词、代词或
动词-ing 形式。
相关搭配： thank you for doing sth = thanks for doing sth 感谢做某事。
Eg:Thank you for giving me good night greeting every night .谢谢你送我的晚
安。
相关拓展：① be thankful to do sth 感激能够做某事。
Eg:I was thankful to get this ticket to the concert of my idol.我非常感激能够
得到我担演唱会的门票。
②thanks to 意为“多亏了.…;由于...的帮助”，相当于because of...或with the help of...，强调感谢的对象。
在此短语中，to是一个介词，后接名词或代词。
Eg:Thanks to my brother , I am happy again.多亏我的弟弟，我心情又好了。
牛
刀小试
( A )1. Thanks for the flowers for me.
A.watering B. water C. watered D. to water
( B )2.- the teacher, I passed the English exam!
A.Thank for B. Thanks to C.Thanks for D. Thank to
【考点2.】So,as a futurist,can you tell us how life will be different in 50 years?所有，作为一名未来学家，你可以
告诉我们50年以后我们的生活会有什么不同吗？
188新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【用法详解】1.futurist 作名词，意为“未来学家”。指研究未来趋势(如科技、社会发展)的专家。
相关拓展: future 未来的 futuristi c 未来派的，超前的
2.as作介词，意为“作为，当做；以...的身份”，后常接名词。
Eg:As a student,we should pay more attention to our study.作为一个学生，我
们应该更聚力于我们的学习。
相关拓展：① work/ serve/function/act as sb/sth 作为 ........; 担任 .......... .
Eg:My brother works as a teacher in a middle school. 我弟弟在一个中学当老师。
② view / treat/ consider /regard recognize/ acknowledge A as B 把 A 视为 B; 承认 A 是 B
Eg:Our head teacher treat us as his kids.我们班主任对待我们就像自己的孩子。
③As作为连词，引导时间状语从句，表示: 当 .... .. 时候
Eg:The thief was caught as/when he was stealing in the supermarket.小偷在超市行窃时被逮住了。
④As 作为连词，引导方式状语从句，表示: 如 . .. 像 .. .. 按照 . .. 的方式
Eg:He laughed as a kid when he met his brother .见到哥哥他笑得像个孩子。
⑥As 作为连词，引导原因状语从句，表示:因为…
Eg:As she was ill, she didn't come to the party.由于病了，她没来参加晚会。
牛
刀小试
( C )1.He climbed the rock a blue sheep(岩羊).
A.like B. seem C. as D. similar
( B )2. The teacher didn’t come this morning___ _ _ _she was ill.
A.because of B.as C.so D.cause
3. She wants to be a futurist when she grow up. (future)
4.we won’t work together in a big offices in the future .(在将来)
5.As time goes on, it's getting warmer and warmer.随着时间的推移，天气变得越来越暖了。(翻译)
【考点3】you will see robots working everywhere.你将到处都看到机器人在工作。
【用法详解】see是一个感官动词，感官动词 +doing 表示动作的连续性，进行性。
相关搭配： see sb doing sth 看见某人正在做某事
Eg:I saw him working in the garden yesterday.
昨天我看到他正在花园里干活。（强调"我见他正干活"这个动作）
相关拓展：感官动词 + do表示动作的完整性，真实性。
See sb do sth 看见某人做某事。
189新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:I saw him work in the garden yesterday.昨天我看见他在花园里干活了。(强调"我看见了"这个事实)
此类词还有：see, watch, observe, notice, look at, hear, listen to, smell, taste, feel
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.They knew her very well. They had seen her _ __ up from childhood.
A. grow B. grew C. was growing D. to grow
（ A ）2.The missing boy was last seen ___ near the river.
A. play B. to be playing C. playing D. to play
3. The old man often see the students play (play) basketball after dinner.
4. The old man saw the students playing (play) basketball when he passed by.
5. They noticed someone talking (talk) when they passed the classroom.
【考点4】they will also help save lives when disasters and emergencies happen.在灾难和紧急情况下，它们也会
帮助拯救生命。
【用法详解】①disaster作可数名词，意为“灾难、灾祸、灾害，指大破坏、痛苦或伤亡”。 语气较弱，强调最终的
结局。
Eg:That was a disaster if ever there was one! 那确实是场灾难。
②emergency作可数名词，意为“突发事件，紧急情况”。作形容词，意为“紧急的;应急的”。
Eg:I can’t come to work due to a family emergency.我家里有个紧急情况不能来上班了。
相关拓展：major emergency 重大事故 medical emergency 紧急医疗事件 minor emergency 轻微事故
【考点5】Some jobs today will disappear in the coming years.在未来的几年如今的一些工作都将消失。
【用法详解】①disappear 作动词，意为“消失;不见”。强调从视线中或某个地方消失，不再被看见或存在于原
来的位置，不一定意味着彻底消失或不存在。
Eg:I want to take a photo for you ,but The moon disappeared behind the clouds.我想给
你拍个月亮，但是它老不出来。
②词缀 dis-常加在名词、动词或形容词前面,表示否定意义,或表示“分开”。
Eg:appear出现→disappear 消失 agree同意→disagree 不同意
Satisfied满意的→dissatisfied 不满意的 like喜欢→dislike 不喜欢。
牛
刀小试
1.The magician made the rabbit disappear （appear）
【考点 6】our creativity and emotional intelligence are important for relationships.Al will not replace
190新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
humans for these things.我们的创造力和情感智能对人际关系很重要，人工智能无法替代这些方面的人类。
【用法详解】①creativity作名词，意为“创造力,创新的能力”。其动词形式是 create 意为“创造;创作; 创
建 ”形容词形式是creative 意为“创造性的；创新的”。 c reation 是另一个名词
形式，意为“创作；创造物”，是指通过创意和努力产生新的事物。 creator 创
作者；创造者。
Eg:The scientists of China is full of
creativity.中国的科学家们创造力十足。
②emotional作形容词，意为“情感的；情绪的；情绪化的”。
描述与情绪或情感有关的事物，或形容某个人的感受、反应等。
Eg:I try and help people deal with emotional problems.
我帮助人们应对情绪上的问题。
③intelligence作名词，意为“.智能，智力，情报”。其形容词形式为intelligent 意为“聪明的”。
AI: artificial intelligence 人工智能
牛
刀小试
1. Our school held a creativ e ( create) math competition last week .
2. Do you feel like creating ( create) some new ice cream?
【考点7】you mentioned AI.你提到了AI.
【用法详解】mention 作动词，意为“提及、谈到”。
相关搭配 mention sth to sb 向某人提及某事。
Eg:She forget to mention the meeting time to me.她忘记跟我提会议的时间了。
Don ’ t mention i t 小事一桩，不足挂齿。表达“不客气”。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.Thanks for you helping with my math.
------
A.no thank you B.it doesn’t matter C.Don’t mention it D.take it easy
（ B ）2.I’m very sorry to break your cup?
------
A.not at all B.it doesn’t matter C.no sorry D.Don’t mention it
【考点8】How can we prepare for the future?我们应该如何准备未来？
【用法详解】①prepare for... 意为“为……做准备。
191新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:We are preparing for the final exam.我们正在为期末考试做准备。
②prepare to do sth.意为“准备做某事’。
Eg:She is preparing to sing a song.她正准备唱一首歌。
③prepare sb.sth.=prepare sth.for sb.意为“为某人准备某物”
Eg:we are preparing him a Birthday party=we are preparing a Birthday party for him.我们正在为他准备生日
聚会。
相关拓展：be/get ready for sth.为某事做准备 be/get ready to do sth.准备好做某事
牛
刀小试
（ A )1.I am preparing you at any time.
A.to help B. help C. helping D.helped
( B )2.They are doing a lot of exercise to prepare the sports meeting.
A.to B. for C. in D.of
【考点9】Today's choices will influence your future.今天的选择会影响你的未来。
【用法详解】1.influence作动词，意为“影响；对……起作用”。作名词，意为“影响；作用”。指对行动、思想、
性格等产生的不易觉察到的、潜移默化的影响。
Eg:Idols have a powerful influence on teenagers nowadays. 如今，偶像对青少年有很大的影响。
相关搭配：① influence sb to do sth 影响某人做某事
② be influenced by … .受……影响
③ have an influence on sb/sth 对某人/某物有影响
2.choice作名词，意为“选择”，是可数名词。
Eg:There are many choices in our life. But if you choose, you must face it.在我
们的生活中有很多选择，但如果你选了，就必须去面对它。
相关拓展：①choose作动词，意为“选择；挑选”。 choos e sb . Sth 为某人挑选某
物= choose sth . for sb .
Eg:He chooses me a good book as a birthday gift.=He chooses a good book for me as a birthday gift.他选
择了一本书作为我的生日礼物。
② choose to do sth 选择做某事 choos e ng t t o d o sth 选择不做某事
Eg:They choose to walk to the library because it is next to their house.他们选择走路去图书馆，因为就在旁
边。
Eg:I choose not to go to the zoo with them because l don't finish my work.我选择不和他们去动物园，因为
192新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
工作没完。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.She chose abroad for her graduate program.
A. study B. to study C. studying D. studies
2.You must be make a good choice to into a better school.(choose)
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( B )1．________ a school sports meet in our school next month.
A．There will have B．There will be C．There is D．There are
( B )2．—Can you guess if they ________ to play computer games with us?
—I think they will come if they ________ free.
A．will come; will be B．will come; are C．come; will be D．come; are
( C )3．According to some scientists, people ________ to be 200 years old in the future.
A．live B．lived C．will live D．were living
( B )4．There ________ a basketball game in our city next Saturday.
A．will have B．will be C．is going to have D．are going to be
( D )5．We ________ a lot of money for the children in hospital next week.
A．raise B．raised C．are raising D．will raise
( B )6．— Nancy, you look worried. What's happening?
— I'm looking ________ my keys. I don't know where they are.
A．at B．for C．into D．after
( C )7．He will ________ the meeting next week.
A．join B．joins in C．attend D．takes part in
( C )8．Let me ________ some information about it on the Internet for you.
A．looked for B．to look for C．find out D．to find out
( C )9．The children from Beijing will ________ with the children from Shanghai in tomorrow’s soccer match.
A．disagree B．compete C．discuss D．complain
( B )10． he didn’t help me find my lost wallet, I thanked him all the same.
A．Even B．Even though C．Because D．Since
193新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
二 、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
1. Futurists (future)say robots will be a large part of life.
2.Snow will dis appear (appear)if the temperature keeps above 0℃.
3. R esearch ing animals is interesting,and many research ers show animals have amazing abilities. (research)
4.The team accept ed (accept)him because his positive quali t ie s (quality)like honesty and teamwork made him
a great member.
5 .She is a very creat ive artist,and her crea t ivit y always surprises everyone.(create)
三、从方框中选择合适的单词并用其适当形式填空
serve value develop medicine public
1.To save energy,we should take public transport,such as buses.
2.With the develo p men t of the technology,our lives have changed a lot so far.
3. M edi c a l teams from different countries were sent there to help the sick people.
4.The customers are complaining(抱怨)about the poor ser v ic e of the restaurant.
5.Learning a second language is valu able for understanding different cultures.
四、根据汉语意思补全句子或翻译句子
1 . 我们不可能按时完成这个任务了，因为我们的材料快用完了。
It ’ s impossible for us to finish the task on time because we're running low on materials.
2.人工智能正深刻影响着我们的生活，未来它可能会取代各个行业中的许多传统工作。
AI is having a deep influenc e o n our life,and it might replace many traditional jobs in various industry.
3.生活充满了挑战，只要我们有勇气挑战自己，我们就能学到很多新东西。
Life is full challenges , as long as we have the courage to challeng e ourselve s we can learn a lot of new things.
4.我表妹来我家吃晚饭，我提到了下周的学校旅行。
My cousin cam e ove r to my home for dinner,and I mentione d the school trip next week.
五、阅读单选
A
Andy lives in the year 2500. He is 13 years old and he lives on Mars with her parents. There are four robots in
their family. Let’s get to know them.
Name: No. 1
I can sing and dance. I can sing lots of songs in Chinese, English and
French. Andy loves music. I often teach him to sing. He sings well now.
194新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Name: No. 2
I’m small but I’m very smart. I can help Andy with his homework. Andy
always asks me questions, and I can answer all his questions. We are good
friends.
Name: No. 3
I’m a family doctor. I help Andy and his parents keep fit. If they are ill, I
will give them some special candies. After eating the candies, they will feel
better.
Name: No. 4
I’m very big and strong. I can help with the housework. I can sweep the
floor, wash the clothes and cook meals for Andy’s family. I’m good at cooking.
（ C ）1．No. 1 can _________.
A．cook meals B．make candies C．sing and dance D．clean the house
（ B ）2．Who can help Andy with his homework?
A．No. 1. B．No.2. C．No.3. D．No.4.
（ C ）3．What does No. 4 look like?
A．It has one eye. B．It’s small and fat.
C．It’s big and strong. D．It doesn’t have arms.
B
Do you want to know what our life will be like in the future? Let’s have a look. You may get a surprise. You
will go to the kitchen when you are hungry. You will give orders to the kitchen robot. The robot will cook the food for
you in a few minutes. Then it will bring it to you.
In the kitchen you will find a special food machine. The food machine will tell you what your body needs. It will
help you eat healthily. The food machine will be connected with (连接) the kitchen robot. The robot can get messages
from the food machine. After having a meal, you can go to your home office. You will work at home and you don’t
need to go out to work any more.
You will have a special information screen. You can get any information on the screen. When you receive a
message from a friend in America, your information screen will be turned on automatically (自动地). Your friend’s
face appears on the screen. Then you can talk to your friend easily.
（ B ）4．What is the second paragraph about?
A．It’s about healthy food. B．It’s about the kitchen robot.
C．It’s about a nice kitchen. D．It’s about a robot which can do homework.
195新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ B ）5．According to the passage, ________ will tell you what your body needs.
A．the kitchen robot B．the food machine
C．the information screen D．the computer
（ C ）6．What does the underlined word “receive” mean in Chinese?
A．丢失 B．复制 C．接收 D．保存
（ B ）7．You can see your friend’s face ________.
A．on the wall B．on the screen
C．on the Internet D．on TV
（ A ）8．What’s the best title for the passage?
A．Our life in the future B．A food machine
C．A special information screen D．A kitchen robot
C
A new report shows what life might be like in 100 years now. It describes skyscrapers that are much taller than
today's buildings, underwater "bubble" cities and holidays in space. The report is from a company. It asked experts(专
家) on space and architecture as well as city planners to give their ideas on the life in 2116. They said the way we live
and work and play will be totally different to how we do these things. The experts used the Internet as an example.
They said that 25 years ago people could not imagine how the Internet and smart phones would change our lives. The
Internet has completely changed the way we communicate and do daily things. The experts said the changes in the
next century would be even more unbelievable.
Researchers questioned 3000 adults about the prediction (预言) they thought were most likely(很可能的) to
happen in the future. They predicted that in the future few people will go to an office but will work from home and
have work meetings online. People will have highly developed 3-D printers that will let you download (下载) a design
for furniture or a food recipe and then "print" the sofa, table or pizza at home. There will also be less need for visits to
the doctor. We will all have a home health instrument that will tell us what the problem is and give us treatment. We
will also be going into space for holidays and to get resources that we have used on Earth. A prediction that is missing
is whether people will still need to study English.
（ D ）1．The writer uses the example of the Internet in Paragraph 1 to show ________.
A．the Internet was often used B．the Internet has developed fast
C．people will not believe the changes D．technology will change peoples lives
（ C ）2．With the help of highly developed 3-D printers a way to get a sofa in 2116 is to ________.
A．buy one in a shop B．ask somebody to make one
196新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
C．download a design and "print" one D．design and make one by oneself
（ D ）3．According to the passage the missing prediction is ________.
A．how people will work B．where people will get resources
C．what people will have at home to treat illness D．whether people will still need to learn English
（ A ）4．The passage is mainly about ________.
A．the life in 2116 B．holidays in space C．the history of the InternetD．medical treatment
（ B ）5．The passage is most probably from ________.
A．an advertisement B．a newspaper C．a detective story D．a health report
六、六选五
根据短文内容，从方框内所给的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，使其意思通顺。
What will our life be like in 100 years?Although we don't know the answer,we believe that it will be different from life
today. 1. A Here are his ideas.
First,people will have less work to do. 2 . D So people will become stronger and healthier,and they'll live longer
as well.
Second,computers will control(控制)the cars and people won't need to drive.So there will be fewer traffic accidents on
the road.3 . E
Third,people will be able to live in the sea,on the moon or on other planets.4 . B So there will be much space for
people to plant trees.There will be less pollution,and the air will become much fresher.
5. C If we don't save water now,people will start wars for water in 100 years.All in all,technology will play an
important role in our life.And our life will be happier and easier in 100 years.
A.My brother David makes some predictions.
B.The earth won't be crowded or noisy any more.
C.Finally,water shortage(短缺)will become one of the most serious problems.
D.They will spend most of their time playing sports and travelling.
E.Planes will be very popular,and most people would like to take a plane for their trips.
六、短文填空
从方框中选择适当的单词，并用其正确形式填空，使短文完整、通顺(每词限用一次)。
with, machine, to, dangerous, much, car, expert, human, because,clever
What will our world be like in 2050?We asked a group of 36. expert s to make their predictions about our future.
By 2050,we will have“clever”cars.We won't have so many accidents,37. because t hey will be able to“talk”with
each other.Cars will slow down by themselves or stop in 38. dangerous situations.Also,our 39. ca r will run on
197新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
electricity.
By 2050,our homes will be 40. more eco-friendly.We will use solar energy(太阳能)and we will recycle(回收利
用)water.Our houses will be underground and we will have robots help us 41. with cleaning,cooking and
shopping.
The computers in the future won't look like 42. machine s .They'll look like 43. human s Scientists plan to make
them better and 44. clever .
By 2050,there will be too many people on earth and over 100 million people will be living on the moon and other
planets.We will be able to travel to Mars and be back in just three days.Are you looking forward 45. to that?
七. 语法填空
阅读下面的短文，在空白处填入一个适当的单词，或填人括号中所给单词的正确形式。
I'm Jack.I often imagine what life 1. will be (be)like in the future.Here I'd like to tell you my predictions about the
future.
First,there will be less pollution because people will do their best 2. to make (make)our earth a greener planet.I
don't think people will buy paper books any more in the future, 3. because they will read online.By doing so,they
will help save more trees.And the environment will be 4. better (good).If everyone plays a part in 5. protect ing
(protect)our home,I believe the future will be hopeful.
Besides,people will work fewer hours 6. than they do now,because many robots will help them do the heavy and
boring jobs.They will have more free time to go on holidays and visit different 7 place s (place).They will even go to
space to have fun.It will be really 8. excit ing (excite)!
Where do you think people will live in the future?I think more and more people in the countryside will live in
apartments in 9. cit ies (city).They will live 10. a better and happier life.
六、话题作文
我们无法改变过去，却能用勤奋和智慧创造美好的未来。亲爱的同学，你对未来的生活有怎样的期待呢？
请以“My future life”为题写一篇英文短文，畅想自己未来的生活。
1.提示.
(1)想象你未来从事什么职业；
(2)想象你未来的生活会是什么样子；
(3)为了过上想要的生活，你现在该怎么做？
2.要求.
(1)内容必须包括提示信息，可适当发挥；
(2)语句通顺，意思连贯，书写工整；
198新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
(3)词数70左右
My future life
I am Jenny.Here are my p redictions about my future
life In the future,I will be an astronaut.I will work on a space station for a year and then hav e a vacation for six months I
willgo to other plan ets in my free time because it will be popular to go to another planet by rocket.I will have a smart
robot.It will help me to clean the house.Cities will be more crowded and polluted so I will live in t he countryside.I will also
take trips to the moon with my fami ly.I'm sure my future life will be great fun
.
Unit 8 Let’s Communicate !
Section A How do we communicate ?
一．重点词汇梳理
1.communication/kəmju:nɪ'keɪʃn/n.表达；交流 2.sign/saɪn/n.手势;迹象；标志 v. 签 ( 名 ) ; 签字
3.speaker/'spi:kə(r)n.说话者；发言者 4. re hea r sal /rɪ'hɜːsl/v. 排练；排演
5.local /'ləukl/adj. 当地的；地方的 n. 当地人；本地人 6 .professor/prə'fesə(r)/n. 教授
7.speech/spi:tʃ/n.演说；发言 8.argue /'a:gju:/v. 争论；争吵
9.prefer/prɪ'fɜː(r)/v. 较喜欢 10.calm /kla:m/adj.镇静的；沉着的 v. 使平静； 使镇静
11.expression/ik'spreʃn/n. 表达方式；表达 12.chance/tʃa:ns/n. 机会；可能性 adj.意外的；偶然的
13.meeting /'mi:tɪŋ/n. 会面；会议 14.difficulty /'dɪfɪkəlti/n. 困难；难处
15.line/laɪn/n. 字行；便条；线 16.detail/'di:teɪl/n.细节；详情
17.reunion /,ri:'ju:nɪən/n. 团聚；重逢；聚会 18.seriously/'sɪəriəsli/adv. 严肃地；认真地
19.training/'trenɪŋ/n. 训练；培训
199新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
二．重点词汇变形
1.communication(n.)表达；交流→communicate(v.) 交流；沟通
2.sign(n.&v.)手势；标志；签字→signal (n.)信号；指示灯 (v.) 显示；表明
3.speaker(n.)说话者；发言者→speak(v.) 说 →spoken (adj.)口语的
4.rehearsal(n.)排练；演练→rehearse(v.)排 练
5.speech(n.)演说；演讲→speechless (adj.)(气得)说不出话的
6.argue(v.)争论；争吵→argument(n.) 争论；争吵
7.prefer(v.)较喜欢→preference (n.)喜好；偏好
8.expression(n.)表达方式；表达→express(v.) 表达
9.meeting(n.)会面；会议→meet(v.) 遇 见
10.difficulty(n.)困难；难题→difficult(adj.) 困难的
11.reunion(n.)团聚；重聚；聚会→ unio n (n.) 联盟
12.seriously(adv.)严肃地；认真地→serious (adj.) 严肃的；严重的；认真的→seriousness(n.)严重；认真；严肃
13.training(n.)训练；培训→train(v.) 培训；训练(n.) 火车
三．重点短语通关
1. finds ways to do sth . 找到做某事的方法 2. talk face to face 面对面交谈
3. send text messages 发送短信 4. make a video call 打视频电话
5. send emails 发送电子邮件 6. use sign language 使用手语
7. make a phone call 打电话 8. on time 按时，准时
9. pick sb . up 接某人 10. show sb . around 带某人参观
11. try all the delicious local food 尝试所有美味的当地食物 12. play games with sb . 和某人玩游戏
13. wake sb . up 把某人吵醒 14. ask for sth . 寻求某物
15.take a break 休息 16.thanks for 为……而感谢
17. make things worse 使事情变更糟糕 18. make up ( with sb .) (和某人)言归于好
200新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
19.the best way to do sth. 做某事最好的方式 20. in person 亲自；亲身
21. stay calm 保持冷静 22. talk on the phone 打电话
23. go jogging 去慢跑 24. need to do sth . 需要做某事
25. have difficulties in doing sth . 有困难做某事 26.write down 写下；记下
27.drop sb.a line 给某人写信
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section A课文重现
Jason:Professor,thanks for the helpful speech on communication.
I have a question.Sometimes my friends and I argue but don't know how to make
up.What's the best way to communicate in this situation?
Professor: If you want to solve the problem, a face-to-face talk usually works the best.
Jason:I understand, but meeting in person is not always easy.
Professor: If you can't meet, just call your friend. Some of you may prefer texting, but it takes longer and can
make things worse if you're not careful with your words.
Jason:But what if we argue more over the phone?
Professor: If you stay calm and say sorry, it will help. If it is still hard to talk, take a
break.Meet when you're both ready.
Jason:I'll call and try to meet. Because friendship is important. Thanks for the advice!
Professor: You're welcome.
【考点1.】When will the man pick Jim up?这个男人是什么时候接到汤姆的？
【用法详解】pick up是动副短语，后跟名词时，名词置于动副之间或副词之后;后跟代词时，代词只能置于动副
之间。Pick sb up 意为“（开车）接载，搭载（接）某人”。
Eg: I'll pick you up at the airport.我会去机场接你。
相关拓展：①pick up意为“ 捡起，拾起 ”。
Eg: Please pick up the book on the floor.请把地上的书捡起来。
②pick up意为“ 接电话 ”。
Eg: Can you pick up the phone when you are at home?你在家时能接电话吗?
③pick up意为“ 学会，获得 ”。可以指学习知识、技能等。
Eg:He picked up some Korean while he chanted with his brother. 他和他弟弟聊天时学会了一点韩语。
④pick up意为“ 好转，改善 ”。
Eg:The economy is starting to pick up.经济开始好转。
⑤pick up意为“ 收集 ”。
201新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:They are trying to pick up information.他们正在努力收集情报。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Shall we go to the airport to _your sister?
- I don't think it's necessary. She will come here by taxi.
A. see off B. pick up C. look after D.come across
（ A ）2.The bus stopped and some passengers.
A.picked up B.picked out C. picked on D.picked at
（ A ）3.Don’t throw the toys here and there ,Please quickly .
A.pick them up B.pick it up C.pick up them D.pick up it
3.We'll go to the farm to pick up some apples.(采摘)
【考点2.】 If you come to my city,I’ll show you around.如果你来到我的城市，我将带你到处走走。
【用法详解】1.这是一个含有if引导的条件状语从句的复合句，if意为“如果”，在if引导的条件状语从句中，从
句常用一般现在时，而主句则用一般将来时。（语法部分详细讲解）
Eg:If it is fine tomorrow,we'll go to the park.如果明天天气好，我们将去公园。
2.around作副词，意为“到处，向各处；”。
Eg:The mice are running around.老鼠们正在四处逃窜。
相关拓展:①around作介词，意为“围绕，环绕”
Eg:Please be kind to the people around.请善待周围的人。
③around作副词，意为“大约”。
Eg:He arrives around 5 o'clock.他大约5点到。
相关搭配：show sb. around 带领某人参观 look around 环顾四周
travel around 到处旅行 turn around 转身walk /go around 到处走动
come around 苏醒 ; 顺便来访 ; 来访 ; 复原 around the world 环游世界 a round the corner 即将来临
牛
刀小试
1.She looked around the whole classroom and sat near the door.(环顾四周)
2.They are going to travel around the world when they retire.(全世界)
( A )3.Please the whole paper before you start to write.
A.look through B. looked around C. look for D.look out
【考点3.】If I go there,I’ll try all the delicious local food.如果我去那儿，我将尝试所有的当地美食。
202新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【用法详解】①local作形容词，意为“ 当地的 ; 地方性的 ”。侧重与特定地点紧密相关，不强调出生起源。
Eg:We bought local handicrafts.我们买了当地手工艺品。
②local作名词，意为“ 当地人 ； 本地人 ”。包括当前地区居民，不要求土生土长。
Eg:The locals are helpful.当地人乐于助人。
牛
刀小试
1.The local s of this village are very warm-hearted.(local)
2.Please send me your locatio n so that I can find you . (local)
【考点4.】professor,thanks for the helpful speech on communication.教授，感谢你做的非常有用的关于交流
的演讲。
【用法详解】1.helpful作形容词，意为“有帮助的；有用的”。其反义词为helpless，意为“没有帮助的”。
相关搭配： be helpful to .. .对...有帮助。
Eg:This book is helpful to students.这本书对学生们是有帮助的。
be helpful for sb to do sth 做某事是有帮助的。
Eg:Being calm is helpful for you to solve problems.冷静对解决问题是有帮助的。
相关拓展： help sb . do sth .帮助某人做某事
help sb . with sth .在某方面帮助某人
help with sth . 在某方面帮助 help ou t 帮助摆脱困境
help oneself to sth .随意吃/喝... can' t help doin g sth .情不自禁做某事
ask sb.for help .向某人求助 with the help of sb . = with one's help 在某人的帮助下
2.speech作名词，意为“演讲”。 give a speech 做演讲
牛
刀小试
( B )1.It’s helpful for you ask the policeman help,If you get lost in the park.
A. of /to B. to/for C.for/to D. with/to
( C )2. Good learning habits help us our study.
A. improves B. improved C. to improve D. improving
( B ) 3. While shopping, people sometimes can't help something they don’t really need.
A. to buy B. buying C. to buying D. buy
4. Welcome to my birthday party, Jim. Help yoursel f to some fruit.(you)
5. Reading books is very helpfu l for My brother to learn English well . (help)
203新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
6. Running is mor e helpfu l for me to lose wight than my brother .(help)
【考点5.】Sometimes my friends and I argue but don't know how to make up.有的时候我和我的朋友吵
架但不知道如何和解。
【用法详解】1.argue作动词，意为“争论;争吵；认为；说服；提出质疑；提出理由”。其名词形式为argument，意
为“争吵;争论”。
相关搭配：①argue with sb.与某人争论=have an argument with sb.
Eg:I argued with my best friend=I had an argument with my best friend.我和我最好的朋友
吵了一架。
②argue about sth.为某事而争吵
Eg:They were arguing about which film to go and see.他们正在争论去看哪部电影。
③argue with sb. about sth.为某事与某人争辩
They're always arguing with each other about money.他们总是为了钱争吵。
2.make up作动词短语，是一个多义短语，具有不同的意思，取决于具体语境。在此句中意为“和解；和好”
指重新恢复关系，尤其是当发生争执或不愉快时。
Eg: After their argument, they decided to make up and move on.争吵之后，他们决定和解并
继续前行。
相关拓展：①Make up意为“编造”（故事、借口等） 。
Eg:She made up a story about why she was late.她编了个故事来解释自己迟到的原因。
②Make up意为“补偿、弥补。”
Eg: I’ll make up for the missed meeting by working extra hours.我会通过加班来弥补错过的会议。
③Make up意为“组成、构成”。
Eg: The team is made up of five people.这个团队由五个人组成。
④Make up意为“化妆”。
Eg: She spent an hour making up before going out.她出门前花了一个小时化妆。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.They argued their boss about the schedule.
A. to B.with C.about D. for
（ B ）2.He had an argument his wife their son.
A. to; with B.with ;about C.about;with D. for;to
3.They had an argument about what to eat this morning.(argue)
4.Nobody likes her because she always makes up lies.(编造)
204新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
5.It took her an hour to make up before meeting him this morning.(化妆)
【考点6.】What’s the best way to communicate in this situation?这种情况最好的沟通方式是什么？
【用法详解】1.communicate作动词，意为“交流;沟通”。
相关搭配： communicate.. . with. .与……交流。
Eg: I like to communicate with my family.我喜欢和我的家人沟通。
相关拓展：communication 作名词，意为“交流;沟通”。 Have a communication with.. .与...交流。
Eg:Smiling is the best ways to start a communication.展开一次交流最好的方式是微笑。
2. the best way to do sth 作某事做好的方法。
Eg:The best way to solve the difficulties is face it.解决困难最好的方法就是面对他。
牛
刀小试
1.WeChat's popularity grows quickly because it's convenient for people to communicate(交流)with each other.
2.I think the best way t o mak e u p with an old friend is give him a phone call first.(和解)
( B )3.My teacher always encourage me to communicate other students.
B. to B.with C.about D. for
【考点7.】If you want to solve the problem, a face-to-face talk usually works the best.如果你想解决问题，一次面
对面的交谈是效果最好的。
【用法详解】1.work在此句中作动词，意为“ ( 计划，方法 ) 产生预期效果 ; 发挥作用 ”。
Eg: The medicine the doctor gave me worked.医生给我的药起作用了。
相关拓展：①work作名词，意为“工作，劳动”。是不可数名词。
Eg: I have a lot of work to do .我有很多工作要做。
PS:job 作名词，意为“工作”，指具体的职业或零工，是可数名词。
Eg: He was so happy for getting that job.得到那份工作他非常高兴。
②work作名词，意为“作品，著作”。是可数名词。
Eg:The museum has many famous works of art.博物馆里有许多艺术著作。
③work作动词，意为“ 从事 .. .. 工作 ”。
Eg:She once worked as a chef.她曾经当过厨师。
④work作动词，意为“使运作”。
Eg:He is teaching his brother how to work the game player.他正在教他哥如何使用游戏机。
2.face-to-face意为“面对面；当面”。可作定语修饰名词，也可作副词短语修饰动词。
Eg:We need a face-to-face talking.我们需要一次面对面谈话。
205新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg: Why don't you talk face-to-face?为什么不面对面交谈呢?
相关拓展： hand-in-hand 手拉手地 side-by-side 肩并肩地 heart-to-heart 真心诚意地
step-by-step 逐步地 day-by-day 一天天地
牛
刀小试
( B )1.The room is in a mess.We have to do a lot of to make it clean.
A.jobs B.work C.works D.job
( B )2.He was a lucky dog because he got a good_ after graduating from university.
A.task B.job C.work D.worker
( B )3.Lu Xun's_ are famous all over the world. Many people like reading them.
A.work B.works C.jobs D.job
4.Many of workers in this factory are from village.(work)
5.This math problem is too difficult to work out for me.(算出)
【考点8.】I understand,but meeting in person is not always easy.我理解，但亲自见面并不总是容易的。
【用法详解】in person意为“亲自；亲身”,通常在句中作状语。
Eg: The boy made a cake in person for his brother .这个男孩亲自给他哥哥做了一个蛋糕。
相关拓展：①person 作名词，意为“人”。强调个体，是可数名词。其形容词形式为personal，意为“私人的”。
Eg: There are eight persons in the classroom.教室里有8个人。
②People作名词,意为：“人”。是集合名词， 表示多个人，不能加“ s ” 。
Eg: There are eight people in the classroom.教室里有8个人。
③peoples表示民族
Eg:There are 56 peoples in China.中国有56个名族。
牛
刀小试
1.The manager made a phone call in person to that girl to introduced the products.(亲自)
2.There will be a personal party in Sean’s house tomorrow evening.(person)
【考点8.】Some of you may prefer texting, but it takes longer and can make things worse if you're not careful
with your words.你们中有些人可能更喜欢发短信，但这需要更长的时间，而且如果不注意措辞，可能会让事情
变得更糟。
【用法详解】1.prefer作动词，意为“更喜欢”。
相关搭配：① prefer sth to sth 比起某物更喜欢另一物。
Eg:·He prefers the seaside to the mountains. 比起山，他更喜欢海边。
206新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
② prefer doing sth to doing sth 比起做某事更喜欢做另一事。
Eg:She prefers reading to watching TV.她比起看电视更喜欢读书。
③prefer to do sth 更愿意做某事。
Eg:I prefer to stay at home.我更喜欢待在家里。
③prefer to do sth rather than do sth 宁可做某事而不愿做某事。
Eg:He prefers to read rather than watch television.他宁可读书而不愿意看电视。
2. be careful with sth 表示”小心/当心/认真对待某事”。
Eg:please be careful with your homework.请认真对待你的作业。
相关拓展：① b e carefu l t o d o sth 表示“小心做某事，当心做某事”。
Eg: Be careful to cross the street when the traffic is heavy.当车流大时，过街时要小心。
② be careful not to do sth 表示“小心不要做某事”。
Eg:Be careful not to touch anything .当心不要碰到任何东西。
③ carefull y 为副词表示“小心地，认真地，当心地"。
Eg:Please listen to me carefully.请认真听我说。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.He prefers more time with his family.
A. spends B.spent C.to spend D.will spend
（ A ）2.She prefers to eat outside rather than at home.
A.cook B.cooking C.to cook D.cooks
（ D ）3.l prefer in the country rather than in the city.
A. living; live B. live; living C. living: living D. to live: live
（ C ）4.l prefer in the country to in the city.
A. living; live B. live; living C.living: living D. to live: live
5.We should listen to the teacher carefull y in class. (careful)
【考点9.】Thanks for the advice !谢谢你的建议。
【用法详解】advice是不可数名词，意为“建议”。表达一条建议用 a piece of advice .其的动词形式为 advise ，
意为“建议；提议”。
相关搭配： advise sb to do sth 建议某人做某事。
Eg:Who can give me some advice ?谁能给我一些建议？
Eg:I advised you to lose weight.我建议你减肥。
相关拓展：① suggestion 意为“建议”，是可数名词。表达一条建议用 a
207新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
suggestion.其动词形式为suggest，意为“建议；提议”。
相关搭配：suggest doing sth 建议做某事。
Eg:Here are some suggestions for you.这是给你的一些建议。
Eg:She suggested going there by bike .她建议我们骑自行车去那里。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.Mr.Wu______David______a new tape recorder yesterday.
A.advised;bought B.advised;to buy C.suggested;to buy D.suggested;to buying
（ B ）2.My teacher suggests____________to the tape every day.
A.listen B.listening C.listens D.to listen
（ A ）3.What a good________ you've given me! Thanks a lot.
A.suggestion B.information C.advice D.advise
【考点10.】If the old man has difficulties in hearing,you can write things down for him.如果老人听力不好，你可
以帮他把事情写下来。
【用法详解】difficulty作名词，意为“难题”。当difficulty表示具体的难事时，为可数名词。当difficulty表示抽
象的困难时，为不可数名词。
Eg:We are confident that we can overcome these difficulties. 我们有信心我们能克服这
些困难。
相关搭配： have difficulty (in)doing sth 做某事有困难 。
Eg:He had great difficulty in finding a good job. 他找份好工作有困难。
相关拓展： have problem （ in ） doing sth 做某事有问题。
have trouble （ in ） doing sth 做某事有麻烦。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.last term,I had some difficulties my English.
A.studies B.studying C.to study D.study
( B )1.It is difficult for me this math problem.
B.to solve B.to solve C.to solve D.to solve
3.There are some difficultie s in swimming learning for the fresh man.(difficult)
四．单元重点语法讲练
if引导的条件状语从句
一、语法概述
208新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
条件状语从句通常由连词if引导，意为“如果；假如；倘若”，表示在某种条件下，很可能会发生某种事情或不
发生某种事情。
1．if条件状语从句的位置
在 if 引导的条件状语从句中，if 条件句位置比较灵活，可放在主句前面也可放在主句后面。若放在主句前，从句
后面要用逗号和主句隔开。
Eg:If he doesn't feel tired，he will visit the museum.
＝He will visit the museum if he doesn't feel tired.如果他不感觉累，他就去参观博物馆。
2．if条件状语从句的时态搭配
(1)当主句用一般将来时，if 引导的条件状语从句要用一般现在时。------------主将从现
Eg:If it rains tomorrow，I won't climb the hills.如果明天下雨，我就不爬山。
(2)当主句中含有 can ， may ， must 等情态动词 时，if 引导的条件状语从句要用一般现在时。
Eg:We can win the basketball game if he joins us.如果他加入我们，我们就能赢这场篮球赛。
(3) 当主句是祈使句时，if 引导的条件状语从句要用一般现在时。
Eg:Help your mom with the housework if you finish your homework early.如果你完成作业早，就帮你妈妈做家务。
3．与其他句式之间的转换
含if引导的条件状语从句的复合句可与其他句型进行转换。
(1)与“ 祈使句 +and/or+ 陈述句 ”进行互换。and表示顺承关系，or表示“否则”。
Eg:If you get up early，you'll get there on time.＝ Get up early，and you'll get there on time.＝Get up early，or you
won't get there on time.早点起床，你就会准时到那里。
(2)借助介词without 或with 来转换条件状语从句。
Eg:If there is no water，fish will die.＝Fish will die without water.如果没有水，鱼就会死。
Eg:If you help me，I'll finish the work soon.＝With your help，I'll finish the work soon.如果你帮助我，我就会快点完
成工作。
(3)if … not引导的条件状语从句，可以借助连词unless 来改写。
Eg:You will be late if you don't go there by bus.＝You will be late unless you go there by bus.如果你不乘公共汽车你
就会迟到。
注意： unless引导条件状语从句，表示“除非、如果不”，相当于if not。如果主句为一般将来时、主句为祈使句
或者含有情态动词时， unless 引导的条件状语从句用一般现在时表示将来。
Eg:Unless your work hard, you won't get good grades.除非你努力，否则将不能取得好成绩。
Eg:You will miss the early bus unless you hurry up.你将错过早班车，除非你快点。
209新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.—Tina wants to know if you ________ to the park with us tomorrow.
—I’d love to. But if it ________, I may go to the library instead.
A．go; will rain B．go; rains C．will go; rains D．will go; will rain
（ B ）2.We won’t believe it ________ we see it with our own eyes.
A．because B．unless C．if D．after
（ C ）3.Your parents won’t let you go out alone ________ they are sure you’re safe.
A．since B．if C．unless
（ C ）4.Jason will go to visit his grandparents _________ he finishes his work this weekend.
A．unless B．though C．if
（ D ）5.— I’m afraid that we can’t ________ the math problem ________ the teacher helps us.
— That’s true. It’s too difficult.
A．work on; if B．work on; unless C．work out; if D．work out; unless
（ C ）6.You can’t make progress in math learning ________ you work harder.
A．if B．after C．unless D．because
（ B ）7.If it ________ sunny, we ________ camping this weekend.
A．get; will go B．gets; will go C．gets; go D．will get; go
（ A ）8.If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we ________ a picnic.
A．will have B．had C．have had D．was having
（ A ）9._____________you smile at others, they will smile back.
A．If B．So C．Or D．Though
（ A ）10.Cooking is an interesting lesson and we can make different dishes ________ we like.
A．if B．after C．though D．so
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
( C )1.To avoid making mistakes, please read the questions ___ ____ before you answer them.
A. careful B. careless C. carefully D. carelessly
( B )2.---Could we go to watch the football game together?
---No, you have two tickets.
A. if B. unless C. because D. so
210新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
( C )3.—Why didn’t you go to play basketball yesterday?
—There was something wrong with my leg. The doctor advised me __ ____ sports.
A.don’t play B.to play C.not to play D.to not play
( A )4.Mr. David always gives me some useful ____ ___. He is as well as a friend to me.
A.advice B.suggestion C.opinion D.choice
( A )5.Mark’s father told him to be ___ ____ and not to make _________ mistakes any more.
A.careful; careless B.carefully; careful C.careful; careful D.carefully; careless
( B )6.--- What are you going to do after you leave school?
--- I will ___ _ ____ a lot of money and travel _________ the world.
A. buy; over B. make; around C. buy; in D. get; to
( B )7. He if you ________ him tomorrow.
A.will come; will invite B.will come; invite C.comes; will invite D.comes; invite
( A )8.—I’ll go for a picnic if it tomorrow. Will you go with me?
—Yes, of course.
A.doesn’t rain B.isn’t raining C.won’t rain D.didn’t rain
( A )9.—Mom, I want to watch the program I Am a Singer IV now.
—You can watch it ___ ___ you finish your homework.
A.if B.unless C.but D.so that
( C )10.If Bob away from the junk food, he will be in good health.
A.stay B.will stay C.stays D.stayed
二、 根据句意和汉语提示写出所缺的单词
1.Please sig n (签字)your name on the first page of the book,Mr Zhang.
2.When I visit a new place,I always love to taste the local (当地的)food.
3.—Who is the speaker (发言者)? —Mr Lin,a famous writer.
4.The relationship (关系)between my brother and me is pretty good.
5.There are some different forms of communication (交流)in our life.
三 、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空
6.A pilot needs lots of special train ing (train)to fly a plane.
7.This painting is an expres s io n (express)of his love for nature.
8.Face-to-face communicat ion (communicate)helps us understand each other better.
9.Although travelling on the mountain road in winter was much more difficult than usual,we were brave enough to
overcome those difficult ies and complete the journey.(difficult)
211新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
10. The speaker gave an exciting speech .It encouraged everyone to practice speaking English every day.(speak)
四、 用括号中所给中文的英文适当形式填空（短语翻译）。
1. As we grow older,we'll find out we have two hands:one for helping ourselves;the other for helping others（. 发现）
2.It's natural for parents to worry about their children even when their children grow up.（担心）
3.Don't argue with me,John.Just do what I tell you.（争吵）
4.Joe's grandfather was ill and his father looked after him in perso n.（亲自）
5.With the AI technology developing, Nobody knows what wil l take plac e tomorrow.（发生）
五、完型填空
Now lots of parents will buy everything that their children want to have. If they go on with the habit their
children won't know the money 1 from hard work.
Some parents like 2 birthday parties for their children. 3 they keep on doing this, their children will think it
4 for them to enjoy birthday parties every year. Year after year, 5 they will forget their parents' birthdays and only
remember 6 own. It is against traditional habits.
Many parents don't let their children do housework.They think children have only one 7 to do. They should
study hard and be good 8 their lessons. If parents go on doing this, the children will only learn to open their mouths
to be fed and stretch out their arms to be dressed. When the children grow up, they won't be able to 9 anything, and
they won't even find a job. Parents should teach the children 10 to do housework because it can help them start
good habits of working by themselves.
（ A ）1．A．comes B．borrows C．takes D．makes
（ A ）2．A．having B．joining C．watching D．sending
（ B ）3．A．Though B．If C．Unless D．So
（ D ）4．A．surprising B．bad C．impossible D．necessary
（ B ）5．A．really B．maybe C．or D．luckily
（ A ）6．A．their B．his C．her D．your
（ B ）7．A．Homework B．thing C．chance D．work
（ C ）8．A．in B．with C．at D．to
（ A ）9．A．do B．see C．hear D．copy
（ B ）10．A．When B．how C．Where D．which
六、阅读单选
A
Dear Merry,
212新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
These days, I have problems with my study. In school I can’t listen to teachers carefully because I always
feel tired and sleepy. I don’t spend time with friends after class either, because I think it’s a waste(浪费) of time.
I even miss writing some answers in the test.
At home, I can’t get my homework done every night. My parents don’t let me stay up. So I have to get up
early the next morning to finish it. Lately, I even get a bad headache.
How can I solve these problems?
Yours,
Liu Ya
Dear Liu Ya,
When you have problems listening to teachers carefully in class, you can ask your teachers or deskmates to
remind you often. Then spending time talking about many different things with friends can make you happy. It’s
not a waste of time.
As for homework, when it’s hard to get it finished, one thing you can try is setting goals for yourself. Ask
your parents to help you. You must take a break if you don’t feel well. You might be surprised but a short rest
can help you get more done! Lastly, if you don’t worry and have enough sleep, your headache will leave you.
Yours,
Merry
（ A ）26．Liu Ya wrote the letter to Merry in order to________.
A．ask for help B．express worries C．share her experience D．share her happiness
（ B ）27．Liu Ya doesn’t want to stay with friends after class because________.
A．she needs to sleep B．she thinks it’s a waste of time
C．she has problems with her classmates D．she is afraid of talking with others
（ A ）28．Merry thinks________.
A．taking a rest is necessary B．being with parents is helpful
C．setting goals by parents is important D．listening to music is necessary
（ B ）29．According to the underlined part, what might Liu Ya’s teacher say to remind(提醒) her?
A．Sleep for a minute. B．Listen carefully.
C．Stop talking. D．Well done.
（ C ）30．From Liu Ya’s letter, we can find that she is too________.
A．happy B．careless C．nervous D．excited
B
During my travels through the mountains of Greece I was only ever scared once, it was dusk and as I walked. I
came across six large wolves that were feeding on the body of a dead animal. I had heard many stories about wolves as
a child and it was this animal that I feared more than any other. The wolves before me were huge, at least 6 feet long
and covered with thick grey fur.
213新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
As I went near, the wolves left the blood-covered snow that surrounded the body and started walking towards me,
one after another. They stopped about 20 meters from me and stared. The lead wolf raised his head into the air and
took in a deep breath, as if he was smelling me. The animals looked both beautiful and frightening, but I knew I
couldn't show them my fear. As I drew nearer, the lead wolf raised his head once more but this time let out a long, loud
cry. The awful cry rang out across the silent valley. I had never heard a more frightening sound. I was almost certain it
was a sign to be death.
Every moment I expected to see the pack of wolves’ dash at me. I knew my only hope was to pretend I had no
fear. I walked past the line of wolves, like a general moving among his soldiers. They cried out loud again. But when
they saw that their cry did not cause me to change my direction or make me run they feared to come after me, so they
let me pass and returned to the dead animal.
If I had turned back or tried to run away when they marched out to meet me, I am certain the whole pack would
have attacked me in a moment. But my show of false courage intimidated them and kept them back.
（ D ）31．Why didn't the wolves attack the man？
A．They were no longer hungry when they saw him.
B．The man was already known to the wolves.
C．They were too far away to catch the man.
D．The man showed no fear as he passed by.
（ B ）32．The underlined word 'intimidated' means .
A．encouraged B．scared C．doubted D．hurt
（ C ）33．What is the author's purpose in writing this story？
A．To show that mountains can be dangerous places.
B．To discuss the habits of mountain wolves.
C．To stress the need for courage when in danger.
D．To make people aware of the danger of wolves.
（ B ）34．Which of these is right according to the passage？
A．The wolves were friendly to the writer.
B．The writer knew wolves were dangerous in childhood.
C．The lead wolf asked the other wolves to stand in line.
D．The writer wasn't afraid of the wolves at all.
（ A ）35．The best title of the passage could be .
A．In Face of Fear B．My Trip to Greece
214新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
C．My Mountain Travels D．A Man without Fear
七、阅读回答问题
Everyone worries. But how do you deal with your worries? Whether your worries are big or small, you can take
these three steps to deal with your worries:
1. Try to find out what you’re worried about
Sometimes, you will know what you’re worried about. Other times, you might not. Try to find it out first; if you
can’t, you can ask for help.
2. Think of ways to make it better
There is always something you can do to help you feel less worried. Sitting there worrying is no fun and it won’t
solve your problem.
Grades at school are often top worries for kids. If you’re worried about grades, ask yourself these questions:
★ Why are grades important? What do grades mean to me?
★ How do I get ready for class? Do I go over my notes even when there isn’t a test?
★ Do I have a good place to do my homework?
★ Have I tried different ways of studying?
If your worry is about a fight you had with a friend, you might write down all the things you could do —write a
note to him or her, invite him or her to a basketball game, say sorry to him or her, etc. Once you have a list of things
you could do, you can choose the one that gets your friend back.
3. Ask for help
When you’re worried, it can help to find someone to talk to. You can ask your parents, friends or teachers for
help.
41．How many steps of dealing with your worries are mentioned(涉及) in the passage?
Three .
42．What will you do if you don’t know what you’re worried about?
Try to find it out first .
43．What will you do if you have a fight with your friend?
Write a note to him or her, invite him or her to a basketball game, say sorry to him or her, etc.
44．What are often a top worry for kids?
Grades at school .
45．Who can you ask for help when you’re worried?
Parents, friends or teachers .
215新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
八、选词填空
从方框中选择适当的单词，并用其正确形式填空，使短文完整、通顺(每词限用一次)。
bad,carefully,someone,say,probably,solve,happy,truth,if,time
Helping people is the right thing and will make us more popular with others.However,we can't say“yes”every 16.
time other people ask for help.Sometimes we 17. probably don't have enough time.Sometimes we don't have the
ability to help.In this case,we must know how to say“no”to others.
In fact,it's difficult for us 18. to say “no”because we don't want to make others angry or sad.We often worry that
saying“no”is bad for our relationship with others.As a result,we have to spend much time 19.solv ing problems for
people who ask for help.But if we are not able to do them well,it will make our relationship even 20. worse
So,how should we say“no”?Here are some ways we can try.First,if someone needs our help,listen to him/he
21. careful .The point is to let the person know that we are glad to help. Then we should tell the 22. truth .Just tell
the person why we can't help.But we must be kind and tell the reasons clearly,Most people are understanding.We don't
need to feel sorry about saying “no”.What's more, 23. if we finally decide to refuse him/her,we can also try to find
24. someone else to help him/her.In this way,he/she may get some comfort.
In short,we cannot make everyone 25. happy all the time.After all,saying“no”is a part of our life.
Unit 8 Let’s Communicate !
Section B How can we communicate better?
一．重点词汇梳理
1.nervous /'nɜːvəs/adj.担忧的；焦虑的；惶恐的 2.stranger /'streɪndʒə(r)/n. 陌生人
3.tip /tɪp/n.指点；实用的提示；尖端 v. 使倾斜；倾倒；给小费
4.carefully /'keəfəli/adv. 认真地；仔细地；小心地
5.listener /'lɪsənə(r)/n.听者 6.point /pɔɪnt/n. 观点；重点 n.指向；瞄准
7.surely /'ʃuəli/adv.想必；必定 8.continue /kən'tɪnju:/v. 持续；继续做
9.impolite /Impə'laɪt/adj. 不礼貌的；粗鲁的 10.personal /'pɜːsənl/adj.个人的；私人的
11.sincere /sɪn'sɪə(r)/adj. 真诚的；诚实的 12.pay /peɪ/v.(paid /peɪd/)付钱；付酬
13.attention /ə'tenfn/n.留心；关注 14.offer /'ɒfə(r)v. 提议；主动提出 n. 提供；出价
15.reasonable /'ri:znəbl/adj. 公平的；合理的 16.social /'səuʃl/adj.社会的；社交的n. 联谊会； 联欢会
17.medium /'mi:diəm/n. (pl.media /'mi:diə/)媒介；手段 18.trust / trʌst/n.&v. 信任；相信
19.misunderstanding /misʌndə'stændɪŋ/n.误解；误会 20 . event /i'vent/n.公开活动；重要事情
21.cost/kɒst/n.费用；价钱；代价 v. 价格为；使 损失；使付出努力
22.opportunity /ɒpə'tju:nəti/n. 机会；时机 23.benefit/'benɪfɪt/v.对……有用；使受益n. 益处； 成效
216新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
24 . reply /rɪ'plaɪ/n.&v.回答；回复 25.honour /'ɒnə(r)/(=honor)n.荣幸 ； 尊敬 v. 给…荣誉；表彰
26 . sincerely /sɪn'sɪəli/adv. 真诚地；诚实地 27. opening /'əupənɪŋ/adj. 开幕的；开始的n. 开始； 孔；洞
28.closing/'kləuzɪŋ/adj.结尾的；结束的n.停业；关闭 29. sentence /'sentəns/n. 句子；判决n.判决；宣判
30. date /deɪt/n. 日期；日子v. 确定年代；注明日期 31.clause/klɔ:z/n. 从句；分句
二．重点词汇变形
1.stranger(n.)陌生人→strange(adj.)奇怪的；陌生的
2.carefully(adv.)仔细地；认真地→careful(adj.) 认真的；谨慎的→careless(adj.)粗心的 →care(v.) 照顾；照料 (n.) 关心
3.surely(adv)想必；必定→sure(adj.) 确定的， 一定的
4.impolite(adj.)不礼貌的；粗鲁的→ impolite ly (adv.)不礼貌地→反: poli te (adj.) 礼貌的→ poli t ely (adj.) 礼貌地
5.personal(adj.)个人的；私人的→person(n.)人
6.sincere(adj.)真诚的；诚实的→sincerely(adv.)真诚地
7.reasonable(adj.)公平的；合理的→reason(n.) 理由
8.social(adj.)社会的；社交的→society(n.)社会
9.discover(v.) 发现；找到 →discovery(n.) 发现
10.helpful(adj.)乐于助人的；有帮助的→ 反:helpless(adj.) 无用的→ help (n.)(v.) 帮忙；帮助
11.understand(v.) 理解;了解;→understanding(n.)理解;领会→misunderstand(v.) 误解;误会→misunderstanding(n.)误会
12.easy(adj.)容易的;简单的 →easily(adv.)容易地→反: un easy (adj.)不易的→ un easil y(adv.)不容易地
13.advice(n.)建议 →advise(v.)建议
14.invite(v.) 邀 请 →invitation(n.)邀请；请柬；请帖
15.perform(v.) 表演；演出→performance(n.) 表现；表演→performer(n.)表演者；演出者
16.nervous(adj.)焦虑的；紧张的→nervously(adv.)紧张地；焦急地
17.agree(v.)同意赞同 →agreement(n.)同意；协定；→ 反 ： disagre e(v.) 不同意；不赞同 →disagreement(n.) 分歧;争
论
18.attend(v.)出席；参加→attender(n.)出席者；参观者→attendance(n.)出席；到场
三．重点短语通关
1. have a conversati on with a stranger 和陌生人对话 2. It ' s time for sb . to do sb . 该某人做某事的时间
3. show interest in 对……表现出兴趣 4. one of+ 最高级 + 可数名词复数 最...之一
5. choose the right topic 选择正确的话题 6.other personal Information 其他的个人信息
7. be happy to do sth . 很高兴做某事 8.argue with sb. 和某人争吵；和某人争论
9.move on to another topic 转移到另一个话题 10. have no idea 不知道
11. pretend to do sth . 假装做某事 12. find out 找到；发型；查明
217新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
13. tell the truth 说实话；说真话 14. pay attention to 注 意
15. body language 身体语言 16. stand up straight 站直
17.play an important role in 在……中扮演重要角色 18. offer to do sth . 主动提出做某事 话
19. social media 社交媒 20. instead of 代替；而不是
21 . build trust 建立信任 22.keep ..away from ...(使)远离；避免.….靠近
23. invite sb . to do sth . 邀请某人做某事 24.give a speech 发表演讲
25. take place 发生 26. cover all your travel and hotel costs 报销你所有的差旅费
27. an excellent opportunity 一个很好的机会 28. spare the time 抽出时间
29. benefit a lot from sb . 从某人身上受益匪浅 30 .look forward to doing sth . 期望做某事
31. hope to do sth .希望做某事 32 . be a great honour to do sth . 做某事是极大的荣幸
四．课文重点知识及语法梳理
Section B课文重现
How to Make a Better Conversation
Do you get nervous when you talk to someone? Do you find it hard to have a conversation with a
stranger? If you have such worries,it is time for you to learn some more conversation skills.Here are some
tips for making better conversations.
1. Listen carefully and show interest in others. One of the most important things is to listen to the
person you speak to. If you are a good listener, you will find some good
points to ask questions about. For example, if someone tells you their hobby
and you can ask questions about it, they will surely be happy to continue the
conversation.
2. Choose the right topic. Some of the best topics might be the weather,
sports, music, films, food, or travel. However, it is impolite to ask someone's
age, weight, or other personal information. Also, if you don't agree with
others, don't argue with them. Just move on to another topic.
3. Be honest and sincere. If you have no idea of a subject, just say" don't know much about it" If you
want to make the other person happy, mention his or her strong points. But don't just pretend to be nice,
because people can find out you are not telling the truth.
4. Pay attention to your body language. Sometimes it is just as important as your words. Don't be
nervous Stand up straight, smile,and be yourself-you have a lot to offer.
If you really work at it, you will find having conversations much easier.
218新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【考点1.】Do you get nervous when you talk to someone?当你和别人交谈时是否会感到紧张?
【用法详解】1.nervous 作形容词，意为“ 担忧的 ; 焦虑的 ; 胆怯的 ”。get/make sb nervous 使某人紧张。
Eg:The loud noise got me nervous.噪音让我紧张。
相关拓展：① be nervous about ...对……感到紧张。
Eg:Kelly was so nervous about her exam .凯莉对她的考试感到紧张。
②be nervous to do sth 做某事时紧张。
Eg:He felt nervous to speak in public.他害怕公开演讲。
牛
刀小试
( A )1.She is so about the competition of talk show tomorrow.
A.nervous B.happy C.excited D.strange
( C )2.Don’t be ,It is just a small text.
A.careful B.helpful C.nervous D.relaxed
【考点2.】Do you find it hard to have a conversation with a stranger?是否觉得与陌生人交流很难?
【用法详解】find it +adj. + to do sth.认为做某事是……(it是形式宾语，真正的宾语是动词不定式)
Eg:I find it relaxing to listen a soft music.我发现听一首温柔的歌很放松。
牛
刀小试
（ B ）1.She find it difficult French.
A.learn B.to learn C. learning D. learned
（ A ）2. Many people find it hard smoking.
A. to give up B. give up C.giving up D.gives up
【考点3.】If you have such worries,it is time for you to learn some more conversation skills.如果你有这
样的担忧，那么对你来说是时候学习更多的谈话技巧了。
【用法详解】It's time(for sb)to do sth 意为“到(某人)做某事的时间了”。
Eg:It's time(for me)to do my homework. 到(我)写作业的时间了。
相关拓展：It's time for 后跟名词或名词短语意思是到了做某事的时间了。
Eg:It's time for going home.=It's time for home.是时候回家了。
牛
刀小试
1. It’s time to go to school.(写出另外两个同义句)
219新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
It's time for school .
It's time for going to school .
2. It’s time for having dinner.(写出另外两个同义句)
It's time for dinner .
It's time to have dinner .
【考点4.】If you are a good listener,you will find some good points to ask questions about.如果你是一个
好的倾听者，你就会发现一些值得提问的观点。
【用法详解】point作名词，意为“观点”。常用短语为 have a poin t ,意为“有道理”。
Eg:He provided some more evidence in order to prove his point.他提供了更多
的证据来证明他的观点。
相关拓展：point 作动词，意为“指向；瞄准”。常见短语为 point a t ,意
为“指着...”。表示指着离说话人较近的人或物。
Eg:It is impolite to point at a person. 指着一个人是不礼貌的。
point to 意为“指向……”,表示指向离说话人较远的人或物。
Eg:He pointed to the person on the other side of the river.他指向河对岸的人。
【考点5.】For example,if someone tells you their hobby and you can ask questions about it,they will
surely be happy to continue the conversation.例如，如果有人告诉你他们的爱好，你可以就此提问，他们一
定会很乐意继续交谈。
【用法详解】①continue 作动词，意为“继续；持续”,相当于 go on 。
相关搭配：①continue doing sth 继续做某事，强调持续。
Eg:The rain continued falling all night. 雨下一整晚。
②continue to do sth 继续做某事，侧重重新开始。
Eg:She moved to New York to continue her studies. 她搬去了纽约，继续她的学业。
③continue with sth 继续某事
Eg:Please continue with your presentation.请继续你的演讲。
牛
刀小试
( B )1.she continued after a break.
A.write B.to write C. writing D. writes
( B )2.The teacher asked us to continue the topic we have learned yesterday.
A.discussing B.discuss C. to discuss D. discussed
220新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
【考点6.】However,it is impolite to ask someone's age,weight,or other personal information.但是，询问某人
的年龄、体重或其他个人信息是不礼貌的。
【用法详解】1.“ it is+ 形容词 (+for sb)+to do sth ”意为“对于某人来说做某事是......的”。it是形式主语，真正的主语
是动词不定式结构。句中形容词表示事物的特点,介词用 for,这类形容词有 easy 、
hard 、 important 、 possible 等 。
Eg:It is important for students to exercise every day. 对于学生来说每天锻炼是重要的。
相关拓展：“ it is+ 形容词 (+of sb)+to do sth ”意为“某人做某事是……的”。句中的形
容词表示人的性格品质，介词用of, 这类形容词有 nice 、 kind 、 clever 、 foolish 、
smart 等。
Eg:it is kind of you to help me. 你来帮助我，真是太体贴了。
2.impolite作形容词，意为“不礼貌的;粗鲁的” 。
相关搭配：It is impolite to do sth.做某事是不礼貌的
牛
刀小试
( B )1.It's impolite at others' mistakes.
A.laugh B. to laugh C. laughing D. laughs
( D )2.It is difficult for him himself.
A. look after B. looking after C. looks after D. to look after
3.He spoke impolitely to the elderly, which made everyone angry.(polite )
【考点7.】Pay attention to your body language.注意你的肢体语言。
【用法详解】pay attention是固定短语，意为“注意;常见;关注”,可以单独使用，后面接宾语时用pay attention
to,其中to是介词，后面可接名词、代词或动名词作宾语。
相关搭配： pay attention to doing sth 注意做某事。
Eg:Please pay attention to taking care of your baby. 请注意照顾你的婴儿。
牛
刀小试
1.To keep healthy,we should pay attention to wearing (wear)masks and washing hands.
2.You must pay attention to the traffic lights.（注意）
【考点8.】But don’t just pretend to be nice,because people can find out you are not telling the truth.
【用法详解】pretend作动词，意思为”假装，假装自己是…”。
相关搭配：pretend to do sth 假装做某事。
221新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:He pretended to be asleep when her mother came in .她妈妈进来时她假装睡着了。
相关拓展：pretend to be doing sth 专注正在做某事。
Eg:He is pretending to be writing.他假装正在写字。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.She pretended me when I greeted her.
A.not to see B.not seeing C.to not see D.seeing
（ C ）2.He pretended when I come in .
A. to sleep B.sleeping C.to be sleeping D.to sleeping
【考点9.】Stand up straight,smile,and be yourself—you have a lot to offer.站 直身子，面带微笑，做你自己
——你可以提供很多东西。
【用法详解】offer作动词，意为“提供；主动提出”。offer还可以作名词，意为“主动提议；出价”。
相关搭配：① offer sth to sb = offer sb sth 给某人提供某物。
Eg:He offered me a job.他给我提供了一份工作。
② offer to do s th 主动提出做某事;愿意做某事。
Eg:My dad has offered to pick us up. 我爸爸表示愿意开车来接我们。
③receive an offer 获得机会。
Eg:He received the offer of that famous University . 他被那所著名的大学录取了。
相关拓展：provide作动词，意为“提供”。 provide sb with sth=provide sth for sb 为某人提供某物。
Eg:He provided his brother with some food=He provided some food for his brother .他给他弟弟提供了一些
食物。
牛
刀小试
（ C ）1.What do you think of the hotel?
一Great!It can provide us________hot water even at night. And it can also provide food_________us any time.
A.for;for B.with;with C.with;for D.for;with
（ B ）2.He_________me a job,but I didn't accept.
A.offers B.offered C.provides D.provided
（ B ）3.The trip in Shanghai_________me great pleasure.
A.offered B.gave C.provided D.give
（ A ）4.-What else can we to the children in poor areas? I think we can________them with books and
222新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
clothes.
A.offer;provide B.provide;offer C.offer;give D.give;offer
【考点10.】This can keep us away from misunderstandings and argument. 这能帮助我们远离误解和争吵。
【用法详解】away from 意为“离开”，作后置定语。
Eg:He lives in a small village away from the city.他生活在一个离城市很远的小村庄里。
keep sb/sth away from sb/sth 使某人/某物远离......(keep表示动作有持续性)
Eg:Keep children away from the stove.让孩子远离炉子。
相关拓展： stay away from 离……远点;躲避…… run away from 逃跑;逃避;避开
牛
刀小试
完成句子
1.一人们喜欢旅行。
是的，有时我们需要短暂离开忙碌的生活一段时间。
一People like travelling very much.
-Yes, sometimes we do need a journey to run awa y from our busy life for a while.
2.他不沾酒。
He keeps awa y from wine.
3.让孩子离火远一点。
Keep the children away from the fire.
【考点11.】If you are able to attend the event, we will cover all your travel and hotel costs.如果您能参
加活动，我们将承担您所有的旅行和酒店费用。
【用法详解】①cost作动词，意为“花费”,其主语常是某个物品或某件事情。其过去式和过去分词均为cost。
Eg:This coat cost him 1823元。这件外套花了他1823元。
②cost还可作名词，意为“ 代价 ; 费用 ; 价钱 ”。at the cost of...意为“以……为代价”。
Eg:All costs of this trip is 1623 yuan.这次旅行的所有费用是1623元。
相关拓展：表示花费时cost与take、pay、spend的用法区别
①cost主语通常是事物 ， cost sb sth 意为“某物花费某人...（钱）；某物值多少
钱”。
Eg:These books cost 100 yuan.这些书值100元。
②take主语通常是形式主语it,常用于" it takes/ took sb+ 时间 +to do sth ”结构，
意为“做某事花费某人...时间”。
223新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
Eg:It takes him two days to finish his homework.完成作业花了他两天时间。
③spend主语通常是人，常用于“ spend+ 时间 / 金钱 +doing sth/on sth ”结构，意为“花费...时间做某事”。
Eg:He spent three days making a gift in person for his brother.他花了三天时间亲自给他哥哥做了一份礼物。
④pay主语通常是人,常与for 连用，意为“支付”。
Eg:He paid 23 yuan for this ticket.他支付了23元门票费。
牛
刀小试
（ D ）1.-What beautiful shoes you he wearing! They must be expensive.
一No,they only________10 yuan.
A.spent B.took C.paid D.cost
（ B ）2.-Will you please________for my dinner,Peter? -Sure!
A.spend B.pay C.cost D.take
（ A ）3.It will_______me too much time to read this book.
A.take B.cost C.spend D.pay
（ B ）4.This science book me a great amount of money.
A.took B.cost C.used D.spent
（ D ）5.I_____two hours on this maths problem yesterday.
A.take B.cost C.pay D.spent
【考点12.】We are looking forward to your reply.我们期待您的回复。
【用法详解】2.looking forward to意为“期待；期盼”后接名词/动名词(to为介词)即 look forward to doing
sth 期待做某事。
Eg:We are all looking forward to watching the documentary (纪录片)exploring the unknown
2.
我们都期待看纪录片《探索新境2》。
2.reply作名词,意为“回答;回复”。是可数名词，make a reply 做出回复。
作动词，后接 to 表示“回复”，即reply to sb./sth.
Eg:He replied to the question carefully.他仔细回答了问题。
牛
刀小试
（ A ）1.We look forward to Yunnan.我们期待去云南旅游。
A. visiting B.to visiting C.to visit D.visit
224新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
课
堂测试
一、单项选择
（ A ）1．If you listen to the teacher as ________ as your sister, you will learn this subject well.
A．careful B．more careful C．carefully D．more carefully
（ A ）2．—What do you think of the English song competition tomorrow?
—I’m ________ about it.because I never done it.
A．nervous B．worried C．crazy D．angry
（ D ）3．— Do you know if he ________ to play tennis with us tomorrow?
— I think he will come if he ________ available .
A．comes; is B．comes; will be C．came; will be D．will come; is
（ B ）4．Life is like a mirror. If you smile at it, it ______ back.
A．has smiled B．will smile C．smiled D．is smiling
（ C ）5．—When will you return the book to me? —I’ll give it to you ________ I finish it.
A．once B．until C．as soon as D．unless
（ B ）6．Either of them can take this job, but I wonder who does everything _______.
A．more careful B．more carefully C．the most careful D．the most carefully
（ B ）7．Our English teacher always talks about her ________ about communication in class.
A．opportunity B．points C．experience D．information
（ A ）8．Bill shows a lot of________in Chinese history.
A．interest B．information C．discussion D．experience
（ D ）9．Lily has some difficulties in English .
A．to learn B．Learn C．to learning D．learning
（ A ）10．He prefers playing basketball to the music.
A．listen B．listening C．listens D．to listen
二、 用所给单词的适当形式填空及汉语提示完成句子
1.I could hardly understand what he was saying because it was hard to follow a quick speaker (speak).
2.Students should do more housework.This is my perso n a l (person)opinion.
3.With the help of a robot,Eddie has no difficult ies (difficult)cleaning his house.
4.From the express ion (express)on his face,I realized he was very angry about the thing.
5.You should have good communicat ion (communicate) with parents if you have different opinions.
6.Our headmaster will invite a scientist to give us a speech (演讲)on space technology.
225新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
7.After four years of college education,more and more young men return to their hometowns to help with the local
(当地的)development.
8.Dave was so nervous (紧张的)that he couldn't say a whole sentence when he spoke in front of people.
9. Vacations are a chance (机会)to fill your free time with meaningful activities.
10.He preferred (较喜欢) country music to pop music when he was young.
三、完成句子
1．老师建议我们任何时候都不要放弃我们的梦想。
Our teachers advised us not to give up our dream anytime.
2．除非你一直努力学习， 否则你不可能成功。
You can't be successful unless you keep working hard.
3．除非你赶快，否则一定会错过那趟火车的。
Unless you hurry up , you will surely miss the train.
4．贝蒂是我们班最细心的女孩，她很少犯错误。
Betty is _ the most careful girl in our class and she seldom makes mistakes .
5．为了查明真相，他继续在网上寻找相关的信息。
To find out the truth,he continues to search the related information online.
四、完型填空
Aunt Sara is a wise woman. If you have a problem, you can always turn to her for 1 . Sometimes, she tells a
story to show her idea.
This summer, I wanted to find a job 2 I could make some money to buy things for the coming school year.
3 , with long nights of playing outside with friends, by the time I began to 4 jobs, they were all taken. That left
5 one of the few kids with no summer job. My summer ended up being long and 6 .
When Aunt Sara heard about this, she told me a 7 . There were three 8 living in a river. They were Make
Plans, Fast Thinker, and Wait and See. One day, they heard a fisherman saying that he would cast(投) a net into the
river the next 9 . Make Plans immediately decided to swim up river in order not to be 1 0 . Fast Thinker was not
worried. He said, "I will have a 1 1 when the man casts his net." Wait and See was not worried, either."I will decide
1 2 to do tomorrow morning, " he said.
The next morning, the fisherman cast his net. By this time, Make Plans was far away, but the other 1 3 fish
were caught. Fast Thinker pretended(假装) to be 1 4 . Of course, the fisherman did not want a dead fish, 1 5 he
threw him back into the river. But Wait and See was taken away and sold in the market.
（ B ）1．A．money B．advice C．news D．information
226新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ D ）2．A．if B．even though C．as D．so that
（ A ）3．A．However B．Instead C．Finally D．Suddenly
（ B ）4．A．give up B．look for C．take off D．take away
（ A ）5．A．me B．you C．her D．them
（ A ）6．A．boring B．busy C．exciting D．enjoyable
（ C ）7．A．song B．rule C．story D．secret
（ D ）8．A．ducks B．robots C．snakes D．fish
（ A ）9．A．morning B．noon C．afternoon D．evening
（ D ）10．A．heard B．hidden C．beaten D．caught
（ C ）11．A．party B．class C．plan D．picnic
（ B ）12．A．where B．what C．how D．when
（ A ）13．A．two B．three C．four D．five
（ C ）14．A．strong B．small C．dead D．rude
（ D ）15．A．but B．or C．because D．so
五、阅读单选
A
Water is the root(根本) of life. No one can live without water. On the one hand, although seventy-five percent
of the world is covered with water, about ninety-seven percent of it is sea water, or salt water. So the water we could
drink is really limited. On the other hand, because the number of people in the world is becoming larger and larger,
more and more drinking water is needed. We should do something to save water in our everyday life.
● Try to fix dripping taps (滴水的龙头) or leaky(漏的) toilets at your home.
● Turn the tap off as much as you can—don’t use running water to wash your hands, brush your teeth, wash
vegetables and so on.
● Never pour away waste water when there may be another use for it such as watering a plant or a garden, or for
cleaning.
● Do not often water your lawn(草坪). As a general rule, lawns only need watering every 5 to 7 days in summer
and every 10 to 14 days in winter.
● Take short showers and save the baths.
（ D ）1．People can only drink about of water on the earth.
A．97% B．75% C．25% D．3%
（ B ）2．The word “limited” in the passage probably means “.
A．足够的 B．有限的 C．新鲜的 D．必须的
227新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
（ C ）3．You’d better water your lawn in summer.
A．once a day B．twice a day C．once a week D．twice a week
（ A ）4．Which of the following is NOT the way to save water?
A．Using running water to wash hands. B．Using waste water to water flowers.
C．Taking a shower as quickly as possible. D．Turning off the dripping taps.
（ A ）5．Which could be the best title for the passage?
A．How to Save Water B．Where Water Comes from
C．How to Use Drinking Water D．Don’t Use Running Water
B
Dick was a college student. He was studying history. But at the end of the first school year he did not pass the
exam. A month later he sat for the makeup exam, but he was down again. Dick was very afraid because he knew he
might have to leave the college.
When Dick’s father knew this, he went to see the professor(教授). “Dick is a good boy,” said the father. “If you
let him pass it this time, I’m sure he will study harder next year and pass all the exams with very good marks.”
“No, that’s quite impossible,” answered the professor. “He almost knows nothing about history. Last month I
asked him when Napoleon(拿破仑) died, and he said he didn’t know.”
“Please, sir, give him another chance.” said the father. “ Sometimes we were too busy to read the evening papers
carefully, so we even don’t know Mr. Napoleon was ill.”
（ D ）6．Dick had been in college for .
A．four years B．about one year
C．more than three years D．more than two years
（ B ）7．Napoleon was .
A．a famous professor B．the name of a student
C．the name of a teacher D．the name of a famous Frenchman
（ A ）8．“Sat for the makeup exam” in the passage means “.
A．参加补考 B．下决心 C．期末考试 D．不及格
（ D ）9．The father went to the college because .
A．he wanted to give the teacher some presents
B．he missed his son very much
C．the professor asked him to do so
D．he hoped the professor would let his son pass the exam
（ B ）10．From the passage, we get to know that .
228新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．the professor hated Dick very much
B．the father didn’t know Napoleon at all
C．Dick worked very hard in the college
D．the father often read the evening papers carefully
C
Letter 1
Whatever I do, I always wonder if other people will like it. How can I stop worrying about what they think?
─Eva, 14, Illinois
Letter 2
My dream is to be on the Olympic team for gymnastics. My dad thinks I started too late and I'll never be able to
make it. He puts me down, but I want his support. What should I do?
─Eric, 9, Texas
Letter3
I just moved and I'm kind of shy, so how do I make new friends?
─Jessica, 11, Canada
Dr. Molly's Answer①
You should tell him about your dream and that if you work really hard, it might happen even though you started
late. The sooner you tell your dad how you feel, the sooner you'll be able to work on making your dream come true.
Dr. Molly's Answer②
Nobody knows you at your new school. You have nothing to lose, so gather up all your courage(鼓起全部勇气)and
go over to someone who looks friendly and introduce yourself. You can ask that person about your teacher or the
other kids in your class to break the ice. Good luck!
Dr. Molly's Answer③
Just be yourself and try not to care about what others think. The more you think about it, the worse you will feel.
Always act strongly and confidently. Even if you are a little unsure of something, don't doubt(怀疑)your abilities to
do things right. Just relax.
A．wants to make new friends B．is outgoing and has many friends
C．is afraid to tell her mom about her failing a test D．keeps worrying about what other people think about her
（ A ）12．_________ dreams to be on the Olympic team.
A．Erica B．Eva C．Molly D．Jessica
（ B ）13．Erica's dad doesn't support her because he thinks she _________.
A．is a little shy and can't do it well B．didn't start at a very early age
C．is too young to be on the team D．doesn't work hard enough
（ D ）14．According to Dr. Molly, Eva should _________.
229新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
A．hold on to her dream B．always tell the truth
C．be brave to say hello to others D．be confident about herself
（ D ）15．Which is the correct order of Dr. Molly's answers to the three letters?
A．①③② B．③②① C．②①③ D．③①②
六、短文填空：阅读下面短文，在空白处填入一个适当的单词或括号内单词的正确形式
Jim and Cathy come from a typical American family.As 1. an elder brother,Jim often offers 2. to help
(help)Cathy work out problems.Jim plays football with great skills.But there is a cloud hanging over Jim's 3.
development(develop).His mother often compares him 4. with other children.She always wants him to compete
with others and win.This causes much pressure for Jim. It also pushes Jim into a crazy 5. and nervous place.Jim often
argues with his mother and the 6. relation ships (relation)between them is difficult.Jim doesn't want to continue 7.
practic ing (practice)football anymore.I guess Jim wants to cut out all the matches.
In my opinion,everyone has his own world to look through.It's wrong to push Jim so hard.Perhaps they should deal
with this problem.They should find a chance 8. to explain (explain)to each other as quickly as possible.Firstly,as
9.membe rs (member)of a family,they should often communicate to get on well with each other.It's clear that parents
can't give children too much pressure.Instead,they should allow their children to do whatever they
like.Secondly,parents should have proper 1 0. communicat ion (communicate)with their children.
七、阅读匹配（六选五）
根据短文内容，从方框内所给的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，使其意思通顺。有一项多余。
Everyone may have problems,and they may make you sad.But do you know how to solve them?Here are some ways to
help you.
Talk,talk,talk.
1 . Find someone you can trust and talk about your problems with him or her.You'll feel good in this way.
2.
It’s difficult to think about anything else when you're having a difficult time,so try to do something to relax.That can
be shopping with your mum or watching your favourite movies.
Think about great things.
Having a problem?3. Try to think about all the great things in your life.They can help you see
problems in a different way.
Write it down.
4 . It can also help you get your worries out of your head,and then you can start to think what you should
do.When you look back,you'll find you're the best.
5.
230新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
If you're sad,just cry out.Don't try to hide(隐藏)your true feelings.It's not good for your health.
A.Show how you feel,
B.Do something to relax,
C.Always believe in yourself.
D.It's easy for you to think of bad things and feel sad.
E.When things go wrong,it's important to talk about them.
F.Writing down what you think can help you know how you're feeling.
八、书面表达
“A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.”这句谚语让我们体会到了朋友的珍贵之处。交流是我
们收获珍贵友谊的重要途径之一。那么我们应如何与朋友交流，让友谊长存呢?请你以“How to Communicate
with Our Friends”为题写一篇英语短文。
要 求 ：
1.词数80左右，已给出部分不计入总词数；
2. 文中不得出现真实姓名和校名 。
How to Communicate with Our Friends
A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart. It's important for us to communicate with our friends. Here
are some suggestions.
First, we should trust our friends. Second, we should l e arn to share with our friends,especially when we have
problems. Sharing problems is like cutting them in half. Third, we should help each other. When our friends are in
trouble, we should try to help them solve problems. Finally, we should do something together. This can help us
understand e ach other better .
In a word, we should communicate with our friends. lt can make our friendship stronger.
231新人教八年级英语上册单元同步知识点与语法精讲精练
232
